UC-NRLF 
 
 $B MDb 55T 
 
 lYNTAX 
 
 n.mmvKoop 
 
 J 
 
y^<,\c 
 
 VOORSANGER COLLECTION 
 
 OF THE L^ ^X 
 
 SEMITIC LIBRARY "Vl/'Z / 
 
 University 
 
 OF TH E - ^ - 
 
 OF CalifornFa 
 
 GIFT OF 
 
 REV. JACOB VOORSANGER, D.D. 
 
 1906 
 
MANUAL 
 
 OF 
 
 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
MANUAL 
 
 OF 
 
 HEBREW SYNTAX 
 
 BY 
 
 Rev. J. D. WIJNKOOP 
 
 Litt. Hum. Cand. in the University of Leyden, 
 
 Rabbi of the Jewish Congregation in 
 
 Amsterdam. 
 
 TRANSLATED FROM THE DUTCH 
 
 Rev. Dr. C. VAN DEN BIESEN 
 
 Prof, of Theology at St. Joseph's Foreign Missionary College , 
 Mill-Hill. 
 
 LONDON : 
 
 L U Z A C & Co. 
 
 PUBLISHERS TO THE INDIA OFFICE. 
 
 46, GREAT RUSSELL STREET. 
 
 1897. 
 
PRINTED BY E. J. BRILL, AT LEYDEN. 
 
LETTER OF COMMENDATION Aq\ ^ 
 
 FROM 
 
 HIS EMINENCE CARDINAL VAUGHAN 
 
 Archbishop of Westminster. 
 
 My dear Dr. Van den Biesen. 
 
 You have followed the example of the great St. Jerome 
 who acquired his knowledge of the Hebrew tongue by 
 becoming a learner under Jewish doctors, and now you 
 are about to render assistance to others by translating 
 the work on Hebrew Syntax drawn up by your Hebrew 
 master the Rev. J. D. WljNKOOP, Rabbi at Amsterdam. 
 
 You tell me that this Syntax promises great lin- 
 guistic merits. I much regret that upon this point I 
 can myself form no opinion. But I have confidence in 
 your judgment on such a matter. And of this I am 
 certain that you will be rendering a great public ser- 
 vice to the Church in England if you help to promote 
 the study of the Bible languages, especially the Hebrew. 
 One of the pressing needs of the Church in England 
 is a Catholic school abreast of the times and of the 
 
 421831 
 
VI LETTER OF COMMENDATION. 
 
 latest researches in all that concerns Biblical science. 
 This I have a strong hope to see established. There 
 are many growing up like yourself, enamoured of these 
 studies. It is for you who possess knowledge to do all 
 that you can to promote the formation of such a Ca- 
 tholic school. 
 
 Believe me 
 Your faithful & devoted servant, 
 
 Herbert Cardinal VAUGHAN. 
 
AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
 
 By publishing a Dutch Manual of Hebrew Syntax I 
 believe I am corresponding with the wish of many of 
 my countrymen. At least I have heard several com- 
 plaints of the want of such a book. I had moreover 
 in my Manual of Hebrew Grammar (Edition Joachims- 
 thal, Amsterdam 1888) promised to undertake the com- 
 posing of a Syntax. 
 
 As regards the plan I have adopted in my Manual 
 of Syntax I should like to draw attention to the fol- 
 lowing points. I need scarcely remark that I have 
 consulted and utilised existing works bearing on the 
 subject. Yet in the treatment of certain chapters I have 
 thought it necessary to work independently for reasons 
 which on comparison would be obvious. 
 
 This applies in the first place to my treatment of 
 the infinitive and participle of the verb. As I could 
 not accept the existing opinions concerning them, I 
 have preferred to adopt a simpler theory arising from 
 their unique twofold character of verbum and nomen. 
 
 Further, the connecting of two verbs into one idea 
 
VIII AUTHOR S PREFACE. 
 
 appeared to me to require a more or less original 
 treatment, while in the manner of dealing with the 
 status constructus and n^''Tn 'H certain alterations seemed 
 to me desirable. 
 
 The terminology, moreover, for naming the cases, 
 such as we find in the classic and modern languages, 
 has in so far it was possible been intentionally avoided. 
 This plan I adopted, because in Hebrew scarcely any 
 trace can be found of the so called flexion of the nomina , 
 by which the various cases are expressed. The status 
 constructus which most of all would remind us of them , 
 on the one hand diflers from them because of the alte- 
 ration of vowels, and the abbreviation instead of pro- 
 longation of words, and on the other hand it is capable 
 of expressing so many cases, that it cannot well be 
 identified with one or more of them. 
 
 Finally, it should be observed that I have ventured 
 to divide this Manual in a manner different to that 
 usually adopted , by first considering the different parts 
 of the sentence , and then its construction. 
 
 J. D. WIJNKOOP. 
 
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE. 
 
 This volume, as the title indicates, is not intended 
 to be a complete or exhaustive work on Hebrew Syn- 
 tax. By treating of its primary principles, its aim is 
 to initiate students into its more difficult problems and 
 to prepare them for more profound and comprehensive 
 works. 
 
 The Manual is based upon the Hebrew text as deter- 
 mined by the Massorah, irrespective of the demands of 
 textual criticism. 
 
 The translation of this Manual has been undertaken 
 from motives of gratitude for the valuable instruction 
 received from the author in time past, and from a 
 desire to introduce to English students a Hebrew Syn- 
 tax, the work of one so eminently qualified for the 
 task, the author having been Professor of Hebrew at 
 the Israelitish Seminary in Amsterdam for upwards of 
 25 years, besides giving proof of his Hebrew scholar- 
 ship in his three essays "The signification of the 
 word nnj^" "The signification of the adverb T^" and 
 "nro^n ""Dl"! sive Leges de accentus Hebraicae linguae 
 
X ' translator's preface. 
 
 ascensione", the latter of which was pubHshed both in 
 Latin and Hebrew. 
 
 For the defects in translation and any errors that 
 may have crept into this little work, the translator 
 trusts to the kind indulgence of the reader, and will 
 be grateful for corrections. 
 
 C. Van den BIESEN. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 Letter of Commendation from Cardinal Vaughan. V 
 
 Author's Preface VII 
 
 Translator's Preface . . . . IX 
 
 Contents . XI 
 
 PART I. NOMEN. 
 CHAPTER I. The noun. 
 
 I. Gender of the noun i 
 
 2. Number of the noun 2 
 
 CHAPTER II. Determination of the noun. 
 
 3- ^T^P '^ 7 
 
 4- The adjective 12 
 
 5. Status Constructus 16 
 
 6. Apposition 19 
 
 7. Other means of connecting two nouns . 21 
 
 8. Comparative and Superlative 22 
 
 9. Numerals 24 
 
 CHAPTER III. Pronouns. 
 
 10. Personal pronouns and pronominal suffixes 27 
 
 II. Demonstrative and Interrogative pronouns 31 
 
XII CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 12. Relative pronoun 33 
 
 13. Pronouns for which the Hebrew has no 
 
 proper words 35 
 
 PART II. Verbum. 
 CHAPTER IV. The verbal forms. 
 
 14. The use of the nn^ 38 
 
 15. The use of the THj; 40 
 
 16. The "15^ and Tfl^ with 1 conversive . . 42 
 
 17. The cohortative and jussive 44 
 
 18. The use of the imperative 47 
 
 19. Persons of the verb 49 
 
 20. Modifications of the verbal idea .... 52 
 
 21. Connection of two verbs 52 
 
 CHAPTER V. The nominal forms. 
 
 22. The Infinitive 57 
 
 23. Use of the Participle 61 
 
 PART III. The Particles. 
 CHAPTER VI. Adverbs and Adverbial expressions. 
 
 24. Adverbs 65 
 
 25. Words expressing negation 66 
 
 CHAPTER VII. Interrogative particles. 
 
 26. Interrogative words and sentences ... 73 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. The remaining particles. 
 
 27. Prepositions . 80 
 
 28. Conjunctions 94 
 
 29. Interjections 114 
 
CONTENTS. XIII 
 
 Page 
 
 PART IV. Construction of the Sentence. 
 CHAPTER IX. Nominal sentences. 
 
 30. Subject and Predicate 115 
 
 31. Expression of the copula in nominal sen- 
 tences 119 
 
 CHAPTER X. Verbal sentences. 
 
 32. Object of the verb 120 
 
 33. Verbs with a twofold object 128 
 
 34. Construction of the Passive 130 
 
 35. Connection of the noun with the verb 
 
 through addition of letters or words . 132 
 
 CHAPTER XI. The influence of the subject upon 
 the predicate as regards gender and number. 
 
 36. Constructio ad Synesin 135 
 
 37. Construction of sentences in which the 
 
 predicate precedes the subject. . . . 138 
 38. Compound subjects 141 
 
 CHAPTER XII. Sequence of the different parts of 
 the sentence. 
 
 39. Place of the subject and predicate . . . 144 
 40. The places of the other parts of the sen- 
 tence 147 
 
 41. Case Absolute 149 
 
 Index of passages quoted 153 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 Page 3 line 21 fo 
 
 24 
 89 
 38 
 38 
 46 
 
 49 
 
 TOO 
 127 
 
 14 
 22 
 
 7 
 15 
 23 
 29 
 II 
 II 
 
 Zech. 13,9 read 
 
 39 
 
 occurence ,, 
 
 occurrence 
 
 relative and ,, 
 
 and relative 
 
 Fulturum ,, 
 
 F'uturum 
 
 wit-hout ,, 
 
 with -out 
 
 a the third ,, 
 
 the third 
 
 someti-mes ,, 
 
 some -times 
 
 prophetise ., 
 
 prophesy 
 
i'JL 
 
 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 N O M E N. 
 
 CHAPTER I THE NOUN. 
 
 I Gender of the noun. 
 \ "" i) With Hving beings, the feminine gender is either 
 formed through the appending of a feminine termination 
 to a mascuHne noun, as TT\B cow from "ID ox, of ex- 
 pressed by a different word , as ^^ father DNl mother. 
 (See author's grammar 54, SpelHng and derivation of 
 nouns.) 
 
 There also are nouns (communia) which remain un- 
 changed when used as feminine, the gender of which, 
 therefore, can be distinguished only by the construction; 
 e.g. "IjJD N^pn {m.'d.'$>z.) five oxen Ex. 21, 37; ni^;|J 1i:gn 
 (fem.) the herd giving suck Gen. 33, 13; U^^^ D''^Q3 
 (masc.) camels coming Gen. 24, 63; np''^''!p D''^DJ (fem.) 
 milch camels Gen. 32, 16. 
 
 2) The gender of other nouns again cannot even be dis- 
 tinguished by the construction. These always have the 
 
2 he,bre!w syntax. 
 
 same gender whether they are used for masc. or fern, {epi- 
 coena)] e. g. ^IDti? 311 a bear bereaved of her whelps Hos. 
 13, 8; Prov. 17, 12; D'l^JDp l^ipl^i:?! our cows are with young 
 Ps. 144, 14. In this manner D^3 dog, 3N!J ze;^//", are 
 always constructed as masc, but ^lff)% hare, nTPO stork , 
 HjI'' <3f^z/^, as fem. 
 
 Rem. 1 3n j/^^ 3^ar is once found fem. in construction: H^^^iiril 
 131 Qinti^ ^^^ there came forth tzuo she bears 2 Kings 2, 24. 
 
 Rem. 2 Even in cases where a proper word exists to express the 
 yVw., the masc. is sometimes used instead of the fe)?i. e. g. 11?0n ^^^^ 
 ass 2 Sam. 19,27; pl}^ -^m^ Ps. 42,2. An example of this in the case 
 of a human being occurs once Gen. 23,4, where PQ refers to a woman. 
 
 3) Besides those instances, in which the feminine form 
 is required, there are others where it is used by pre- 
 ference : 
 
 (a) to express an abstract idea by means of an ad- 
 jective used as substantive; e. g. T\yn calamity, HilD^ 
 steadfastness Ps. 5, 10. This often occurs especially 
 in the plur. ; as Hl^ll^ grandeur, haughtiness Ps. 12,4; 
 ni31 much Ps. 40,6; ni'^nii^n the future Jes. 41, 23; 
 (The pronouns )^^T\ , Hi^T are frequently used for the 
 indefinite this, that) 
 
 [b] to express a collective idea ; e. g. T\ a fish T\T[ 
 fish, 111^ a traveller T\XT\^ a caravan , \V,. ci tree n^^. 
 timber ]Qr. 6, 6; n^13 exiles, D^'^)"^ inhabitants Jes. 12, 6; 
 n?!)^^ enemies Michah 7, 8, 10. 
 
 Hence we find the poetic forms: |1''V PS == p!i ^i?; 
 
I. GENDER OF THE NOUN. 3 
 
 Rem. 3 With certain words , on the contrary , we find just the 
 opposite, viz. that the fern, denotes an individual object while the 
 masc. is used in a collective sense; e. g. n^i^ti^ ^ ^^^'^ "l^tfi^ hair\ rT'ii^ 
 
 a ship "i^Ji^ a fleet i Kings 9, 26. 
 
 t: ' 
 
 4) The following are usually construed as fem, : 
 {a) names of countries and towns, and in general na- 
 mes which denote /and, town, court, way etc.; e. g. 
 J^liJ land, ^5n earth, "T"^ town, "^jll road, 1?in court, 
 IID^ north, h\m hades. 
 
 Rem. 4 But since the names of countries refer in the first place to 
 the people who live in them , they are occasionally constructed as inasc.\ 
 e. g- UT\^ V^i< "ID^'^I and Edom said unto him Num. 20, 18 : ^Q^ Tr\T\^ 
 
 v: T" V - TT T : 
 
 Jehudah is fallen Jes. 3, 8. 
 
 Yet even in these cases the fem. construction is not excluded ; e. g. 
 
 D^"liiQ pTnni and the Egyptians urged Ex. 12, 33; QIJ^ HDi ^y^^a 
 : ' - v: V - T-: t t 
 
 resteth Jes. 7, 2. 
 
 (b) names of members or parts of the body, both of 
 men and animals, as bX] foot, 1^3 womb etc. 
 
 Rem. 5 Some names however of this class are usually constructed as 
 masc.\ e. g. HS mouth.^ 1i<1^ throat.^ T^"^ neck .^ T^ nose .^ and others 
 occasionally, as yW^ tongue Ps. 22, 16; l") Ez. 2,9; |iy Zech. ^3^ 9. 
 
 {c) names of the powers of nature, as '^^^ fire , O'l"! 
 wind. 
 
 Rem. 6 Yet ti^Qtfi^ sun.^ "11{^^ light ^ mostly occur as masc, perhaps 
 because the fem. nouns nQH* heat .^ and Hlli^ light also exist. 
 
 T T 
 
 {d) names of instruments, as D"]!! sword, ^J?^ shoe. 
 
4 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 2 Number of the noun. 
 
 i) To express plurality the Hebrew language employs 
 beside the ordinary plural-ending: 
 
 (a) for animate beings, sometimes a totally different 
 
 noun with a collective meaning ; e. g. Hti^ a sheep , 
 
 \M "^T^^ four sheep Ex. 21, 37; "llti^ ayi ox, "Ij^D ntS^pO 
 
 five oxen ibid. 
 {b) for several nouns, the fem. form with a collective 
 
 meaning. See i, 3 ^. 
 
 (c) for certain other nouns, the singular form, which 
 then serves as a collective: ^^)^ a man and meri, }^^. 
 a tree and trees, DD"! a chariot and chariots. 
 
 Rem. 1 Concerning ny''l^n'n (definite article) with this class of shi- 
 gularia see 3,4. 
 
 2) Dualia and pluralia (dualia and pluralia tantum) 
 are often employed where in other languages the sin- 
 gular is generally used : 
 
 (a) for ideas of space, as D^iD^ heaven , d;"D water, HI^IIID 
 //^f ^ ^/ ///^ /<?^/ , ni^i<ip //^<:^ ^/ the head. 
 
 [b) for certain parts of the body which express ex- 
 tension or surface, D'l^D face, ^"I^^J^ (as well as 
 
 (r) for ideas of time , as U^'% life , D"*;!?! ^/<^ age , ^^^^.\ 
 youth. 
 
 (d) for states or conditions of persons or things, as ''lliD 
 blindness, nho^V. childlessness. 
 
 Rem. 2 Pluralia of this kind especially occur in poetry e. g. D''V^J^ 
 perverseness Jes. 19, 14; D^JtS^n itefiebrae) darkness Jes. 50, 10; D^'i^i^ 
 
2. NUMBER OF THE NOUN. 5 
 
 faithfulness Jes. 26, 2 D^^lli^H (deliciae) delight Mich. 1,16; niDID 
 reproach V^. 6()^ 11. 
 
 {e) for ideas of power, dominion , majesty (pluralis ma- 
 jestatis) e.g. D''^]^5 possessor, Ex. 21,29; ^^T^^. lord 
 Jes. 19, 4; D^ti^j; creator Ps. 149, 2; D^D^H penates , 
 U^'^^\> the Holy One Hos. 12, i; Pr. 9, 10 (ef. Jos. 
 24, 19). 
 
 Rem. 3 All these nouns however (except DIDID) are found also in 
 
 T : 
 
 the singular. Concerning the construction of these plurals with adjec- 
 tives see 4, 13; and with verbs 36,3. 
 
 3) Of two ideas, joined into one by the status con- 
 structus, only the nomen regens (main idea) is placed in 
 the plural ; e. g. b'V\ li^i^^ a courageous man , b'T\ "'l^^^$ 
 courageous men, ''^'p^ ]5 Benjamite , ''^''P^ ""A? Benjamites, 
 
 Rem. 4 Both words of the st. eonstr.^ are very rarely found in the 
 plural e. g. Q^i^^D Tl!!! prisotis Jes. 42,22; and of yet rarer occurence 
 
 are the instances where the nomen rectum (subordinate idea) alone is 
 
 placed in the plural, e. g. DlDi^ rT'B families^ tribes Num. 1,2. 
 
 -r .. . 
 
 4) When a noun with a plural suffix refers in the mind 
 of the writer or speaker to each of the individuals de- 
 signated by that suffix, it may as in English be placed 
 in the singular; e. g. DDDD^ your heart, DJ''p^ their 'right 
 hand. 
 
 (5) With ^3 (st. constr of ^D) = all, the noun belonging 
 to it either stands in the sing, or plur. ; e. g. '^^^^ ^3 > 
 D^ti^^i:?n ^3 all men, or is repeated in the sing.; e. g. 
 W^)X\ ^^^ ^3 all men (see 4, 6; 13, 2.) 
 
 The same signification however is also obtained by 
 
6 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 repetition of the noun in the sing, without b'D (and this 
 with or without 1 copulative) e. g. '^^\!K ^"ti^ or tr^i<1 '^^)^ 
 all meUy "111 "in or "lllj "111 // generations. 
 
 6) The repetition of a noun (in the sing, or plur.) 
 sometimes produces a distributive sense; e. g. 11^ "IIV. 
 every drove Gen. 32, 17 ; D""!?!! D""?^. /?/// ^/ trenches 2 Kings 
 3, 16; and if necessary even with the st. constr. fll^^B 
 "IDH ri*li^3 slime pits after slime pits Gen. 14, 10 ( 13, 2.) 
 
 7) The repetition of a singular noun without ^3 but 
 with 1 copulative may denote a diversity of kind ; e. g. 
 l^i^J ]5^ double weight, ^\ D^. <3; double heart. 
 
 8) Names of materials when placed in the plural de- 
 signate either portions of such materials or things com- 
 posed of them , as ^D3 , silver ; D''Dp3 , silver coins , Hi^n 
 wheat; D^'t^il, grains of wheat. In like manner Dl, blood, 
 when considered as an organic unity, in the plur. is D''p"l 
 blood that is shed, blood spots-, hence its meaning blood 
 guiltiness. 
 
 9) The plural form is occasionally employed to ex- 
 press an indefinite singular, t01"1ijl '"in bv_ on one of the 
 summits of Ararat Gen. 8, 4; "1^?^ ^1^3 i7t one of the ci- 
 ties of Gilead Judges 12, 7. 
 
 Rem. 5 Concerning the plur. with ^ distributive see 18,2. 
 
3- nrTH'n 7 
 
 CHAPTER II DETERMINATION OF THE NOUN. 
 
 3 f^v;ip 'n 
 
 i) r^)!j.''TL! 'n generally takes the place of our definite 
 article and is used to determine a noun. 
 
 It is however also used where nothing definite is in- 
 tended : 
 
 [a) before names of well known materials, objects or 
 classes of objects; e. g. DTOI P^QpS njpDS on {the} 
 cattle^ on (the) silver ^ on (the) gold Gen. 13, 2. In 
 like manner we always say t2^^3 ^It^ he burned it in 
 (the) fire. 
 
 [b) frequently in comparisons; e. g. V^1D3 D''i^5 !l^tf3 
 
 as (the )snow as (the) wool as (the) scarlet Jes. i, 18; 
 "1DD3 as a book. 
 
 When however the noun is determined by an 
 
 adjective n^TH 'D is omitted e. g. DDID "IJDD as 
 
 a carcase trodden under foot Jes. 14, 19; n7l.]1i iDJiD 
 
 as a wandering bird Pr. 27, 8. 
 
 [c) frequently also with abstract ideas, or in the case 
 of physical or moral evils; e. g. D"''1)DD5 with (the) 
 blindness Gen. 19, 11 ; p.ij Hl^D^ l^HH (the) darkness 
 cover eth the earth Jes. 60, 2, or also when such 
 evils are personified by a living being; e.g. T?'^^ 
 a lion I Kings 20, 36; ^^^ a lion Amos 3, 12. 
 
 {d) in the well known expression Dl^'n "'H^l it happened 
 one day, which is sometimes even more emphati- 
 cally determined, Djn DITO ^^^l Gen. 39, 11. 
 
 2) nj^iTn 'n is used moreover to change in a certain sense 
 
8 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 a nomen appellativum into a noinen proprium , as DliJ 
 man, D"J?n the first man\ DTl'^i^ God ,U^xf>^T\ the {eternal) 
 God; "in J river, "in|n />^^ Euphrates. 
 
 3) Hence , n;^''Tn 'n is placed before names of moun- 
 tains, towns, and rivers, of which the derivation is 
 still so clear, that they can be thought of as nomina 
 appellativa; e. g. pi^^D (the white mountain, the snow 
 mountain) (the) Lebanon; ""^n (the heap of ruins) Ai; 
 nj|J5in (the hill) Gibea; \T\^ (the river) Jordan. 
 
 4) Further, n^TTn 'H is used before a singular noun 
 with a collective sense to designate all the individuals 
 implied by it; e. g. ^^3^^311, the Canaanites Gen. 13, 7; 
 T\^^T\ the women Eccles. 7, 26; "'^^liin ^ti^p the proverb 
 of the ancients i Sam. 24, 14. (see 2, \ c). 
 
 5) Finally, n^''l.''n 'D is employed where a person or 
 object is addressed, as ^HiPn Ye congregation Num. 15, 15; 
 D^^pjD Ye elders Joel 1,2. 
 
 6) On the contrary nVTH'n is often omitted in poe- 
 try before names of objects which are unique in their 
 kind, as p.i<l, h'WD , DIDH. This also occurs in prose in 
 certain well known and frequently used expressions as 
 ^5^1 and the border , "1^,1Q bx\)^ the tent of meeting. 
 
 7) Nouns which are already rendered definite by the 
 St. constr. or by a suffix, do not take n)J.''Tn'n. But if a 
 noun, already definite by a st. constr. is to be further 
 determined, the Hi^^Tn'n then is placed before the nom. 
 rectum; e. g. D^H'^i^ ")3"I a word of God U^Tb^T\ ID! the 
 word of God; jDNl rlH^ stone tables , jJiSiri riP^ the stone 
 tables. 
 
3. n^^^^n 'n 9 
 
 Rem. 1 nj^''l'^n 'n is found in a few instances before the nom. regens 
 of the St. constr. e. g. Dti^D^n nSTDH i^^ brazen altar 2 Kings 16, 14-, 
 and sometimes also before a noun that has a suffix: e. g. l^Hi^n ''^^y 
 
 ' t; T T 
 
 tent Jos. 7,21; in^DD ^^ t^<^^ smote them Jes. 9, 12. 
 
 8) ri^''Tri'n placed before the nom. rectum alone, ser- 
 ves also for those instances in which both ideas of the 
 St. constr. have to be determined ; e. g. "^.^^n "131 the 
 word of the king. 
 
 Rem. 2 In this case also HJ^^T'n'n is sometimes repeated before the 
 
 nom. regens'.^ e. g. Jl^n in^Pl the pin of the weaver''s beam Jnd. 16, 14, 
 
 and the st. constr. occasionally even omitted; e. g. rT^IBn ]1")i^n t^^ 
 
 ark of the covenant Jos. 3, 14 (Such expressions, however, are by au- 
 thoritative commentators considered as pregnant e. g. n^"13n ]1*1i^ ]lni^n 
 
 (Conf. 3, 4) >). 
 
 9) The nomen regens^ however, not unfrequently ta- 
 kes nVJTn'n, when the nomen rectum is a nomen pro- 
 prium , which cannot have n;iJ^Tn 'H; e. g. ^Pi^rT^B ^i^H 
 the God of Bethel Gen. 31, 13; PIDDt^ ]53n the vine of 
 Sibma]e.x. 48, 32; or when for other reasons the nomen 
 rectum cannot have n:^''Tn'n; e. g. W^rbm ^^^ "l5)Pn the 
 grave of the man of God 2 Kings 23, 17; 'n rriS HlD^i^^H 
 the chambers of the house of the Lord Ezra 8, 29. 
 
 10) Compound names of nations are considered as two 
 nouns in the st. constr, ; e. g. ^'^''P^'ri |5 the Benjamite rT'S 
 "'pn^n the Bethlehemite. 
 
 Rem. 3 Since ^3 is the st. constr. of ^3 it follows the rule of n 7 ; 
 
 T 
 
 i) Confer also Dr. Driver's "Hebrew Tenses" 190 Obs. (Z'r??j/^'^r). 
 
10 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 g- Dli^n b3 <^ll men. If, however, its meaning is indefinite, e. g. 
 all kinds , any.^ or distributive , as every ^ ni^^l^n'n is omitted before 
 the nomen rectum \ e. g. Q*)^ ^3 every day Ps. 7, 12; VJ^ ^3 // kinds 
 of trees. 
 
 11) If a noun, which is already definite either by 
 n^''T.L! 'n or by the st. constr. or by a pronominal suffix, 
 is to be connected with an attributive adjective or with 
 another word used as an adjective or with an attributive 
 pronoun or number, then the latter also must be de- 
 termined by n:s;''Tr]'n; e.g. ^Il^n ^^DH 1D1 the great voord 
 of the king; IH^n mH; hV(T\ TOl ; njH IDin. The same 
 rule applies to the case of a definite noun followed by 
 a series of qualifications ; e. g. njn ^PlTjn niJlDH this great 
 vision Ex. 3, 3; ^"j.1-ini 1135n ^n|n ^i^n />^^ great, mighty 
 and terrible God Deut. 10, 17. 
 
 Rem. 4 Sometimes, however, D)^"'!''!! 'H is found before the adjec- 
 tive while it is omitted before the noun ; e. g. rlDlt^D DIID ^^^^ S'^^^ 
 kine Gen. 41, 26; hT\T\_ 13 the great well i Sam. 19, 22; T^VH ^^^ 
 unto the rich man 2 Sam. 12, 45 DTJDIin D*'")!! l^^ high mountains 
 Ps. 104, 18; n^DOTI nDn"in t^*li^3 ^^^ t^^^ ^^rge and fat land '^ oh. 
 9, 35. This is of special occurrence with numeralia ordinalia\ e.g. 'jl 
 ^ti^ti^n t^^ sixth (/jj/ Gen. 1,31; l^^n ID*) and the second bullock ]VidigQ?, 
 6, 25. 2). 
 
 2) Expressions such as rTlti^TII niHllSn 1113 ^^ ^'^''^ '^^JJ' ^f "virtue 
 T T : - : T - ' V V : 
 
 and righteousness i Sam. 12. 23; D'^^DPl ")^t^ ^-^^ corner gate Zech. 
 14, 10, should not be reckoned in this class of exceptions, because 
 
 the words D^^DH and Hltt'Tl niDllSn may be considered as nouns con- 
 . . ^y . -f 
 
 nected with "I"!") and l^ti^ in the st. constr. 
 
3. ny^TH 'n 1 1 
 
 Rem. 5 The instances on the contrary where nj^^l^D'H is omitted 
 
 before the qualification following a definite noun are very rare, and 
 generally occur when the qualification is a demonstrative pronoun 5 
 e- g. nV"l DHSI *^^^ ^^^"^ report of them Gen. 36, 2; D''3'1 D''1Iin 
 {the^ many nations Ez. 39, 27; Ji^'^n D/'^pB ^' ^hat night Gen. 19,33; 
 DJ^T ^n^^ptfi^P if^i^ ^y oath Gen. 24, 8; pj^;^ ''rinj^ ^'^^^^^ ^^^y signs 
 
 Ex. 10, I. 
 
 The demonstrative pronoun ^| always remains without the article ; e. g* 
 IT "inn ^^'-^^ generation Ps. 12,8. 
 
 In the expression IHi^ DDTli^ ^^^ ^f J^^ brethren Gen. 42, 19 
 T V V : 
 
 nV'>T^n 'n is left out before IPIi^ to signify that in the speaker's mind 
 
 it was indifferent which of the two brethren should remain behind. The 
 passages Gen. 43, 14 1^^il D?"^nNl y^'^'^ other brother \ and Num. 28, 4 
 
 "int^ ti^msri Di^ ^^^ of ^^^^ ^"^^0 sheep may be taken as a further illus- 
 tration of this remark (see however Talmud Babyl. Tract. Megilla f 28^). 
 
 Rem.. 6. It should be observed that Rule n 1 1 applies exclusively 
 to the attributive adjectives^ for the predicative adjectives ^ do not take 
 p]^^Tii^ 'p), except to express a contrast in a very forcible manner ; e. g. 
 
 D^}j^ti^"}n ''p;i^"1 ''i^^l ^^^^^[^ 'n the Lord is just but I and my people are 
 
 sinners Ex 9,27; or when ni^''Tn'n ^^s the force of 1ti^i<; e. g. ^2 
 
 ISlDri ^t is my mouth that speaketh Gen. 45, 12 (Conf. n 13). 
 
 1 2) In certain expressions n^'"Tn 'n has the force of a 
 demonstrative pronoun, as UVT] this day (hodie); W^BT\ 
 this time. 
 
 13) When joined to a verb n^''Tn'n has, (especially 
 in later Hebrew) the signification of a relative pronoun ; 
 e. g. ti^npnr! by[ and all that he had dedicated i Chr. 
 26, 28. The same signification n)^''Tr]'n often has when pla- 
 ced before a participle ; e. g. "Ip^pn who teacheth Ps. 144, i. 
 One instance occurs of nv^^n'n connected with a pre- 
 
12 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 position rvbvri, = n*'^^ l^^i^ {to Itt' xiiTvig) and that which 
 was upon it i Sam. 9, 24. *). 
 
 4 The adjective. 
 
 i) The adjective is either attributive , i. e. restricting 
 the idea of its noun to those individuals possessing the 
 qualification expressed by it, or predicative , i. e. af- 
 firming of its noun a certain property; e. g. the gold 
 of that land is good Gen. 2, 12. 
 
 2) In comparison with its richness in nouns, the He- 
 brew language possesses but few adjectives. For example 
 those denoting materials are almost wholly wanting, 
 and the few instances which occur have the form of a 
 passive participle, e. g. Tl^^l cedrine Ez. 27, 24 (derived 
 from ni^ cedar); ^IPIi brazen Job. 6, 12 (from.D^TO 
 brass). In order to supply this defect nouns are substi- 
 tuted. 
 
 3) When a noun takes the place of an attributive ad- 
 jective, it is connected with the noun to be qualified 
 in the st. constr. ; e. g. '^DD ""^D {vessels of silver) silver 
 vessels; y^^, ]T\^,. (a chest of wood) a wooden chest; niHi^ 
 U7\V (a possession of lasting duration) an everlasting 
 possession Gen. 17, 8; "IDDD ""np {men of number) nume- 
 rable men, a few ineyi viz. such as can easily be 
 counted Gen. 34, 30 ; |n jD^SI {a stone which finds favour, 
 a stone of beauty) a precious stone Pr. 17, 8. 
 
 3) Concerning the last named example and Gen. 18,21; 46,27: Jes. 
 51,10; Gen. 21,3; I Kings 11,9 see Driver, "Notes on the Hebrew 
 text of Samuel" i Sam. 9,24. {^Translator). 
 
4- THE ADJECTIVE. 13 
 
 4) In like manner the negation of an attribute may 
 be expressed by means of a noun with ikb , e. g. i^b 1p2 
 D)2^ a cloudless morning 2 Sam. 23, 4; \)^ ^ jri")T a po- 
 werless arm Job 26, 2. . 
 
 5) Nouns however are also employed in cases where 
 suitable adjectives exist, e. g. ti^lp ''1:35 = D'^ti^lp D''TO sa- 
 cred vestments Ex. 28 , 2 ; ^3^ n^^^ = D.^Ji n^^2i a withe- 
 ring flozver Jes. 28 , 4 ; V^ niDPHD = niyn DIDPOD ^z^// 
 deceits Pr. 2, 14; i^n ^^^^ = n^l TW^ an evil woman Pr. 
 6, 24; the noun ^^"1 is often so used. 
 
 6) In all these instances the noun which is qualified 
 is nomen regens , and that which serves as adj. no- 
 men rectum. Sometimes however, especially in poetry, 
 this order is reversed ; e. g. uyhb)l}^ )t^ , your evil deeds, 
 Jes. I, 16; HOT ]Wp, his fat body , Jes. 17,4; see also 
 Jes. 37, 24. This last named construction is always em- 
 ployed with ^3, all (See 2, 5). 
 
 7) The connecting of two nouns by means of the st. 
 constr. is of course only possible with attributive adjec- 
 tives. Yet the use of a noun instead of a predicative 
 adjective also occurs; e. g. IHDI irin T\T^T\ \y^T\\ (and the 
 earth was a waste and a wilderness) and the earth was 
 waste and void, Gen. i, 2; especially when the property 
 implied is to be empliasised ; e. g. ^V\ TH]' ^inn Dl'^n let 
 that day be dark (darkness). In like manner Wb^ peace , 
 prosperity often serves as an adjective; e.g. DD'^Dfcjt Dv^H 
 Ipri is your aged father well? Gen. 43, 27; wb^ Mi<. / 
 ain peaceful Ps. 120, 7.- (Concerning the last example 
 see Rem. 2). 
 
14 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 Rem. 1 Sometimes a predicative adjective is found expressed by a 
 noun with a preposition; e. g. fj^^ 'n b)p ^^^ voice of iht Lord is 
 
 with power i. e. powerful Ps. 29, 4. 
 
 8) Adjectives denoting a permanent state or condition 
 are often expressed by a noun, possessing the quality 
 of the adjective, connected with the st. constr. of W^^ 
 ^iD. ]5 and of their feminine and plural forms; e. g. 
 ^:n t^""}^, '^^n n^i^. ^:n ^m'^^ onni -^^^ an orator Ex. 4, 10; 
 ^^^. ^)^3 ^^^ ir^^y? ^^^ Gen. 27, II) ^ hairy man 2 
 Kings I, 8; ^^1^3 n3 <^ worthless woman i Sam. i, i6. 
 
 The same occurs in poetry even with inanimate beings 
 |D^ 13 Pi?, a fruitful height [hill) Jes. 5,1; rbh |3 2>2 
 one night Jon. 4, 10 ; TW\>, 13 ^/2 arrow Job. 41, 20. 
 
 Rem. 2 ti^i^^ or n are sometimes boldly omitted e. g., H^^DH "^^{^1 
 
 I.. T : ;- 
 
 = n-?Dn W^K ^^{^1. -^w^, / waj praying Ps. 109, 4; HHi^ Dl-non = 
 T : ; T T : 
 
 nrii^ nniDn ^"^i^ ^^^^ ^^^ greatly beloved Dan. 9, 23 (conf. i-<:^/z^j = 
 scelestissimus^ see Abn Esra on Ps. 85, 14. 
 
 9) Adjectives, on the other hand, denoting 2, perma- 
 nent attribute are sometimes used instead of the nouns 
 possessing this attribute; e. g. i^''^J {= )^W\ lifted up) 
 a prince \ T3^$ [strong) a bull, Ps. 22, 13; a horse Jer. 
 50, II; T3^ [powerful) God Gen. 49, 24; h\i [swift) 
 a horse Jes. 30, 16; n^3^ [white) the moon\ D^lD [fruit- 
 ful) a fruit tree Jes. 1 7, 6 (conf. merum = vinum ; wypif , 
 the sea). 
 
 10) The proper place of an attributive adjective is af- 
 ter the noun to which it belongs, and if this noun is in 
 the St, constr,, after the nomen rectum , as bT\\ W)^> a great 
 maw, T\)T\ TV^T\T\ "IDD this book of doctrine Deut. 29, 20. 
 
4- THE ADJECTIVE. 1 5 
 
 Rem. 3 In a few cases it is found before the noun, as D'^DV D''31 
 many nations Ps. 89, 51; D^HV DIB"! many times Neh. 9, 28; espe- 
 cially when it serves as a subst.^ and is connected in the st. constr ^ 
 with the noun determined by it; e. g. Q^^^J^ ''p^H {those that are 
 
 smooth amongst the stones^ Smooth stones I Sam. 17,40 = Q^p^p) Q^^^i^' 
 In the other cases where it precedes the noun it is predicative. 
 
 11) The adjective agrees with its noun in number 
 and gender. If however a feminine noun is followed by- 
 more than one adjective, not unfrequently the first ad- 
 jective alone agrees with the noun; e. g. pTHI H^lli) D1"l 
 a great and strong wind i Kings 19, 11. 
 
 12) With a dual noun the adjective stands in the 
 plural; e. g. niD"J d;^;^^ haughty eyes Ps. 18, 28. 
 
 13) With a noun in the plur. majestatis ( 2, 2) the 
 adjective usually stands in the singular; e. g. H^j^ ^^T^'^. ^ 
 hard lord Jes. 19, 4. 
 
 Rem. 4 We however always say '^IH D'Tl^i^ the living God. 
 
 14) With collectives the adjective generally stands in 
 the singular ; e. g. hT\\ ^y^ a great people ; sometimes , 
 however, also in the plural; e. g. D'lij^Sn iTJin^ T^\ the 
 exiles of Jehudah who came Jer. 28,4; D*ii:<llJp^n DJ^H the 
 people that were found present Esther 1,5. 
 
 15) The adjective is also occasionally connected in 
 the St. constr. with a noun for the purpose of further de- 
 termination ; e. g. n^l")^ nDl" TW\^ a woman of fair ap- 
 pearance Gen. 12, II. If in this case it requires niPTn'ri 
 it follows the rule of 3 , 7 ; e. g. n^^DH nii^n mDH 
 "iran ripll the ill favoured and leanfleshed kine Gen. 
 41, 4. 
 
1 6 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 Rem. 5 Concerning nVTH 'H with the adj. see 3, 11. 
 
 5. Status Constructus. 
 
 i) If the main idea [nonien regens) is to be connected 
 with more than one subordinate idea [nomen rectum), the 
 main idea is repeated in the st. constr. ; e. g. D^^ P]P5 
 nii^^n ^pp5 the money for the guilt offerings and sin 
 offerings 2 Kings 12, 17. 
 
 Rem. 1 Sometimes however this repetition is omitted; e.g. DID "H^D 
 nil^y*) the kings of Sodom and Gomorra Gen. 14, 10: HiD^J^ *ni"1 
 nt2^"1J1 the vow of a widow ^ or of her that is divorced Num. 30, 10 '). 
 
 2) If on the contrary more than one main idea is to be 
 connected with a no7n. rect., the first idea alone is con- 
 nected in the st. constr. with the nom. rect. , while the other 
 main ideas follow the nom. rect. by means of another 
 construction ; e. g. VJIinn ^ijl ^^^_ n^DH ^N! to the prayer 
 and supplication of thy servant Dan. 9, 17 (Conf. 7, i). 
 
 Rem. 1 Exceptions to this rule are rare and only occur when the 
 main ideas are synonymous, or at least very closely affiliated, as iniDD 
 
 ]1iD^ y^\ the choicest and best of Lebanon Ez. 31 , 16; Tjl nj^1"'1 D^"! 
 i) The passage VJliDI 1^23 ^Di the souls of his sons and his daugh- 
 
 T : T T 
 
 ters Gen. 46, 15 can hardly be considered as an exception, for l^^^ 
 
 T T 
 
 VniiDI form one idea (Jiis children"). The same also applies to Jes. 11,2 
 
 'n n^^i^i nvi' ni''ni nioDn. rrmy] r\)s,v nn ^^^ spirit of counsel and 
 
 - ... *- T T : T T : T" - 
 
 strength.^ of wisdom and understanding.^ of knowledge and of fear for 
 God; and to other similar expressions, e. g. ?J^2l |D1 ^iD ""iTi^S "IDDH 
 
 that thou mayest tell in the ears of thy son and of thy son''s son, 
 Ex. 10, 2. 
 
5- STATUS CONSTRUCTUS. 1 7 
 
 knowledge and fear of the Lord Jes. II, 2^). In this case the con- 
 junction is sometimes omitted, e. g. oyn "Ij^Op "IQDp t^'-^ ^^m (and) 
 the numbering of the people 2 Sam. 24, 9. 2) 
 
 3) The norn. red. as main idea may in turn be con- 
 nected in the st. constr. with a noun following, and this 
 again with another subsequent noun. Thus one finds 
 e. g., five nouns following one another in the st. constr. , as 
 ^^r> ^:n ms^ dot IDDD I^^^I the residue of the number of 
 bows of the mighty men of the children of Kedar Jes. 
 21, 17. 
 
 Rem. 3. In these cases, however, the chain of nomina regentia is 
 sometimes broken and one of them is placed in the st. abs. e. g. ''"1135 
 
 DTtbi^n ni^ XT\^^ DD^^^D ^^n o,^^^ ^^^^ for the work of the service 
 v: T .. ^. .. .... . 
 
 of the house of God I Chr. 9, 13. (See 7, i). 
 
 4) The St. constr. is used to express all possible re- 
 lations between two nouns or ideas ; e. g. V^^J Di^tsn the 
 sins of his father (genitive of subject) i Kings 15, 3; 
 ^""Pli;^ D^n injustice against your brother (gen. of object) 
 Obadja 10 ; 'rT" T\)niy) an oath sworn by the Lord Ex. 22, 
 10 ; D^inp X^ water that reached to the loins Ez. 47,4; 
 V^P "i^ti^ those that turn from transgression Jes. 59, 20 ; 
 D^n ""IH^ they that go down to the sea Ps. 107, 23; ^^7]^^ 
 UX\ the way to the sea Jes. 8, 23. 
 
 i) n^l ni^y ^Iso be considered as a status absolutus\ the prophet 
 
 then identifies true knowledge with piety. 
 
 2) This passage may also be translated : the sum of ( obtained 
 through) the numbering of the people^ for "1DDD i^^ay be considered as 
 
 connected in the st. constr. with IpJDp- 
 
1 8 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 Further than this, a single noun may be connected 
 in the st. constr. with a whole sentence; e. g. \ib DipD 
 ^^. VT the place which knoweth not God Job. 1 8 , 21 
 [= ^ "itifi:!} Dlp^); and this even where "iti^i^ is expressed, 
 as Dn^Di^. ^ten npi^ 11^^^ Dlp^ (= "It^^. Dp^n) //^^ place 
 where the kings prisoners were bound Gen. 39, 20 ; and 
 also with or without "Iti^^^ instead of the st. abs. with 
 
 n^''i:n 'n; e. g. is i^i^n ntj^^^ "id^ b3 (= nt^^? D^p^^n ^5) all the 
 
 days that the plague is in him Lev. 13, 46; T\^^ niOl 
 //^^ abundance (which) he has gotten Jer. 48, 36 (see 
 
 12. 5)- 
 
 5) In cases where the st. constr. does not express 
 
 th6 simple genitive of object or subject, another con- 
 struction which alone would be sufficient to express the 
 idea, is sometimes used along with it; e. g. J^l^JJ "^^^^ 
 
 (= \yi, ^^'PV or Yl^^ n-^^^V) they that dwelt in the 
 land Jes. 9, i; "lin \:5n^ b^ ^11^ (= "lID ^;??^ ^111'> or 
 'i^'i^ Q''l"l1'') they that go down to the stones of the pit 
 Jes. 14, 19; n^TO -hx^} (= :br\ -i^in^ or n^np D^^1Q;i) they 
 that are weaned from the milk Jes. 28,9; ]''lp t'^ ''5'^'i'' 
 ( = P1P ^5^1'' or I^IP ^^ D^nti^l'') Ye that sit on carpets Judg. 
 5, 10; ^}d2 nnro (= rj-i.tO "'IDTO or H"!?^ DnnTO) ^^^/^/;^^ 
 for prey Job. 24, 5. 
 
 Rem. 4 The st. constr. occasionally occurs where we would 
 
 expect the st. abs..^ e. g. ]11,^ J^^*) XVQ'^ ( = miDti^) drunken.^ but 
 
 ' -T : -._ : T\ : 
 
 c^ ivith wine Jes. 51, 215 XW^iK ^Di (= H^i^) ^''^^ tmtimely birth of 
 
 : V T 
 
 a woman Ps. 58,9 3). In like manner ^pji^ frequently occurs instead 
 
 3) The opinion however that such fem. forms may be considered as 
 collateml forms of the st. abs. is not improbable. 
 
6. APPOSITION. 19 
 
 of inij^, as 13^0 "irii^p ii^^ one of us Gen. 3, 22; once, Jes. 27,12, 
 
 we find both forms together IH^ IHi^^ ^^^ ^^ another. (In cases of 
 
 apposition see 6, 3). 
 
 On the other hand, the st. abs. sometimes occurs where the st. 
 constr. would have been expected, as Vpi^ QiQ (= V^D^ ''D) "water of 
 
 affliction i King. 22. 27, i. e. a small jueasure of water. *). 
 
 Rem. 5 Proper names also occur sometimes in the st. constr. e, g. 
 ''"ini "l^^ Mesopotamia (^Aram between the two rivers.) 
 
 Rem. 6 With reference to the appending of suffixes to nouns connected 
 by the st. constr. see 10, 6 and Rem. i. As to the plur. of 
 nouns connected by the st. constr. see 2,3 and Rem. 4. And as 
 to ni^^l^n 'n before nouns in the st. constr. see 3, 7 11. and Rem. 
 2 and 3. 
 
 6. Apposition. 
 
 i) A noun may be determined by another noun 
 following it without the sL constr. (apposition); e. g. 
 W^U^ D^^J^^. men ( namely ) brethren Gen. 13, 8; D'^fl?! 
 D''p^^ ojferings (nmnely) peace offerings Ex. 24, 5. 
 
 Rem. 1 In the case of proper names the apposition may either pre- 
 cede or follow, as ^^p) f){^ VHi^ Hi^ ^^^ brother Abel Gen. 4, 2; HJ^ 
 
 VT V T V V 
 
 ID^^^ """iti^ Sarai his wife Gen. 12, 5. In certain expressions the ap- 
 : ~ T 
 
 position always precedes , as Pltt^^ ^t^T\\ "IH 'n^?^!! (once only, 2 
 Sam. 13,39, we find rj^DH yr\)' 
 
 2) Apposition is pretty frequently used with nouns de- 
 noting either the material of which a thing is composed , 
 
 4) Certain authors prefer to consider such expressions as instances 
 of apposition ( 6, 2) while other authors regard them as pregnant con- 
 structions; e. g. y\'h "^p D''0 ( 3 Rem. 2; 10 footnote i). 
 
20 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 or the nature or attribute which a thing possesses; e. g. 
 pJJ D''"]1tO rows (of) stone Ex. 28, 17; ID TO Z^^'j measure 
 [of) linen (= -^/^ linen garment) Lev. 6, 3; ^?5^^ D^l^i:^. 
 words (of) truth Pr. 22, 21. 
 
 3) Often, however, the noun to be quaHfied is con- 
 nected in the st. constr. with the quaHfying noun ; e. g. 
 
 ]5i$ ni:D Ex. 39, 10 (conf. 4, 3); nii^ n^^jn:??^^ a wo- 
 
 man possessing a familiar spirit i Sam. 28, 7 (conf. 5 
 Rem. 4, and footnote 4); n"J^"1D ''.lii^l'' ""PPn //^^ ^x'/.?^ (;;^^;2 
 namely) the counsellors of Pharaoh Jes. 19, 11. 
 
 Rem. 2 With appellatives the order of placing the words is some- 
 times reversed 5 e.g. QIJ^ i^lD ^ wz'/fl' (lit. a wild ass) man Gen. 16, 125 
 
 T T 
 
 D"Ii^ 7"'DD ^ foolish man (a fool of a man) Prov. 15 , 205 21, 20. Such 
 T T : 
 
 passages however may also be regarded as instances of the st. constr. 
 Conf. Qli^ "'D^Di princely (princes) men Micha 5 , 4. 
 
 4) All prepositions and particles prefixed to the first 
 noun are repeated before the second noun; e. g. H^ 
 ^5n m Vn his brother Abel Gen. 4, 2 ; 11^5 ini^lD l^l^J? 
 "i-^ti^D in the land of his nativity, in Ur of the Chaldees 
 Gen. II, 28; It^V. "'-P ""n^ "1-P /i^^^ ^-^^ A^;2<^ of my bro- 
 ther from the hand of Esau Gen. 32, 12; ^^^p, ^15^? 
 of thy servant Jacob Gen. 32, 19. 
 
 Rem. 3 Sometimes , however , they are omitted before the second 
 noun; e. g. jn^i^ nt^ Hi^ ^arai his wife Gen. 12, 5; ipp^ V^nH hVK 
 VniiD to his sons in law who were to marry his daughters Gen. 19, 14. 
 
 5) If the first noun is determined (by a pronom. sufif., 
 St. constr., etc.), the apposition also should be deter- 
 
7- MEANS OF CONNECTING TWO NOUNS. 21 
 
 mined; e. g. "^^^H ""^"liii. (conf. 3, 11), unless it be a 
 proper name. 
 
 Rem. 4 With adjectives also instances of apposition occur, as n*lQ 
 
 TT 
 
 nD''Dn riDIi^ ^ perfectly red heifer Num. 19, 2. 
 
 7. Other means of connecting two nouns. 
 
 i) Two nouns may be connected by placing h "1^^^ 
 between them. 
 
 This construction is chiefly used for the genitive of 
 possession, and especially when two or more subsequent 
 nouns would otherwise have to be placed in the st. constr.y 
 as \mvh -if^ i^5^ nt^ (= b\m i^niJ n^) captain of Saul's 
 host 2 Sam. 2, 8 (conf. however 5,3); or when 
 more than one main idea is dependent on another idea, 
 
 as Dn^fP i?r^h 1^^ nsi^ni ni:3]:i^Dn(=id^i 'o i^q np.t^^o) the 
 
 butler and the baker of the king of Egypt Gen. 40, 5 
 
 ( 5, 2)- 
 
 In ordinary cases, however, this construction is ra- 
 rely used instead of the st, constr.; e. g. TTO^ ^V.^. I^^^lI 
 (= n^DiJ ]tk)S) her father's sheep Gen. 29, 9. 
 
 Rem. 1 In the subsequent development of the Hebrew language Iti^J^ 
 became contracted into "ti^, and ^ "lti^{^ combined into the one word 
 7^; e. g. Cant. I, 6; 3, 7 conf. Jonas i v. 8 with v. 7. In Mischna and 
 Talmud ^^ is the usual expression for the genitive of possession. 
 
 2) A second means of connecting two nouns is to 
 prefix b (without "1^^?) to the second noun. This con- 
 struction also is used instead of the genitive of possession : 
 
22 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 {a) when the first idea is to be expressed indefinitely; 
 e. g. b)m^ 0^5^. servants of Saul i Sam. 17, 8 (nnii^ 
 h\m would mean /^^ servants of Saul)\ ^'^'mh O'lin^. ""i^ 
 /z/^ servants of Shimei i Kings 2, 39 (""^Dti^ ""i;!;^ 1;.^ 
 would mean the two servants of Shimei), 
 
 Rem. 2 It is seldom employed when the main idea is definite \ e. g. 
 
 h^)^^h D''Qiin(= h^^^^ ^t^t) the guards of Saul I. Sam. 14, 1 6. 
 T : T 
 
 [b) to prevent accumulation of words in the st. constr. 
 
 e. g. bm^^, >y^ DitDD^ niDNin ^^^i^n (= diidd niDi^. ^^r^n 
 
 ^^T-^? ""A?) //^^ i^^^i^J of the fathers' houses of the 
 tribes of the children of Israel Jos. 19, 51. 
 
 (c) for numbers; e. %.^'\Tb "ini^? on the first day of 
 the month Num. 1,1. 
 
 8. Comparative and Superlative. 
 
 i) The comparative is formed in Hebrew by pre- 
 fixing IP or "p to the word with which comparison is 
 made. It is indifferent whether the thing compared is 
 expressed by a verb or adj. e. g. I^pp D1!i^1 Dl more nu- 
 merous and mightier than we Ex. 1,9; VJ^p inp''iJ^21 and 
 he made it stronger than its enemies Ps. 105, 24. 
 
 2) When two objects or classes of objects are con- 
 trasted with each other, then their opposite qualities 
 are expressed without Jp or "p; e.g. ^1"I^n "lli^^n n^ 
 Pi^n *)^^^^L! Hi^l the greater light and the lesser light 
 Gen. I, 16; DTOIin "".^^O^ rTT;^^^^^ nn^ to give the younger 
 before the firstborn Gen. 29, 26. 
 
 3) The comparative with ]p or "p has in Hebrew 
 
8. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 23 
 
 also the meaning of too with the positive, and may 
 therefore be used when there is no object with which 
 comparison is made ; e. g. i^lti^^D "i^l^. bT\\ mine iniquity is 
 too great for me to bear Gen. 4 , 13; hTi^T^ ItDjJ too small 
 to contain i Kings 8, 64; D3p tOi^pH is it too small a 
 thing for you? Numb. 16,9. 
 
 Rem. 1 In poetry the qualitative word is sometimes omitted, so that 
 
 it has to be supplied from the context; e. g. D^^^11*'D Dn!!'''DD1 their 
 
 TT .: 
 
 idols ai^e (more numerous) than (those) in yerusalem Jes. 10, 10. 
 
 4) The superlative is expressed: 
 
 [a) in the same manner as the comparative, except 
 that ?!D is added to the word with which comparison 
 is made; e.g. DliJH ^3p DOTl and he was the wisest 
 of all men i Kings 5,11; VJS ^3D rjoi^ n^ nn^5! he lo- 
 ved Joseph most of all his children Gen. 37, 3. 
 
 [b) by prefixing 5 to the plural of the word with which 
 comparison is made; e. g. D''^|3 ^^'^^ the fairest 
 amongst women Cant. 6, i. 
 
 (c) by connecting the singular form of a noun in the 
 St. constr. with the plural form of the same noun ; 
 e. g. D'l^lgri li^l'p the most holy. 
 
 (d) by connecting an adj. or particip. in the st. constr. 
 with the noun with which comparison is made ; e. g. 
 n^ninti' niDDn the wisest of her princesses Jud. 5, 29; 
 p.ij ""TIB?^ the most honourable of the earth Jes. 23, 8; 
 DlJiJ W5^i!l the most needy amofigst men Jes. 29, 19; 
 D^ ""TOT the richest amongst the people Ps. 45, 13. 
 
24 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 9. Numerals. 
 
 i) The cardinal numbers from i 10 may be connected 
 with the noun to which they belong in a threefold 
 manner, viz.: 
 
 {a) by placing the number before the noun in the st. 
 constr., as D'lp^ ^l^'V. six days. 
 
 {b) by placing it before the noun in the st, abs., as 
 D^p; n^^ six days. 
 
 [c) by placing it after the noun, as TW'p D"^?pJ six days. 
 
 With these (i 10) the noun stands in the plural, and 
 exceptions are rare , as Hi^ '^'^P^ eight years 2 Kings 
 22, I. 
 
 2) With the cardinal numbers from 11 19 nouns of 
 very frequent occurence (such as W)^^ Dl"i. PD^) are made 
 to follow in the sing ; e. g. W"^ "1^;^ H^OT nineteen men ; 
 Dl"" "Iti^:^ rx'^^^)^ fourteen days; rm TTi^^^ U'^VW twelve years. 
 They rarely occur in the plur. e. g. U^'^'l^^ "it^^ D^:;^ twelve 
 men Deut. i, 23. 
 
 Nouns however which are not so often used either 
 follow or precede in the plur. ; e. g. nitSQ "it^;^ U^^yj twelve 
 tribes "iti^i^ D''.^^ ^^^. twelve rams Num. 7, 87. 
 
 3) The tens from 20 90 are construed in a twofold 
 manner : 
 
 (a) generally with the noun following in the sing.; e. g. 
 11 '""iti'ij^ twenty days "1^}^ Qiti^ti? sixty cities; rarely 
 in the plur. D^p^l^ U'^'^Un fifty just men Gen. 18, 24; 
 nii3 ''ti^^ sixty daughters 2 Chr. 11, 21. 
 
 (b) less frequently with the noun preceding, but then al- 
 ways in the plur.; e. g. D^W ni^N! 60 cubits 2 Chr. 
 
9- NUMERALS. 2$ 
 
 3, 3; n^m D^'^^b^Zi) sixty concubines. 2 Chr. ii, 2i. 
 
 4) As regards n^p hundred ^ one may say just as 
 well nj^ ili^p as T\W H^P a hundred years. In both ca- 
 ses the noun may stand also in the plur.; e. g. D*""!]^ ^^!lp a 
 hundred fold (hundred measures) Gen. 26, 1 2 ; D""^"!!^ T\^ 
 hundred sockets Ex. 38, 27. 
 
 The same constructions may be used with the plu- 
 ral forms of ^^ilD , and with ^b^ and its plural forms. 
 
 Here also certain words of common occurrence , are 
 usually made to follow in the sing.; e. g. nDJ< D^D^^ 
 two thousand cubits. 
 
 5) With numerals composed of units and tens or hund- 
 reds, the noun stands either in the sing, and after the 
 number; e. g. TiW D'^ti^^ti^l t^^pn or T^D TOHI W^-^h^ thirty 
 five years (rarely in plur. D^^D n^3"}i<1 D^lti^V. twenty four 
 heifers Num. 7, 88); or in th^plur. and before the number; 
 e.g. 0:11^1 D^ti^ti^ D^V^^i? j-^V/jK two weeks Dan. 9, 26; D""^^ 
 nW5 D^yra ninety six rams Ezra 8, 35; U^V.^f^ D^ti^D? 
 ni^Dli^'j seventy seven sheep (Ibid). 
 
 Frequently however the noun is repeated, viz. with the 
 units in the plur., with the tens and hundreds in the 
 sing.; e. g. T\W D''^!3ti^l D^^^ ti^Dfl seventy five years Gen. 
 12, 4; U^W V^^) r\y^ O-^lWV.) n;f nijp a hundred and twenty 
 seven years Gen. 23, i. 
 
 6) The Ordinals from i 10 are adjectives (see Gram- 
 mar yj, i) and are treated as such. 
 
 Instead of the ordinals above ten the cardinals are 
 used, and as before, either with the noun preceding 
 in the st. constr.\ e. g. nnti^V. H^Dti^ Hira in the eigh- 
 
26 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 teenth year (in which case the noun may be repeated 
 after the number, as r\W rr\^V.^^ D^nti^, Xm^ in the twelfth 
 year 2 Kings 8, 25); or with the noun following; e. g. 
 
 nj^ C^S")^? in the fortieth year. 
 
 Rem. 1 In numbering years or the days of the month cardinals are 
 
 not unfrequently used instead of the ordinals from i lo; e. g. 
 
 ti^lbti^ XWi'Il in the third year Est. i, 3; ^"^xh "inJ<3 on the first 
 T : V T V : 
 
 day of the month Num. i, i. Yet the ordinals are not altogether ex- 
 cluded, as n*'J^''3ti^n Diti^ ih^ seventh year Esra 7,8. 
 
 7) When the cardinals are used as nouns, they may, 
 like nouns take T\'^^yx^ 'H; e. g. D:n^Dni D^pti^nVHti^^t^^n 
 the two hundred and seventy three Num. 3, 46. 
 
 The ordinals naturally follow the rules of the adjec- 
 tive asto n:;;Ti!!'n. 
 
 Rem. 2 Nouns of ineasure^ weight and time are sometimes omitted 
 after the numerals \ e. g. r|D3 D^"lti^y twenty (shekels of) silver ; *i1^ti^J?3 
 
 in the tenth (ntonthy^ "i^^S on the second (day). 
 
 Rem. 3 Instead of plDi^ we often find HD^^^; e. g. flD^S D^'D^^^ 
 
 T- T-T T-T'-:- 
 
 two thousand cubits Num. 35,5. The best explanation of this expres- 
 sion is to admit an ellipsis of words (e. g. ti^"'i^ HDi^S) ^s appears 
 
 from Deut. 3,11 ^^^ nDi<3 H^m HlQi^ ^S^i^T H^l^ JlD^ i^ti^D 
 
 nine cubits was the length thereof .^ and four cubits the breadth of it , 
 after the cubit of a man. 
 
 8) The distributive numerals are expressed : 
 
 (a) by repetition of the noun with its cardinal; e. g. 
 tD5f^ "ini? '^^^ "in^ '^^^ one man for each tribe Jos. 
 3, 12; sometimes with the addition of "iriij^, as W 
 "ini<^ D?2^3 ti^^ DIDJD each had six wings Jes. 6, 2. 
 
 [b] by repetition of the cardinal number alone; e. g. 
 
10. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 27 
 
 Dl'^ti^ Qij^ tijijo and two Gen. 7, 9 ; sometimes with 1 
 copulative prefixed to the second ; e. g. WJ W ^^^ 
 <3:;^^ .9^';ir (= on every hand six) 2 Sam. 21, 20. 
 [c] without repetition, but by prefixing b to the noun ; 
 e. g. t55^2 "in^ ^^^ one man for each tribe Deut. 
 I, 23; or in a more simple manner by means of 
 the so called b distributive; e. g. DiD^^.^1 ^^^ by 
 hundreds and by thousands 2 Sam. 18, 4 (conf. 13, 2.) 
 9) The cardinals may sometimes be used as ad- 
 verbs (adverbia fiumeralia) to determine a verb by omit- 
 ting the word D^D ; e. g. VW D?n]^ ^TOHl (= W^DV^^ Vl^) 
 I will smite you seven times Lev. 26, 24. 
 
 Certain numeral adverbs may be expressed by a car- 
 dinal in the dual, as D^H]^?^ seven times Gen. 4, 15; 
 D?n^3"1^ four times 2 Sam. 12,6. 
 
 The ordinal H^^^ is occasionally used as a numeral 
 'adverb in the sense of a second time. 
 
 CHAPTER III PRONOUNS. 
 
 10. Personal pronouns and pronominal suffixes. 
 
 i) The personal pronoun (see Grammar 71, Rem. 3) 
 is sometimes used to repeat the pronominal suffix in a 
 separate form for the purpose of emphasis. This oc- 
 curs as well with the suffixes of nouns and particles as 
 with those of verbs; e. g. ^i^5! Dj ^P?"13 bless me, even 
 me also Gen. 27, 34 ; HHiJ ^ UVr\_ ^TiyTin / have made it 
 known to thee this day, even to thee Pr. 22, 19; DHJi p''!^)lD1 
 
28 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 but as for you, your carcases Num. 14, 32; ur\'^ udl D^H 
 is it now time for you yourselves Hagg. 1,4; ''iii^. ""^ upon 
 me J upon me i Sam. 25, 24; i^in Ul V^^ upon him also 
 I Sam. 19, 23. It even occurs when no suffix but only 
 a noun precedes; e. g. i^lH DJ n^^ to Seth , to him also 
 Gen. 4, 26. 
 
 Still more emphasis is given to the sentence when 
 the personal pronoun is made to precede; e. g. T\VS^ 
 TH^ ^111'' thee , thy brethren shall praise Gen. 49, 8 ; 
 D^D^ ItO^ ''T ""Iil^ /, even mine hands have stretched out 
 the heavens Jes. 45, 12. 
 
 2) The pronominal suffix with a verb is occasionally 
 used to express not the passive object, but the object 
 interested in the act; e. g. ^W.^ ^^ thou shalt not be 
 forgotten of me Jes. 44, 2 1 ; ^W^'% Dl^^n did ye fast for 
 me? Zech. 7, 5. Hence ]r)J is now and then found with 
 a double accusative of object, as ""^inni D^^H \^)^ thou 
 hast given 7ne a barren land (lit. the land of the soutli) 
 Jos. 15, 19. 
 
 3) The personal pronoun as object of a verb is to 
 be translated by means of HiSl with a suffix: 
 
 (a) when it stands with special emphasis before the 
 verb; e. g. ^TOH TOt\)^ I had slain just thee Num. 
 22, 33. 
 
 [b) when the verb is already connected with another 
 personal suffix as its object; e. g. iri^^ ''^^it'^^^ and he 
 will show himself to me 2 Sam. 15,25. 
 
 4) The construction of ^^il with a suffix is used by pre- 
 ference in case of an infinitive with a verbal meaning, 
 
10. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 29 
 
 as inj< linyi and I chose him i Sam. 2, 28 (conf. 22, 5). 
 
 5) The pronominal suffix of a noun may, like the 
 St. constr, denote the genitive of object or the genitive 
 of subject; e. g. DpHHl Dpi^llQI the fear and dread of 
 you Gen. 9, 2 ; IH^T his fear (i. e. fear for him) Ex. 
 20, 20. 
 
 6) When the compound idea expressed by two nouns 
 connected in the st, constr. is to have a pronominal suf- 
 fix, this is appended not to the main idea (nom. re- 
 gens), but to the subordinate idea (nom. rectum). (Com- 
 pare the analogous rule for Hi^iTn Tl 3, 7) e. g. IT'S 
 njDH house of prayer ''H^Dn n^5 ^7 house of prayer ; 
 r]DD ^^'^, silver idols iQpD '.^i^^. his silver idols. 
 
 Rem. 1 Sometimes this is more accurately expressed by the repeti- 
 tion of the first noun; e.g. r]D3n ^"^33 ^^^^\ (= ""QP^ ^^^'^ ^>' ^^'^^^'' 
 /-/// Gen. 44, 2. 
 
 7) If however the nom. rectwn cannot have a suffix 
 the latter is then appended to the nom. regens\ e. g. 
 ^Pijl ""O^l? 'yny covenant with Jacob Lev. 26, 42 ; Tl*''!!? 
 ?n my covenant with the day Jer. 33, 20; Djn "li^^ti^ 
 (= D^n ^i^^iti^ with suffix i^* pers. sing.) my haters without 
 cause Ps. 69, 5. 
 
 Rem. 2 The suffix is sometimes appended to the noni. regens even 
 without this reason; e. g. ;jn IDi^DH (= llin n^DH) i^^^ pledge of his 
 debt Ez. 18, 7; "IptSJ l^'^i^ (= """Ip^ "'D'^i^) ^jV enemies without cause 
 Ps. 35,19- 
 
 Rem. 3 The passages , however, where the second noun is the pre- 
 
30 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 dicate, should be considered as elliptical ; e. .g. D^n?i^ ^J^D3 ( = 
 DTi'Pi^ {^D3 ^^^03) *^y i^^^one is a throne of God Ps. 45, 7 >). 
 
 Rem. 4 Now and then the suffix is appended to both nouns; e. g. 
 
 DD^LSnii^ DD^^i^l (= DD^IDD^ *^^^^) your tribal chiefs Deut.-29, 9. 
 
 Rem. 5 With the personal pronouns and especially with the pronomi- 
 nal suffixes the masculine is sometimes used instead of the /i?wm/^; 
 
 e. g. niD^D n^^n U^^^ (= PID^Q T\T\ U^'^^) there are sixty qtieens 
 T : T T : T 
 
 Cant. 6,8; DD^DJ< Plp^pp ( = |P^^^^ ^^V'P) ^^^^ ^^^^^^ of your father {viz. 
 of Rachel's and Leah's father) Gen. 31,9 (Conf. 18 Rem. and 19, i). 
 
 Rem. 6 The personal pronoun as object of a verb is sometimes omit- 
 ted , when it can be easily supplied from what precedes ; e. g. |3 T\p^)_ 
 
 l^^n b^ \V\'^^ "IpS ^^ took a calf and gave (it) to his 
 
 servant Gen. 18, 7; ^Pl^ti^ 1^ till thou send (it) Gen. 38, 17. 
 
 Rem. 7 On the other hand, the noun to which a pronominal suffix 
 refers is sometimes added to it as apposition (conf. n i); e.g. IHi^irTl 
 
 l^'^n ni^ ^he saw him (viz.) the boy Ex. 2, 6. 
 
 This occurs also, when the suffix is appended not to the verb but to 
 
 some other part of speech; e. g. H'^H ^Di Dl^H l^-J^ID^ 1TO b'2^ 
 
 T V V TT T t' : V -: : 
 
 and whatsoever name the man gave it (namely) the living creature 
 
 Gen. 2,19; sometimes with repetition of the preposition, e. g. I^Dii^ 
 
 ^i^lti^"' "'iD^ DH^ Ulli ii^hich I do give to them (namely) to the chil- 
 T : : V T ' 
 
 dren of Israel ]os. I, 2; TUlh'^b'^ iHtS^ n^\l ^i^ litter (namely that) of 
 
 .... ^ . ... 
 
 Solomon Cant. 3, 7; and occasionally for the sake of explanation; e. g. 
 
 1?!23''li IDH^'Ii^ make them (namely) their nobles Ps. 83, 12. 
 
 Rem. 8 The suffix sometimes refers to indefinite persons; e. g. Di^l 
 
 TT : 
 
 Dti^ll^m their corn and their new wine Ps. 4, 8.; *i^ dn^'Pi^l ^^^'^t 
 T : : ' : 
 
 there is fione wariji Hagg. 1,6. 
 
 i) Several commentators consider this construction in general as el- 
 liptical. 
 
II. DEMONSTR. AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 3 1 
 
 II. The Demonstrative and Interrogative pronouns. 
 
 i) The personal pronoun of the third person i^in, 
 when used as a demonstrative (conf. grammar 72 , 4), 
 differs from the demonstrative pronouns PIT, T\^l and H^^t, 
 as l/iat (Lat. is) differs from this (Lat. kic) ; e. g. DTn DI^H 
 this day, viz. the day on which one speaks ; )^T\T\ Dl"!! 
 that day, the day of which the narrator has already 
 spoken; DRTH D^^H the time in which one speaks; ^T\X;\ T\^T\ 
 the time of which one is speaking. 
 
 Rem. 1 In certain fixed expressions, however, this rule is sometimes 
 neglected. We always say nTH irnD and Tb'^T\ D"'1!}"in even where 
 
 .. T T V T T : 
 
 one would have expected ^^nn ""Dill and Qnn "'"ID^H- Oii the con- 
 
 TT "T "T: 
 
 trary generally Hil *'D''3 instead of n^i^D D^D''3- 
 
 2) IT which usually possesses also a relative significa- 
 tion, is more than once employed as a relative pro- 
 noun (="l^{i^.); e. g. liD^ irni5^"13 in the net which they 
 had hidden Ps. 9, 16. Yet also HT and IT are sometimes 
 used in like manner ; e. g. UXb rilDJ. HT Dipp h)^ unto the 
 place which thou hast founded for them Ps. 104, 8 (conf. 
 gram. 72). 
 
 3) riT and DJ^T may be used adverbially: 
 
 (a) referring to place ; e. g. U^T\ T\\ yonder is the sea Ps. 
 
 104, 25. 
 [U) referring to tinie\ e. g. D^ID^D HT already twice Gen. 
 
 27, 36. 
 (c) for the purpose of strengthening questions, e. g. 
 niti'^ n^^T (ID 2//^^/ ^'.y //^/^ tJiou hast done? Gen. 3, 13; 
 ^:55 n.T nn^ ^'^ 2/ thou my son Esau? Gen. 27, 24; 
 
32 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 ''inn^ti^ riT rit^b why is it that thou hast sent me^ 
 Ex. 5, 22 (Conf. 26, 7). 
 i^in also is sometimes used in the same manner ; e. g. 
 i^in HT i^$l T\\ i^in ""P Z/Ad7 ^V he, and where is he? Esther 
 
 4) ""p occasionally refers to things when the idea of 
 persons is implied (Conf. grammar 74) ; e. g. Dp^ ""P 
 7/>^<^/ is Shechem? ]\xdgQ.s 9,28. This chiefly occurs after 
 "ip has already been used in reference to persons; e. g. 
 ^X\ 1^^ i^ij^ i|p 2t/A^ ^;;2 / and what is my life? i Sam. 
 18, 18; "'O'^D *'P^ "'P^^J ""P w-^^ ^?^ / and what is my house? 
 2 Sam. 7, 18. 
 
 Although "ip may refer to several persons, yet one 
 sometimes says in that case ''PJ "'P ; e. g. "D^nn ""PJ ^ip 
 w^d? ^r^ M^j^ that shall go? Ex. 10, 8. 
 
 5) As ''P and HID are used as substantives, they na- 
 turally occur sometimes as dependent on a nomen regens ; 
 e. g. ""p ns whose daughter} Gen. 24, 23 DH? HO nDDPlI 
 knowledge of what have they ? Jer. 8 , 9. 
 
 For the same reason they may also be connected with 
 2i prefix or separate preposition \ e. g. ''p fi^ whom?\ ""p^ 
 /^ whom ? ; ""P ""in^ ^yV^r whom ? H^'^^ ( "= HD^) (/<?r 2/^^/ 
 reason) why ? 
 
 Rem. 2 HD and HD with ^ are written HDS and nS3, with 3 
 
 TV T V 
 
 nSlD and HDD 1 and with 7 generally PlDT'' sometimes n^lD^- 
 
 T - V - T T V T 
 
 Rem. 3 yQ and p)D are sometimes used indefinitely in the sense of 
 
 T 
 
 ivhosoever^ whatsoever \ e. g. Qilim 7^!3 ""O whosoever hath a cause 
 
 Ex.24,i4n"ini i^T ^D(=i^T -l^^^ ^d e.g. ^^r\ "i^i^^ ^d ex. 32,33). 
 
 T : "T "T V: T T V : 
 
12. RELATIVE PRONOUN. 33 
 
 whosoever is fearful and trembling Judg. 7, 3 5 HD "^n^l <^ovie what 
 may 2 Sam. 18, 22. 
 
 With the same meaning "i^ is once found following the predicate na- 
 mely 2 Sam. 18, 12 *i^ 1"1D^ beware whosoever ye be *). 
 
 12. The Relative pronoun. 
 
 i) "l^i:^ often serves merely to give a relative meaning 
 to demonstrative words, and is generally separated from 
 them by the other words of the sentence; e. g. '0'^^^ 
 13 n^i nn^ "l^i< (= is ^'^^) the man to whom thou dost 
 lend Deut. 24, 11. Less frequently they stand toge- 
 ther, as T\^X\ ti^D.^ 13 "l^i^ wherein there is life Gen. i, 30; 
 ^^T\ UTb l^ii^ between whom the controversy is Deut. 19, 17. 
 
 Rem. 1 A preposition is very seldom placed before ^W^^ as a relative 
 
 pronoun , or joined with it so as to form one word; e. g. i^iiDn Iti^i^ D^^ 
 
 (= 1D)^ i^iiDD Iti^ii) "^ii^^ whomsoever thou findest Gen. 31, 32; 
 
 X^y^ "l^^^i (= QH^ ^^ ^^^) "wherein thou hast laboured ]&%. /^^^ 12; 
 
 TliJDn "l^i<3 (=13 TlliDri 1^^) ^^^ things that pleased me ]qs. $6^/^. 
 : T T V -: - : - T V . 
 
 2) The demonstrative word to which "l^ij^. belongs, is 
 sometimes entirely omitted; e.g. Dri^Di^. "l^^^ (= 1^ 1^^^ 
 DJJ'IDi^) of whom ye have spoken Gen. 43, 27; p^it "1^^^. 
 t^nn (= t^^nn r^t nns l^i^) ^V^ w///^>^ there shall be no 
 ploughing Gen. 45, 6. 
 
 3) As "l^i^ may refer to all persons, objects, genders, 
 and numbers, and is moreover indeclinable, it is evi- 
 
 i) Pr. Driver in his "Hebrew notes on Samuel" suggests, as prohably 
 right, the reading "i^ 1~1D^ because of the Pesh. and Sept. (pvAx^xTS 
 
 l^oi. ( Translator). 
 
34 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 dent, that the respective person, object, gender and 
 number should be indicated by a demonstrative word, 
 (a construction which is quite contrary to the EngHsh 
 mode of expression); e. g. ""fl^ DJDTISP '^'^^. n^l"* ''^^^. / am 
 Joseph whom ye have sold Gen. 45,4 (^0^ cannot be 
 translated) ; "h)!^ n^^l "1^^? ^^JHNl. "t^llij / am thine ass upon 
 which thou hast ridden Num. 22, 30 (""^^ remains un- 
 translated) ; ""ip irai )ib "I^K- 'n"" 1;^^ / am the Lord whose 
 faithful ones shall not be put to shame ]qs. 49, 23. 
 
 The same applies to the pronominal suffixes of a verb ; 
 e. g. ^'nina "Iti^^. '^'PT- 1^5^ ^^^^^ ^^^ Jacob whom I have 
 chosen Jes. 41, 8. (The suffix remains again untrans- 
 lated). 
 
 Rem. a This construction may perhaps be further explained by sup- 
 plying after l^ii^ a verb such as to say^ to declare \ e. g. In the in- 
 stance quoted Gen. 45, 4 / am Joseph (of whom I say Iti^i^) y^ 
 have sold me\ Jes. 41, 8 "-thou art Jacob (of whom I said = 1^^|) / 
 have chosen thee''\ 
 
 4) "l^iit, like IT, not unfrequently has the signification 
 of a demonstrative followed by a relative; e. g. IQ^'!^ 
 irri^ ^V_ "1^1^^ he said to him that was appointed over his 
 house Gen. 43, 16; l^'l "ISD )ib "l^i^ that which they had 
 not heard they saw Jes. 52, 15; H^^.t^ "Iti'i^. T!3 into the 
 hand of him whom thou hatest Ez. 23 , 28. 
 
 5) In all these constructions *1^^i^ may also be omitted ; 
 e. g. urh \ib }^niSt5 (= urh ^^b 1^1$ pi^?) in a land that is 
 not theirs Gen. 15, 13; H^^H T^ (= H^^H "ifi^ T?) by the 
 hand of him whom thou wilt send Ex. 4, 13; ^ ""T? 
 
13- REMAINING PRONOUNS. 35 
 
 Dip bD)i^ (- Dip ^31^ i6 im ^y^^ into the hands of them 
 from whom I am not able to rise up Lam. i , 14. 
 
 13. Pronouns for which the Hebrew has no proper 
 words. 
 
 i) Each, everyone y when used as substantives are 
 expressed either by ti^''^^ ; e. g. IDDS "11"lli ^^^ everyone'' s 
 bundle of money Gen. 42, 35; or by '^^'^ '^^\^ and W)^ 
 t^''Nll {^^^\ W)!< in pausa) ; e. g. IDpj^^pp t^^''^^ ^^\lt. everyone 
 from his work Ex. 36, 4; H^ ^ '^^^^ '^^^ everyone that 
 was born in her Ps. 87, 5 ; '^^^\ '^"^\^ )11i"l3 according to 
 every one''s pleasure Esther 1,8. 
 
 2) Each t everyone when used as adjectives are expres- 
 sed either by b"^ followed by a noun without D^^.'^Tn'ri; 
 e. g. ^^'^ b'3 every head Jes. i , 5 ; or by repetition of 
 the noun; e. g. 1)^.!33 "Ij^^S every morning) or by placing 
 the noun in the plural; e. g. D''"]g5^ every morning haim, 
 3, 23; W^V.yb every moment Job. 7, 18. (Conf. 2, 5). 
 2) Anyone y someone are expressed: 
 {a) by '^^)^ ; e. g. W\^ JH^ D^^ ^/ anyone gave Cant. 8, 7. 
 Hence tfi^'iii^ with a negation = ;2^ ^;/^ ; W\^ ^"il b^ let 
 no one go out Ex. 16, 29. 
 (^) by DliJ; e. g. 3''"lp^ ""S DlNl when anyone offereth 
 
 Lev. 1 , 2. 
 (^) by inJJ connected in the st, constr. with another 
 noun; e.g. D^H in^jl someone of the people Gen. 26, 10. 
 Hence the use of ^X\\^ with a negation ; e. g. in^t p^^ 
 irii^ i^^ = ;2<9 one. 
 
 T V 
 
 (<^) sometimes without any proper word , but simply 
 
36 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 by the third person ; e. g. T'jri^l and one put forth 
 his hand Gen. 38 , 28. 
 (e) by adding to the verb a participle of the same 
 stem as the subject; e. g. DD DIDJ ipl if any man 
 die Num. 6, 9. (Conf. 23, 5.) 
 
 Rem. 1 The indefinite a certain man is expressed by IPli^ ti^'^i^i 
 e. g. Sam. 1,1. 
 
 4) Somethings anything are expressed by "ID"?; ^- %- 
 "ID"! 'n^iD ^^D^u. is anything too wonderful for the Lord 
 Gen. 18, 14; or by "I^T ^3; e. g. i^D^ "IDT ^33 anything 
 unclean Lev. 5 , 2. Hence "ID"^ with a negation = nothings 
 e. g. -IDT It^^p ^$$ do nothing Gen. 19, 8; ini P^Si it is 
 nothing *). 
 
 Further by HDIKIp, sometimes by HD; e. g. HD ^T^\come 
 'what may 2 Sam. 18, 22; ""i^^T HD "1311 and whatsoever 
 he showeth me Num. 23, 3; or by p; e. g. ni^t!p ^1D^ Di^ 
 Itfi^i^") there shall not a hair of his head (lit. anything of 
 the hair of his head) fall to the ground i Sam. 14, 45. 
 Conf. I Sam. 3, 19. 
 
 . Rem. 2 The sentence becomes still more indefinite when anyone^ any 
 thing is not indicated at all ; e. g. "?^yj^ ID^PI ^^ there yet any (corpse) 
 
 with thee? Amos 6, lo; ^1D3 Ti^ there is none like unto thee Ps. 86 , 8. 
 
 5) Self: 
 
 (a) refering to persons, is expressed by placing i^lH, 
 i^in etc. after the noun to which it belongs ; e. g. 
 
 i) 131 is sometimes counected in the st. constr. with another noun ; e. g. 
 
 T T 
 
 ^^^''^3 131 something wicked Ps. 41, 9; or another noun in the st. constr. 
 with 131 5 e- g- 131 r\T\V something shameful Deut. 23, 15. 
 
13- REMAINING PRONOUNS. 37 
 
 i^in ^)bi\ the Levite himself Num. i8, 23; HDH D^irTin 
 the Jews themselves Esth. 9, i (Conf. grammar 70, 2). 
 [b) refering to things , by placiug D^^ before the noun ; 
 e. g. D^D^l) Q^V.? as heaven itself Ex. 24, 10. 
 
 6) The same: 
 
 [a) in reference to persons is expressed by J^IH. i^in etc. 
 placed after the noun to which it belongs ; e. g. ^^l^$'] 
 i^in but thou art the same Ps. 102, 28. 
 
 {b) in reference to things, by DiJ^. before the noun; 
 
 e. g. n?n i''n di^;^? ^/^ /^^ ^^w^ (^f^jv- 
 
 7) TA^ ^;2^ /i^^ other {alter alter) is ex- 
 pressed : 
 
 [a] by DT T\\ ; e. g. PIT ^i^ n.T i^'Jgl and one cried unto 
 
 the other Jes. 6, 3. 
 
 (^) by "in^l ini< ; e. g. inijn n^ in^n Vt\ but the one 
 
 smote the other 2 Sam. 14, 6. 
 
 (^) by ^^i^ followed by V^^?l or inn, and for the femi- 
 nine by T\^\!< followed by r\T\T\%, or nnin, in refe- 
 rence both to persons and things ; e. g. niV''T.n t^^DPL 
 
 nn^^$ % n^^ nran^rnri Ex 26, 3. 
 
 The last named construction is also used for the re- 
 flexive one another ; e.g. "1^^^!l ^JLP. '^^^ l"!")?^! and they 
 separated from one another Gen. 13, 11 (Conf. gram. 
 70, 2 (^)). 
 
 8) Some is expressed by the plural of the noun to 
 wich it belongs; e. g. D^Q^ some days Gen. 24, 55; while 
 nnn^^. is sometimes added; e. g. D^in^ D^p; ID}; n?^;"! 
 ^?2<3f //if^/^ j^<3!/^ remain with him some days Gen. 27, 44. 
 
 Occasionally it is expressed by "^ti^^^ ^.1; e. g. "1^^^ t:^"! 
 
38 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 D'^'lb^^ some said Neh. 5,2; or also by p ; e. g. ]P 1i^^^ 
 D3{.n some of the people went out Ex. 16, 27; bi^"T.t^^ "'^plp 
 .yf7w^ of the elders of Israel Ex. 17, 5; sometimes even 
 by IP with a singular word, as i^.V.I "'r' ^PP out of thee some 
 shall go forth Michah 5,1. Conf. Ps. 1 32, 1 1 ; 2 Kings 
 10, 10; Dan. 11, 7. 
 
 Rem. 2 Concerning the possessive reflexive and pronouns see gram. 
 6264, and 70, 2. 
 
 PART II 
 
 V E R B U M. 
 
 CHAPTER IV THE VERBAL FORMS. 
 
 14 The use of the "ID}; [actio perfecta). 
 
 The "13)^ is used in the first place for events which 
 belong to the past; viz. to express the Perfect, Pluper- 
 fect and Future Perfect (Fi4turum Exactum); e. g. 
 
 U^rb^ rm. ^^^^ n^ h^ ^m^ they came unto Noah as God 
 
 VI T V ~: ~ ~ V T -^ 
 
 had commanded Gen. 7, 9 ; "^fe'^^i:?. ""l?^ 1^T| I^J^ which the 
 servants of Abimelech had stolen Gen. 21, 25; "l^i:^3 
 "n^D^ ""n.^D?^ ^?^<3^ if I shall have been bereaved of my 
 children, I shall be bereaved Gen. 43, 14; 'D \Tr\ ^'^ 
 when the Lord shall have washed away Jes. 4, 4. 
 
 2) The "ID^ is further employed where in English we use 
 the present; viz., in those instances which imply a similar 
 action to have taken place in the past, or which are 
 based upon it. The "iDi^ consequently serves to express: 
 
 (a) an enduring act, already in operation; e. g. 
 
14. THE USE OF THE 1'^V^ 39 
 
 i^y^ ^^.5n DntitS^n Tli^Ati^ / kaU them who seek for 
 vain things Ps. 31, 7; ''rii^T ^;p ^^T^^ I know it, 
 my son /, know it Gen. 48, 19 ; ^) ^Hl^t^ )lh\ ""nipiZti? ^^ 
 ""nni / /^^^'^ w^ r^j/, nor peace , nor a moment of 
 ease Job 3 , 26 ; 
 
 [b] solemn declaration, promises, decrees and similar 
 acts; e. g. ""nV^^^ "? / swear by myself Gen. 22, 
 16; ^''"J5"^? ^nn^P / forgive according to thy word 
 Num. 14, 20. 
 
 Prophetic predictions (the so called perfectum 
 propheticum) belong to this rule. 
 
 (c) actions of frequent recurrence ; e. g. "1^1$ W^'Q 'H^^ 
 '^T\ ^ blessed the man that walketh not in the coun- 
 sel of the wicked Ps. i , i (Conf. 15, 5). 
 
 3) In case of an hypothesis, of which one knows 
 that it is not, or will not be fulfilled, the "ID^ is used 
 both in the main sentence [apodosis), and in the hy- 
 pothetical clause {protasis) ; e. g. ""D ^b HJH ^DiJ ""ri^J^ '^1^ 
 ''^nn^^ DJ5\"1 nniJ? if the God of my fathers had not been 
 with me thou hadst sent m,e away empty Gen. 31, 42; 
 
 ^0''?n\i nn^i ^T\TT\ TDt\^ m T^vp_ ^3 'isp nnt?i ^b)i^ if she 
 
 had not turned aside from m.e , surely I should have 
 slain thee and saved her alive Num. 22, 33. 
 
 If on the contrary one does not know this, other 
 verbal forms may be used; e. g. I^^Sti^l IDDn v if they 
 were wise they would understand Deut. 32, 29; ""Di^ v 
 Ty^^ Dn^5^1^ tO^DS ^b Vjy^ if my people would hear- 
 ken to me / would quickly bow down their enemies 
 
 Ps. 81 , 14, 15. 
 
40 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 15 The use of the Tfli^ (actio imperfecta). 
 
 i) The TOi^* naturally is used for actions which have 
 to take place in the future; e. g. Dti^ ^3 IVpti^ ^3 
 n^ I^D^'' for they heard that they should take their meal 
 there Gen. 43, 25; DDn^ H^^? ]D nnj^l ^^^^ ^/^^r that he 
 will let you go Ex 3 , 20 ; n."]nn i^^l Qpn K^ ^V i-/^^// ;/^/ 
 stand , neither shall it come to pass Jes. 7, 7. 
 
 2) Hence the TH^J. is used in sentences [final senten- 
 ces) which express the object [finis), after conjunctions 
 such as "113^3, ^^j^ [ut, for the end that) ]? [ne, lest) ; e. g. 
 
 '^^^I5qO '0^5^ 5'.^P ^^ "^^^T '^v'?^ "^'^^^^'^ ^^^^^ ^^^ A^^' ^/ 
 
 ^Z;;/ may restrain you that ye sin not Ex. 20, 20 ; ^ "1^^^ 
 li^pti^^ /^^^^ they may not understand Gen. n, 7; ^p^^ ]? 
 /^<3;/ jj/^ may not be ensnared Deut. 12, 30 ; also after 1 
 when it has the meaning of a final conjunction; e. g. 
 ni^^^ Vn^l that they may be for signs Num. 17, 3. 
 
 3) For the same reason it is used to express a wish 
 (instead of the cohortative or jussive form); e. g. Hi^T 
 T.<!j?? ^""ID^. b)^ may thy work be seen by thy servants Ps. 
 90, 1 6 ; ^ri^l^ n^'^n ^3^1 take thou my plan unto thy heart 
 Prov. 22, 17. 
 
 Especially where the cohortative has no proper form 
 the TH^ is employed with ^^J = / pray ; e. g. i^J "13T 
 ^13;^ /^/ thy servant, I pray thee, speak Gen. 44, 18. 
 
 4) The TH^ is further used to express a prohibition 
 with )lb or h% , (by preference of course with the jus- 
 sive) ; e. g. bUD ^ ntS^^n ^ thou shalt not make unto thee 
 a graven image Ex. 20 , 3 ; ^^'W V^'^ ^tf^O tkb thou shalt 
 not take up a false report Ex. 23, i; ^^in^$ tO''3n b^ look 
 
15- THE USE OF THE TH^. 4 1 
 
 not behind thee Gen. 19, 17; j;^-J D^ ?}T H^n ^Nl /w/ ;2^^ 
 thine hand with the wicked (= be no partner with the wicked) 
 Ex 23, I. 
 
 5) The TH^ moreover usually serves to express the 
 forms of our present tense; e. g. ti^iP.Dn HD what seekest 
 thou Gen. 37, 15; ^11^^ / ^>^^?^/^ /^^^ Ps. 118, 21 ; and 
 it often denotes also a continuing or frequently recurring 
 action , when that which has happened in the past is not 
 thought of, or at least is not uppermost in the mind of 
 the speaker or writer (Conf. 14, 2 ^ and c)\ "I^D^ D^pi 
 and from hence it was parted Gen. 2, 10 W)^ DT^.l 15 b'^^ 
 therefore a man leaveth his father Gen. 2, 24 ; Ht^i^."] '^ 
 liDlppi? 15 it is not so done in our place Gen. 29, 26; 
 l^i^ 1^ nt^^^n I'tOi^ ^^)^p1 ^/^^ ^^'.y mother used to make a 
 little robe for him i Sam. 2, 19. 
 
 6) The Tn};J further serves to express ideas equivalent 
 to / can , I may, it ought etc. ; e. g. ^D^H ^D^^ ;;^^j ye 
 eat Gen. 2, 16; 1W?. ^b ^^ D^WQ ^^^^^ />^^/ ought not 
 to be done Gen. 20, 9; Vli ii^lTn ^^^^/^i" we know this? 
 Gen. 43, 7; "tD^.! "'p ze/A^ ^^;2 ^;ir/j/ Ps. 130, 3. 
 
 7) Finally the TH^ is usually employed after the con- 
 junctions TiJ ^^^;^, and D"]t? before, not yet, even where 
 in English we use a past tense; TW'O T'^l ^^ then sang 
 Moses Ex. 15. I; T\pb VW^ T^ then did Libnah revolt 
 2 Kings 8,22; ny^^ Dnt5 mti^n DW^^I and no herbs of 
 the field had yet sprung up. Gen. 2, 5. 
 
 16. The "ID^ and "Tini^ with | conversive. 
 
 i) The "ID^ with 1 conversive is used to continue a 
 
42 HEBREUW SYNTAX. 
 
 sentence which commenced with TP^ or with any other 
 form of expression designating the action as future ; e. g. 
 
 D^j;^ ^n] ^3ijl D^^nn y^!?. Ql ripb) it rbv^: ]^ lest he put forth 
 his hand and take also of the tree of life aud eat and 
 live for ever Gen. 3, 22 (conf. Gen. 24, 40 ; 41, 34); 
 *>i5?)^pi ID^D TO they be almost ready to stone me Ex. 17, 4; 
 
 TD^ n^D-"! D^ri^i^ ^ivi nwn n-Tn -in-jn n^ d^ ^/ ///^?/ s^^/^^ do 
 
 ^A^V thing then shall God give thee his commaridments , 
 and thou shall be able to endure Ex. 18, 23; \;5 n^{ yg 
 ^T^^. n^lD^I ^^"J^? command the children of Israel and 
 say to them Num. 28 , 2. 
 
 2) Without a preceding word referring to something 
 future, T\^ with 1 conversive is used to introduce a fu- 
 ture action (conf. n 5), which action then follows ex- 
 pressed by TH^, or by "13^ with \ conv. , or by the Im- 
 perative; e. g. ^^yT\\ ^^tO b'2 njni and it shall come to 
 pass, that whosoever findeth me shall slay me Gen. 4, 
 14; hr\\ -101^5 )^i2.n? mT\ ur^ n;ni and it shall come to 
 pass in that day that a great trumpet shall be blown 
 
 jes. 27, 13; ^T\r\\ xm Tm^ np^^1 u^l^rr^ irii^ li^T '3 r\'r\\ 
 
 ^''D? ^Jj^? ^'Jl^ ci,nd it shall come to pass when the Egyp- 
 tians shall see thee , that they shall say : this is his wife 
 and they will kill me , but they will save thee alive Gen. 
 
 12 , 12 ; ^^ "iwn 'n ^i$:ni ^3 n;r!l and it shall be when 
 
 the Lord shall bring thee into the land then be- 
 ware lest Deut. 6, 1012 ; ^nnji ij^p^^n vjy^ Dift n^ni 
 
 and it shall come to pass if ye shall hearken diligently 
 
 unto my commandments that I will give ye Deut. 
 
 II, 13- 14. 
 
1 6. THE 13:^ AND Tn:^ WITH 1 CONVERSIVE 43 
 
 3) The Tr\}l with 1 conversive serves to continue a 
 narrative which commenced with a past tense. The first 
 verb therefore of the narrative should properly stand 
 in the "l!3]^. Yet this generally happens only when an 
 entirely new subject is introduced; e.g. Gen. i, i ; 25, 
 19; Ex. 3, I ; 19, I ; I Kings 5, i. If, however, this is not 
 the case , then the first verb frequently stands in the THJf 
 with ) conv. Hence it is that a narrative so often com- 
 mences with ^nn. -I5T1' "IQ^I. 
 
 Sometimes it even happens that the first verb of the 
 narrative has to be mentally supplied; e. g. Dt<t2 ]5 QtJ^ 
 "l^l'^l njtj^ (= njn D^) Skem {was) a hundred years old when 
 he begat; or Shem begat at the age of a hundred years 
 Gen. II , 10; Vi'^:^ n^^ ?"3?^ ^F--^ ^^^^^n D1^3 O'TA) {It hap- 
 pened) on the third day when Abraham lifted up his 
 eyes; or, on the third day Abraham lifted up his eyes 
 Gen. 22, 4. 
 
 4) The T'H^ with 1 conv. is in certain cases regularly 
 used in the main sentence, viz: 
 
 {a) after a preceding causal sentence ; e. g. np^^^ |^^ 
 *!]tep ^p^p^l 'n "1^1 T\)^ because thou hast rejected the 
 word of the Lord, He hath also rejected thee from 
 being king i Sam. 15, 23. 
 
 {b) when the subject or object of the sentence for 
 some reason or other precedes ; e. g. DDIJ^l HD^I Iti^jioi 
 i^in Di 'b'^^ and his concubine whose name was Reu- 
 mahy she also bare Gen. 22, 24; DD ID^jtpil ''Ol.'^n^ 
 and as for my doctri?te , they despised it Jer. 6, 19. 
 
 5) Just as njni is used to introduce a future action 
 
44 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 (conf. n 2), ""nill frequently serves to introduce a narra- 
 tive; e. g. Gen. 14, i; 15, 17; 22, i. 20; 29, 25; Jos. 
 5, I. 13 etc. 
 
 6) The TO^ with 1 conv. is sometimes used instead 
 of the present; e. g. 153^!! and thou honour est i Sam. 
 2, 29; ^S^^n]!] and he grieveth 2 Sam. 19, 2; ''^.^V.ll <3;;^<i 
 he heareth me Ps. 3,5. In like manner it is used for 
 future events especially in prophecies ; e. g. 'D ^tT\ and 
 the Lord shall exalt Jes. 9, 10 ; "11111 and He shall cause 
 the rain to come down Joel 2, 23 ; wd^O IDJJ^I and their 
 king shall pass on Mich. 2, 13. 
 
 7) The 1 conv. both of the "D^ and of the "l^H^ finally 
 serves to express all the different conjunctions; e. g- 
 ^Xy^^W n^ aninini 11D^il inij^i^l and if any mischief befall 
 him , then shall ye bring down my gray hairs with sor- 
 row Gen. 42 , 38 ; iny.ini ^'Sl^ DO what is man that thou 
 take St knowledge of him? Ps. 144, 3. 
 
 Rem, 1 Sometimes a T^PV ^^ found which is still undei* the influ- 
 ence of a preceding ^ conv.; e. g. UVb i^D^ Dni^^ni 1>^D ^'^^W^^ 'b'2)k^^ 
 
 V T T T T-:- : : : : " : ~ 
 
 they ate and they were filled^ and he gave them what they lusted after 
 Ps. 78, 29; and sometimes under that of one following; e.g. D'^lp ^D^ 
 IDTI ITVS )ini^1 D^?!Dti^3 ^^ caused the east wind to blow in the hea- 
 
 "T \ : ;- T T 
 
 ven; and guided the south wind by his power Ps. 78,26. 
 
 17. The cohortative and jussive besides the other 
 modes of speech for expressing a wish. 
 
 i) The cohortative (a prolonged form of the TH^ by 
 appendig TT) rarely occurs except with the first person 
 (Conf. gram. 45, i 3), and is used to express: 
 
I/. COHORATIVE AND JUSSIVE. 45 
 
 (a) an ardent wish or supplication; e. g. ^3 rTJDDlill 
 D''rl!?^^ "'i^"11 come and hear and let me declare all ye 
 that fear God Ps. 66, 16; ^^li$5 ^? nn?V^ let us pass , 
 I pray thee, through thy land Num. 20, 17. 
 
 {b) a resolution which is uttered with some excite- 
 ment or animation; e. g. HiJliJI r\:m^) ^"^ Tob)^ I will 
 go , and return to my brethren and see Ex. 4,18; 
 n^llj we will run after thee Cant, i , 4. 
 
 Rem. 1 It follows from rules a and b that the cohortative may be 
 used with or without j^^. Where no proper from of the cohortative 
 
 T 
 
 exists, the TH)^ is used with ^^ (conf. 15, 3). 
 
 [c) sometimes also an hypothesis, with or without 
 
 Di^ ; e. g. rb^rm. ^n^^^^ U^ if I speak my grief 
 
 is noi assuaged, and if I forbear Job. 16, 6; DDH^^. 
 QTDti^^l. ''3"?^^ if I pursue mine enemies , / overtake 
 them 2 Sam. 22, 38. 
 
 2) The forms of the cohortative are sometimes used 
 with *l conversive, with the consequence that the origi- 
 nal meaning of the cohortative is lost; e. g. Jin^^iSiJ 
 and I sent Gen. 32, 6; T^W^^iK) and I slept Ps. 3, 6. 
 
 3) The jussive (abbreviated form of TH^ Conf. gram. 
 45, 47) is used: 
 
 (a) to express a command or wish ; e. g. ^""p"! 'H."^ let 
 there be a firmament Gen. 1,6; ^T)?!-? ^^\ ^ ^^^^-^ 
 it be according to thy word Gen. 30, 34 ; Dl^ti^ ^^ Dti^^l 
 may he give thee prosperity Num. 6, 26; ti'^HI it 
 shall be done Esther 7, 2. 
 
 ib) to express a prohibition with a negative, usually 
 with ^i ; e. g. DnniD ^ij IDH b^ respect not their 
 
46 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 offering Num. i6, 15; ^Q;y[ nnii^n h^ destroy not thy 
 people Deut. "9, 26; and sometimes with ^\ e. g. 
 DD^ Dti^n J^^ ""^B nij pi ^;^/j/ /A<?/^ may est not bring 
 my son thither again Gen. 24, 8. 
 
 (^) not unfrequently also in conditional sentences ; e. g. 
 ^^ ''H'') ^V\ Dt^/n ^y />^^2^ makest darkness , /^ <^^^^- 
 meth night Ps. 104, 20 ; I^^Sn^l ^1 2/ A^ smiteth , he 
 will again heal us Hos. 6, I. 
 
 4) In addition to the ordinary forms of the cohorta- 
 tive and jussive, a wish may be further expressed: 
 
 [a) in the form of a question; e. g. I3pti^ ''PP''^? ""P 6^>^ 
 M^^ / were appointed judge 2 Sam. 15, 4; jri^ ''D 
 ^T13 T\)J\ DJfn DiJ (9A, /A<3:/ this people were given into 
 my hand Judges 9, 29. 
 
 The expression JH^ ""p subsequently became a 
 phrase which has lost its original meaning and only 
 serves to introduce a wish; e. g. Dl^ JH^ ""p would 
 that it were evening Deut. 28, 67; "15IPD ""^.^H? 'p 
 would that I were in the desert Jer. 9, i. In this 
 signification it may also be constructed with the 
 infinitive ; e. g. 1J)niD ]V\^, ''p would that we had died 
 Ex. 16, 3; "I5!I ni^^ iny "^P Oh that God would speak 
 Job II, 5 ; or with a verbum Jinitum with or wit^f 
 liout 1 conjunctive; e. g. urh HJ DDD^ n;ni in^ "ip 
 would that they had such a heart Deut. 5 , 26; ]ri^ ""D 
 vp inns'") i^lDi:^ Oh that my words were written down 
 Job. 19, 23; "^n^^T in;" ip OA />^^/ I knew]oh2'^, 3. 
 
 (^) by the particles U^ and 1^ with the TH^ or with a par- 
 ticiple ; e. g. "h irpti^ri Di^ ^{^ntp: 6>A Israel that thou 
 
1 8. IMPERATIVE. 47 
 
 wouldst hearken unto meFs.Siyg; }^^1 rl)btj{ ^tOpn DNt 
 Ok that thou wouldst slay the wicked y o God Ps. 
 I39> 19; ''^ ^8^ ""P^ ^ Oh that my people would hear- 
 ken to me Ps. 81 , 14. 
 
 In one instance Di^ is found beside 1^ with the 
 
 imperative ; \:i);D^ "b Tm, D^^ "^Nl (9A that thou , I pray 
 
 thee J wouldst listen to m,e Gen. 23, 13. 
 
 Rem. 2 When 1^ is followed by a verb in the "yy^ it expresses a 
 
 wish which has not been fulfilled (just as ^"^ conf. 14, 3); e. g. 
 
 liDD 1!p w^/^/^ that we had died Numb. 14, 2; ^ril^D^ DDti^PH i^1^ 
 : ~ T : : T : -': 
 
 Oh that thou hadst hearkened unto my commandments Jes. 48, 18. 
 
 18. The use of the Imperative. 
 
 i) The most ordinary use of the imperative is to ex- 
 press a command; e. g. Iti^^. T\)k^ do this Gen. 45, 19; 
 h^rp^. "'^.5 J^iJ ''H command the children of Israel Num. 
 28 , 2. 
 
 2) The imperative moreover is frequently used to ex- 
 press : 
 
 {a) a petition, especially with )^\\ e. g. KJ ^^J^^ say^ 
 
 I pray thee Gen. 12, 13. 
 [b) a wish; e. g. ^^)iJ^'V 1^ ^/^ ^>^^^ ^^^^ wouldst listen 
 
 to me Gen. 23, 13. 
 {c) a promise ; e. g. p^H D^n DiJ 'I^Diiill ^;2^ jj/^ .f^^// 
 
 eat the fat of the land Gen. 45, 18. 
 
 3) When the imperative has the meaning of a pro- 
 mise, it generally is the result of a preceding wish ex- 
 pressed in the form of an imperative ; e. g. Vr\\ 1ti^3^. HJ^T 
 do this and then you shall live Gen. 42 , 18; ly^T 
 
48 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 no l^pj^J DW? IV^;^) )1^J)) sow ye , and reap , and plant 
 vineyards y and you shall eat the fruit thereof ]qs. 37, 30 ; 
 Cpni n''D"J"l rii^"] consider her ways and thou shalt be 
 wise Prov. 6,6. 
 
 Such a preceding wish, however, may also be expres- 
 sed by the THJ^; e. g. T^T\\ '^!!^jl ^^SH]'! and may he pray for 
 thee and then thou shalt live Gen. 20, 7; H^V. ^^J lV.3{.''i^ 
 *^^P1 DiJ ''tD^DI /^^ ;;2^ , / pray, give thee counsel and thou 
 shalt save thy life i Kings i, 12. 
 
 Rem. With the imperative the masculine is sometimes used in- 
 stead of the feminine; e. g. ^^^ ^^^ *^^^\ (^ ""IP^) '^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ 
 unto her : stand in the door of the tent Judges 4, 20 ; DDti^l'' DIDI 
 
 ^^2P (= "'Dm) bittd the chariot unto the swift steed ^ oh inhabitant of 
 T : * 
 
 Lachish Michah i, 13; Dliii^ti^ mD (= HiTin) tremble ye women 
 that are at ease Jes. 32, 11. (Conf. 10 Rem. 5 and 19, i). 
 
 4) When more words than one refer to the subject 
 addressed by the imperative, the suffix of the third 
 person, and not that of the second, is generally used; 
 e. g. IDT b'^_ 13"in ^^)^ 1ID''t^ place ye everyone your swords 
 upon your thigh Ex. 32, 27; iniy. ^D1 Dip HIDnD D5^ IPIj? 
 (not ^ni]!^. Conf. however ibid, vers 11) take ye censers, 
 Korah, and all your company Num. 16, 6; D^D D''p); IJ^pt?^ 
 (not Dp??) hear ye nations, all of you i Kings 22,28. 
 
 This construction is once found with TH^, and in 
 such a manner that the suffix of the third person is 
 made even to precede; e. g. IDIti^r) D^3 return ye, all 
 ^f you Job. 17, 10. 
 
19- PERSONS OF THE VERB. 49 
 
 19. Persons of the Verb. 
 
 i) In the use of the persons of the verb the masc. 
 affix is now and then used instead of the fern, [enal- 
 lage) ; e. g. n^Dni and thou (i. e. the harlot v. 3) hast 
 made thee a covenant Jes. 57, 8; ^D'lni after ""^^.ni thou 
 (i. e. the harlot) hast do7ie evil things , and thou hast 
 had thy way Jer. 3, 5 ; DrD^^TI and ye (i. e. adulterous 
 women) shall know Ez. 23, 49; ^^ HIDnS 1i^")^n b^ be not 
 afraid ye beasts of the field Joel 2, 22; Di^^l T\^'^X^ ^^ 
 1"l*l1J^n that ye (i. e. daughters of Jerusalem) stir not up 
 nor awaken love Cant. 2 , 7 ; DH^t^^. "1^1^3 ^i" jj^^ (i. e. 
 daughters of Naami) have dealt with the dead Ruth 1,8; 
 ijirTi D'^ti^in //^^ w^'t^^j shall give Esther i , 20 (Conf. 10 
 Rem. 5 and 18 Rem.) 
 
 2) The impersonal is expressed by the third person 
 sing. masc. as is evident from the frequently occurring 
 expression ^H^l and it was , it came to pass, or also by 
 the third pers. fern. ; ex. g. H^nn )ib\ DIpH ^ it shall not 
 stand neither shall it come to pass Jes. 7, 7; nn^^J ^7 
 for to thee it doth appertain Jer. 10, 7; "t^P n"li?ti^^ and 
 round about him it is very tempestuous Ps. 50, 3 ; t^IDH 
 '^\^ but now it is come to thee Job 4, 5. In like man- 
 ner the third person fem. is used by preference when 
 something indefinite takes the place of the subject; e.g. 
 D?ni^P ^ph nn:n -yv^, ^3 all that belonged to the King of 
 Egypt 2 Kings 24, 7; ""S^ ^^ nn^;^ ^'y neither came it into 
 my mind Jer. 19, 5. 
 
 3) The impersonal form on the other hand is not 
 unfrequently used where a the third person is meant ; e. g. 
 
 4 
 
50 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 V "1ii,')l (lit. strait was to him) and he was afraid Gen. 
 32, 8; 1^ ^ppl (lit. lest there be healing for them i. e. 
 the people) lest they be healed Jes. 6, 10. In this case 
 also the fern, form is sometimes used; e. g. "I^lTi^ "l^HI 
 (lit. and strait was to David) and David was afraid 
 I Sam. 30, 6. 
 4) The indefinite one ^ they are expressed: 
 
 [a) by the 3rd person sing. masc. ; e. g. H^ti^ ^^"^g they 
 called her name Gen. 11, 9 ; pt^^T ^T] DNt ^ti'") they 
 shall carry away the riches of Samaria Jes. 8 , 4. 
 
 [b) by the 3^(1 person plur. masc. ; e. g. IDC^ 1^11?!!] ^<^ 
 ^^^jK called his name Gen. 25, 25; ^pli^^ ^//^j/ watered 
 the flock Gen. 29, 2; ^Hli*!.''! ^;/<^ they brought Jmn 
 hastily out of the dungeon Gen. 41, 14; 1ti^p5"] ^^^ 
 //^^r^ <^^ sought I Kings i , 2. 
 
 [c) by the passive ; e. g. ^niH TiJ /^^/^ began men to call 
 Gen. 4, 26. 
 
 (<^) by the 2nd person; e. g. HD^S as one goeth 
 Gen. 10, 19. 30; 1^D"}ti^n 2V .y/2^// be burned Lev. 13, 
 55- 57 conf. v. 52 (perhaps also ^3"l^.5 according to 
 ones estimation Lev. 27, 2.) 
 
 (^) by li^''i:^; e. g. "5i^''ii^ n'ln^ ^;^^ shall nourish a young 
 cow Jes. 7, 21; but rarely by '^^^T\ ; e. g. "IIDJJ HS 
 ti^'^^^ M?/j /^^jj/ said I Sq,m. 9, 9. 
 
 (/) by repeating the verb in the form of a participle ; 
 e. g. b^lu ^S? "? ^y <^ //^<3:?2 fall from thence Deut. 
 22, 8 (seldom however in the plur.; e.g. D^)^bi IV^J ///^j/ 
 shall plant Jer. 31, 5), or by adding a noun derived 
 from a word which forms an integral part of the 
 
IQ. PERSONS OF THE VERB 5 1 
 
 sentence; e.g. IDODnS DDn bbrir)'] b^ let no one glory 
 iyi his wisdom Jer. 9, 22. 
 
 Rem. 1 On the contrary, in certain cases, the 3rd person plur. is to 
 be translated as passive; e. g. 17) 1^;^ and wearisofue nights are ap- 
 pointed to me\ viz. by God ^ Job 7, 3; Hi^O IPID'' i^^y shall be rooted 
 out of it Pr. 2 , 22. (conf. ]1^"I*in^ i^^'^^ ^^^ interpretation may be made 
 known to the king Dan. 2, 30 5 *)pQin ^^^l were taken out of the tetnple 
 Dan. 5,3). 
 
 5) When the subject is to be emphasised, it is pla,- 
 ced separately as a personal pronoun before its pre- 
 dicate ; e. g. ""ri*!!! ''^^5. /, / have made Abram rich Gen. 
 14, 23; conf. Gen. 9, 7; 15, 15; Deut. 3, 24; Judg. 15, 
 18; I Kings 21, 7; Ps. 2, 6; 139, 2; occasionally also 
 after the predicate; e. g. DHi^ ""B PV^PH ]D that ye will 
 not kill me yourselves Judg. 15, 12. In later Hebrew it 
 is found after the verb without adding any emphasis; 
 e. g. "'i^^. "'HISII / said within my heart Eccles. i , 16; 
 Conf. 2 , II fif. ; 1^^:51, ""nns^"] and I commended mirth Eccl. 
 8, 15. 
 
 Rem. 2 In the w^ritings of the poets and prophets we sometimes 
 find a sudden transition from one person into another; e. g. ]^^''^ 
 
 n^Dti^ ]1"1^^ yeshurun waxed fat yea^ thou art waxen fat 
 
 Deut. 32, 15; conf. Deut. 32,17; Jes. 1,29; 5,8; 22,16; 61,7; Mai. 
 
 2, 15; Job. 16, 7; rbl^ ^rro i^im = n^nj^ np"iD '^^i though i waste 
 
 V : 't t: : :. ' tt: ;- 
 
 away as a rotten thing Job 1 3 , 28. 
 
 N. B. This transition should not be confounded with that from the 
 oratio abliqua into the oratio recta ; e. g. Gen. 26, 7. 
 
 20. Modifications of the verbal idea. 
 
 Modifications of the original sense of a verb, (such as 
 
52 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 are found in other languages e. g. ire^ inire ^ exire , re- 
 
 dire, transire), by composition with prepositions and 
 
 other words, do not exist in Hebrew, but are expressed: 
 
 [a] by different verbal stems ; e. g. "^^H to go , ^^ to 
 
 go in\ '^^\ to go out, Dti? to go back etc. 
 {b) by constructing a verb with different prepositions ; 
 e. g. ^^n to go ; "^in^ "=1^? ^^ S^ after, to follow 
 (German nachgehen) ^^jj to call; h i^'JIJ to call to [zu- 
 rufen)\ ^^3^ ^^^ to call after {nachrufen); 5 ^^g to 
 call upon to invoke [anrufen); ^DJ to fall; l^^ 7D^ to 
 fall upon , to attack {anf alien) ; ^yd^ b^\ to fall down 
 before, to prostrate {nieder fallen) ; T\)^ to see ; D T\^ 
 to look on, to behold (ansehen) viz. with pleasure or 
 with revenge. The further particulars of this rule 
 belong to the sphere of the Lexicon. 
 [c) by connecting the verb with other words ; e. g. 
 n^D nti^3^ to destroy, to consume; 1J3 jH^ to give up, 
 to deliver up. 
 
 21. Connection of two verbs into one idea. 
 
 i) Adverbs in Hebrew are frequently expressed by 
 verba finita, which follow the same construction as that 
 of the verbs with a relative meaning (the so called 
 Auxiliary verbs of mood, as / can, I will , I begin). 
 
 2) A verb expressing the main action is connected 
 with the verb serving as adverb: 
 
 A. in the form of an infinitive; e. g. "ID^ ??^?t*5 ^^^^ 
 shalt be able to endure Ex. i8, 23; vbT\ ^D nnpi )!b 
 y^T\ she dared not to set the sole of her foot upon 
 
21. CONNECTION OF TWO VERBS. 53 
 
 the ground Deut. 28, 56; \^^\ ''H^^^^ / a7n weary to 
 bear them Jes. i, 14; "?J1^n V9"J15 113^ ^ they would 
 not walk in his ways Jes. 42, 24; Iti^^. H^Dpn thou 
 hast done foolishly Gen. 31, 28; iriJ^ )iCi^ "IIV ICPI'II 
 /^^jj/ ^^/^<^ /22>;2 still more Gen. 37, 5; nri ^Pli^it (lit., 
 / w/// begin to put, etc.) ////^ day will I for the 
 first time put the dread of thee etc., Deut. 2, 25; 
 HD^ t?^y^\ to walk humbly Michah 6, 8. 
 B. more frequently in the form of an infinitive with 
 b\ e. g. )k^'ch riXP thou hast found quickly Gen. 27, 
 20; Qnp^ n5^?ni thou didst flee secretly G^xv. 31, 27; 
 n?^^ 'Pi^"! ^^^(^ >^^ assayed to go i Sam. 17, 39; n''li^f?n 
 'pl^^ti^!? M<??^ hast asked a great thing 2 Kings 2, 10. 
 
 Rem. 1. This construction is nearly always used in prose with the 
 
 verbs , ^^{^ID i \>TT\ ^^ commence , rj^DIH to continue , "IDD to hasten , 
 
 pTl'in to remove^ p^^yiT] to make deep ^ ^'^^Tl to make wonderful 
 
 (even with the infinitive passive "ITyH^ 2 chr. 26, 15) ^"in , Th3 to cease ^ 
 
 J^ to be ready ^ completed^ DtO"^n to find good ^ to approve^ Vl^HPi to 
 .... T : 
 
 multiply (and other similar vei'bs), DlDi^j V^DH to will^ to desire^ ]^?3 to refuse^ 
 ;i^l^p to seek , ^^l , ^^l /^ (5^ ^/^ , y^b to learn^ JHi , ti^^i ^^ permit. 
 
 This is moreover the usual construction with nomina which imply a 
 verbal idea; e.g. ^'\'y) )^^ (lit. there is no entering) no one may enter 
 
 Esther 4, 2; ")"iT3^ THV ^^^^ to seize upon Job 15, 24. 
 
 Rem. 2. This construction is seldom found reversed, viz. that the 
 
 infinitive is made to express the adverbial idea: e. g. J^^^Dn? ntC^V 
 
 : -: T T 
 
 xoho has acted wondrously Joel 2 , 26. 
 
 Rem. 3. In poetry however the p is , in all these cases , frequently 
 omitted before the infinitive; e. g. 'TCy^ ]1^ there is nothing to be com- 
 
54 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 pared unto thee Ps. 40, 6. ")"!); D''"in^n "^ho will (lit. are ready) rouse 
 up leviathan Job 3, 8. 
 
 C. in the form of a verbum finitum , viz. 
 K in such a manner that both verbs agree as to the 
 teinpus y modus, genus and Humerus, and are con- 
 nected with ^ conjunctive; e. g. V^X 0^ ^D^l ^^^ 
 iV<?<3:/^ <^^^<3:;2 /^ plant Geg. 9, 20 ; Djlll Dnn^Ji ^P^i''! '^^^ 
 again Abram took a wife Gen. 25; i "Ilinj inpHT 
 ^;/<^ she let down quickly Gen. 24, 18; pj'l ^^i !:5^i!in do 
 I pray thee tarry all flight Judg. 19, 6; rin^ni HD^T 
 ^V ^//<3:// ^^ again unto destruction Jes. 6, 13; "niDn 
 ''r)!}^;j."| (lit. / desired and I sat down) I sat down 
 with pleasure Cant. 2, 3. 
 /3 in such a manner that they agree in every thing 
 except as to the tempus; viz. in the following order : 
 i) first the actio imperfecta and then the actio per- 
 fecta ; e. g. 1^5")^^ Vd^^, ^J^^ that they may learn to fear 
 Deut. 31, 12; ""rini^^l D^^i^iJ / will take back Hosea 2, 1 1 ; 
 nn^D^l Dl^ri it shall be built again Dan. 9, 25. 
 
 2) first the actio perfecta and then the actio imper- 
 fecta ; e. g. D^31 ^'b^^u b\ would that we had been content 
 to dwell Jos. 7, 7; ^n^^^p^J "in:^!^ .y/^^// / ^^ able to find it 
 Job. 23, 3; n^lijl. '^^i^ ""Hpti^^ ^;/<^ again I saw Eccl. 4, 1.7. 
 y in such a manner that they agree in all things ex- 
 cept as to the modus ; e. g. i^i 1i>^D1 IDI^H return ye 
 again , I pray Job. 17, 10. 
 ^ in such a manner that they agree in all points , but 
 are not connected by *1 conjunctive (asyndeton); e. g. 
 ^7 !^nn commence to possess it Deut. 2, 24; D"iri 
 
21. CONNECTION OF TWO VERBS. 55 
 
 ^iP5D wash me still more Ps. 51,4; IDD 'b^^T\ be 
 pleased to look upon me ]oh 6, 28; n^nj;^ HDI^iJ / 
 will agaiyi feed thy flock Gen. 30, 31 ; ^"iSin ISnn h^ 
 talk no more i Sam. 2 , 3 ; I^^D 1^"1j^ cry ye aloud 
 Jer. 4, 5; in^ ^^^D^n i-^V ;j/^ <^^ze/;2 low Jer. 13, 18; 
 inn^ ^P''PVn they have deeply corrupted themselves 
 Hos. 9, 9; inp^ T\TjD they soon forgot Ps. 106, 13; 
 jnj "lis he give th liberally Ps. 112, 9. 
 
 Rem. 4 The construction xvith *) conjunctive is the usual one in prose, 
 and that wilhozit ) conjunctive the usual one in poetry. The latter how- 
 ever, is now and then also found in prose; e. g. "IJ^^ TWO b^^^Ti (^^^ 
 Moses began to declare Deut. i, 5; IDIDi 'IDH i^<^y w^r^ wholly cut off 
 Jos. 3, 16; p'^lfin n"inn ^^^ earnestly repaired Neh. 3, 20: PliilD- 
 nri/ti^i /^/ lis seitd abroad every where uftto our brethren I Chr. 13, 2. 
 
 Rem. 5 Also in the construction without *| conjunctive it may happen 
 
 that both verbs differ as to the tenipus \ e. g. Tin Dti^^ti^l ^^^ 071 the 
 
 .... ^ . _ . . 
 
 third day thou shall go down i Sam. 20, 195 PliDi^ Tl^"''' i^? ^ cannot 
 give titles Job. 32, 22. In this case the first verb is sometimes ex- 
 pressed by a participle; e. g. 'ir}1*]i "ID^ "'P^^ '^'5^'?^^ ^^^ early 
 
 in the tnorning seek for strong drink Jes. 5, 11; ^^U'' V^DPl ^l 
 
 pleased him to magnify Jes 42, 21. 
 
 Rem. 6 It is a bold and unusual construction when the two verbs 
 
 differ in person and number \ e. g. "j^ HSj ^D1^ 'h\)^ "^^ shall perhaps 
 be able to smite them (lit. / shall perhaps prevail that we may smite 
 the?fi) Num. 22 , ^'^^rh ^^*\T>^ ''CDin ^ ^'^^^^ j/^a// no more be called 
 (lit. thou shall not continue that they call thee') Jes. 47, i. ') 
 
 i) This place in Jes. may, however, be also explained according to 
 19, 4 rem. i. 
 
56 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 D. in the form of a participle or of a verbal adjec- 
 tive; e. g. niDD )bnr\ had begun to wax dim i Sam, 
 3, 2; |il.lp jnii who is able to play (as regards the 
 participle ^11^ conf. Rem. 5) i Sam. 16, 16; ^OTOD 
 Tll^ when thou shalt have ceased to spoil]Qs. 33, i '). 
 
 3) The verb expressing the main action is not un- 
 frequently entirely omitted, so that it must be supplied 
 from the context; e. g. "'"IHQ = '^T\p^ "X.^ {take) quickly 
 Gen. 18,6; Vr\jy!X = Dl^"!^ 'niD.'ll and they regarded one 
 another trembling Gen. 42, 28; inpH]'! = VWCb inpn'll ayid 
 they regarded one another with astonishment Gen. 43, 33 
 (Conf. Jes. 13, 8); ^^T^) = b'\^^b \^T?l they shall anxiously 
 inquire ]qs. ii, 10 (Conf. 8, 19); nns = Dn^^;!! DDD that sent 
 7tot its prisoners home in freedom Jes. 14, 17; 1ti^''"?nn = 
 li^DJ. Iti^^'inn come hear me in silence Jes. 41, i; l^'innn 
 ^Dp = ""^^p IJ^lil 1ti^''XD depart from me in silence Job 13, 
 13 ; ''^n'';^^ = ""^n^^ni '^rcp^. and from the horns of the wild- 
 oxen deliver me in answer to my prayer Ps. 22, 22. ^) 
 
 Hence one always says ''10^ ^^P ~ "'10^ HD^^ ^'0 to 
 follow sincerely. 
 
 i) 111^ may be also considered as an infinitive, and would then 
 belong to the examples of A. 
 
 2) It is not necessary, however, to reckon as belonging to this rule 
 such places as Ps. 74, 7 ; and 89, 40 , where ^^p) may be the ^^Q of 
 
 a denominativum of ^ppl slam , with the signification to cast down , to 
 
 destroy. 
 
22. THE INFINITIVE. 57 
 
 CHAPTER V THE NOMINAL FORMS. 
 
 22. The Infinitive. 
 
 i) The use of the infinitive in Hebrew is exceedingly 
 frequent, and since it is a verbal substantive it belongs 
 as well to nouns as to verbs, forming a transition 
 from the one to the other, and following the construction 
 of both. 
 
 2) One consequence of this is that it follows the con- 
 struction of the noun and at the same time governs an 
 object, as if it were a verbum finitum; e. g. Ut\^ n"lS?5 
 when she bare them (lit. in baring them) Gen. 25, 26; 
 ID 1V^9? when he met hi^n (lit. iyi his meeting him) Num. 
 35, 19; 'n nij n^l yy^r\ ni^t^O the earth is full of the 
 knowledge of the Lord (lit. of knowing the Lord) Jes* 
 
 II, 9; \y^r\ b^_y^r\ rbrrrQ nnp; ^ who would not ven- 
 ture to set the sole of her foot upon the earth Deut. 28, 
 56; V^^ 'n nteri^l the Lord being merciful unto them Gen. 
 19, 16; 1:l^)^^ 'n n^^^ti^S because the Lord hated us Deut. 
 I, 27; |3TOn n^^ D^'pn nra and on the day that the ta- 
 bernacle was reared up Numb. 9, 15; ""rii^ H^Tin i^""!! )ib\\ 
 was not this knowing me} Jer. 22, 16. 
 
 3) The infinitive occurs also as a pure substantive, 
 without governing an object, taking the place of a 
 nomen regens or 7iomen rectu^n, of the subject, object, 
 or attribute, or is connected with pronominal suffixes 
 or prepositions; in a word, it is entirely constructed 
 as if it were a noun without the grammatical cha* 
 
58 . HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 racter of a verb ; e. g. M2) D'J^n nVT), DltD i^b it is not 
 good that man should be alone Gen. 2, i8; H^^i] '^^.. 
 nipDH the time that the cattle should be gathered together 
 Gen. 29, 7 ; D^H Hin^^ D^ID P^l there was no water for 
 the people to drink Ex, 17, i ; DltD ^^ p-"!^^ '^W^ D: <^/jd7 
 to punish the righteous is not good Prov. 17, 26; "^TlpiJ 7j^ 
 because thou say est Jer. 2, 35 ; HI^ID "^^^l^ -^Xy2V\\ and his 
 eyes were dim so that he eould not see Gen. 27, i. 
 
 4) Further, the infinitive is frequently used as ob- 
 ject of a verbum Jinitum or participium. of the same 
 stem, and is then placed either before or after it. Thus 
 it generally serves to modify or emphasise the action 
 (conf. 28, 6), or to express a repetition or continua- 
 tion; e. g. 1i^^^ ~^pn "^^5- wouldst thou perhaps reign 
 over us Gen. 37, 8 ; npDD^ ^DD^ "ilD niDzH "^^n and now 
 thou art gone away because thou sore longedst Gen. 
 31, 30 ; ti^"'i^n 1j3 "l)^n "liyn ///^ ;;2<^;^ has expressely warned 
 us Gen. 43,3; 1^''"1in ^^ ^'"'1'in <^?^/ he could not wholly 
 drive them out Judg. i , 28 1{^"J 1^^"11 i:3^5n b^) ^1D^ IVD^ 
 ^i^"]^. -'^"l 7^ hear continually but ye tmder stand not , ye 
 see continually but ye perceive not Jes. 6, 9; iDiJ D^'l^i^ 
 i^l^lp'p they say continually tmto them that hate me Jer. 
 
 23. 17- 
 
 When the infinitive stands after the verbum jinitum , 
 which frequently occurs with "^I^H, then another infi- 
 nitive or participle, or even finite verb, of a diffe- 
 rent stem is frequently added ; e. g. Dl^l i^liT ^Ji.".! and 
 it went to and fro Gen. 8 , 7 ; i^lD^I J^^lJ J^j^I he shall 
 smite and shall again heal Jes. 19, 22; ^1^1 ^T\ ^^\ and 
 
22. THE INFINITIVE. 59 
 
 he waxed continually greater Gen. 26, 13; ^!?ilp1 t^l^J i^^f" 
 and as he came out he cursed 2 Sam. 16, 5; ^T\ D''D^n 
 li^pni blowing with the trumpets as they went on ]os. 6, 13. 
 
 Rem. 1 The infinitive, when it is connected in this manner with a 
 V er bum Jini turn ^ need not agree with it as to the conjugation (p^S); 
 ^' g' HDl'' ^"itO ^n^ Joseph' is without doubt torn into pieces Gen. 37, 
 33 5 n"lt5^ ^110 i'^ ^'^ ^^ indeed torn into pieces Ex. 22, 125 {.^^ rnoni 
 nmpp ^^^ ^i'^^ ^^ 0,11 redeemed Lev. 19, 20; ^HOT II^H rTili? ^-'''J 
 <^'w was made quite bare Hab. 3, 9. 
 
 Rem. 2 In negative sentences the negation is placed hetween the 
 
 infinitive and the finite verb: e. g. nmOi )ih rnsni Lev. 19, 20: 
 
 T T : : t: 
 
 It^nin Vb ti^nini Judg. 1,28; 15, 13; i Kings 3, 27; but it very 
 seldom precedes ; e. g. pHDH HID '^ y^ ^^^^^ ^^i surely die Gen. 3-, 4 ; 
 Ps. 49, 8; Amos 9, 8. 
 
 Rem. 3 We shall see later on (32, 5) that, like the infinitive, nouns 
 also are commonly connected as objects with a verbum finitum and 
 that a noun sometimes takes the place of an infinitive; e. g. 1^3^^ ^ 
 V\>\ j/m// they not be capable of escaping ptmishment Hosea 8, 5. 
 
 5) On the other hand, the infinitive is not unfre- 
 quently used instead of a verbum finitum, both with or 
 without a preceding verbum finitum, 
 
 A. after a preceding verbum fi^nitum : 
 z a fter the ID^; e. g. IH^^ "linni . -"n^^;!: Tib^Ti did I 
 reveal jnyself .... and choose him ? i Sam. 2, 28 ; 
 Dncp n'bm^ "^l^^jn XSm^ Dnn^) DH?; it was written , 
 and it was sealed with the king's ring; and letters 
 were sent Esther 3, 13. 
 /S after "ID^ with 1 conversive ; e. g. IDni O^^ IIPDI 
 
6o HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 1y^ and they shall mourn for him y and bitterly 
 weep for him Zech. 12, 10. 
 
 y after the TH};; e. g. D'ip^ 1i^ "ISPP nspn ^Dl if 
 
 thou sell aught or buy Lev. 25, 14; HDIi HID 
 
 irii^ d:i"J ^"^\^T\ the man shall be surely put to 
 
 deaths all the congregation shall stone him. Num- 
 
 15. 35- 
 I after TH^ with 1 conversive ; e. g. ITO iriJ^ DSn::! 
 
 Id^^ and he made him to ride and he set him 
 
 Gen. 41, 43. 
 
 Rem. 4 Sometimes even after a participle; e. g. 'Tj^DH Dli^S DHDi 
 Dinn^l ivriilen in the king's name aftd sealed Esther 8 , 8. 
 
 B. without a preceding verbum finitum , and conse- 
 quently, in the beginning of the sentence: 
 
 a, instead of the "ID^ (more or less like the Latin In- 
 finitivus Historicus)\ e. g. ^^y\ ^:i)) ri)r\) m'D) rb^ they 
 swear f they lie, they kill, ^they steal, they commit 
 adultery Hos. 4,2. 
 
 /3 instead of the ^^nV^ e. g. "iHini blD^ they shall eat 
 and leave thereof 2 Kings 4, 43. 
 
 y frequently instead of the imperative; e. g. HNl "lIDJ 
 nin Dl'^n remember this day Ex. 13, 3; 1'' njjj "lID^ 
 nj^n observe the sabbath day Deut. 5, 12. 
 
 In all these instances the intention appears to 
 be to add emphasis and force to the idea. 
 
 Rem. 5 When the infinitive takes the place of a verbum Jinihmi , the 
 subject may be added to it: e. g. I^T ^ DD^ ^IDH every male among 
 
 TT T V T 
 
 you shall be circumcised Gen. 17, 10; pHJ^ 1^33 njli^ ^"Ipl) *^^ ^^^^ 
 
23- USE OF THE PARTICIPLE. 6l 
 
 .^/ Aaron shall offer it Lev. 6, 7 ; Tr\^T\ ^3 D^^D^^^ Id^ UT\ all the 
 
 ' T"T T T-:T T 
 
 congregation shall stone him with stones Num. 15, 35; ^l^"^ 3"f ti^'j^lS 
 ^i{^3 let a bear robbed of her whelps meet a man Prov. 17, 12. 
 
 23. Use of the Participle. 
 
 i) Since the participle is a verbal adjective it is partly 
 used as an adjective, partly as a verb, and follows the 
 construction of both. 
 
 2) As for its signification , it may express as well the 
 past and future, as an action which takes place the 
 moment the writer speaks ; e. g. Hti^y D^n'^^^n "l^^$ what 
 God will do Gen. 41, 25; HQ dead; "l^li born\ l^li D^^ 
 to a people that shall be born Ps. 22, 32; ^"ID^ D^l a 
 people which shall be created Ps. 102, 19; "iS"^ "'5"'^. ^y 
 Lord speaketh Num. 32, 27; U^ Ona D:31^^ "^ti^^^ //^^ /;2<3^ 
 wherein ye (now) sojourn Jer. 35, 7. In like manner it 
 generally signifies the present. 
 
 The hy^^ ''^li''? (part, passivum) of h'\>_ however has al- 
 most exclusively the meaning of something past. 
 
 Rem. 1. The ^IVf] "'ili'^S sometimes expresses an enduring quality, 
 
 T 
 
 while the 7^'iO ''ili^D only denotes a momentary condition ; e. c. HID!!! 
 confident (always) P^ID ^^ have confidence {under certain circumstances') ; 
 ]1D^ (^permanent) inhabitant ]3lti^ ^ sojourner'^ 12*111 ^IPli^ "^^^ ^^^ '^'^^^ 
 io handle the sword Cant. 3,8 ^"nn ^Tfli^ would mean: who have girded 
 on the sword, (conf. 4 , 2). 
 
 3) When the participle takes the place of a verbmn 
 finitum, with or without T\y^ ^ it has in most cases 
 the signification of the present; e. g. IJli^ "'5^iJ i^T i? 
 
62 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 for I fear him Gen. 32, 12 ; TW,'^ ^^^$ 1^1^ which thou 
 doest Ex. 18, 17; D^j^J^i n^HI. ra; n^n nn:^1 ^/^^ now be- 
 hold it is dry and is become mouldy Jos. 9, 12. 
 
 Not unfrequently however it stands instead of the fu- 
 ture; e. g. -I'^tpp^ idiNi r\Ty'p TO D^p;^ ^3 for yet seven 
 days and I will cause it to rain Gen. 7, 4; ''II^ ti^"l1^ will 
 inherit from me Gen. 15, 3 (conf. ^y) v. 4); ""Di^ JT / 
 ^^^// judge Gen. 15, 14. Often also it occurs instead of 
 the imperfect; e. g. "2^^ my\. as he sat Gen. 18, i ; H^DI 
 n)/l n^n <3;;^^ Moses pastured the flock Ex. 3 , i ; or of the 
 perfect ; e. g. t\)?r\T\ 5^^''V. J^^^^ eyes have seen Deut. 4, 3. 
 
 Rem. 2 When the participle has the signification of a verbum fini- 
 tum whether in the present , perfect , or future , it is frequently preceded 
 
 by r\T\\ e. g. ^i^nn^ ip^ DHinp ^j^nij it^:^ mn ^^/^^^^ ^^^j brother 
 
 Esau thinks to kill thee Gen. 27, 42; ii<"in ^^ 1/!J)^ D^m ^^^^^ -^^^ stood 
 by the river Gen. 41 , i ; ^ISpH H^^ {^""DQ ""^in and I will britig the 
 flood of waters Gen. 6, 17. 
 
 4) Sometimes a sentence commences with a participle 
 having the signification of a verbum finitum , and is con- 
 tinued by a verbum finitum in *1D^ or lin^ with or with- 
 out *! conversive or 1 conjunctive. 
 
 {a) with a verbum in "ID:^; e. g. D^l^H? D^ti^lD D^n"^^ 
 
 nn-'n^ lipti? oniio l^$ nn^s 6^^^ ;;^^^^//^ ///^ desolate 
 
 to rettirn home .... but the rebellious to dwell in a 
 parched land Ps. 68, 7. 
 [b) with a verb in "13^ with 1 conversive; e. g. ""DiNl 
 Cn'^i!^ T\X\^ np / ^w dying y but God shall be with 
 you Gen. 48, 21. 
 
23- USE OF THE PARTICIPLE, 63 
 
 [c] with a verb in "ID^ with | conjunctive; e. g. ^^'i^ 
 HD-i n^\)^m n^Tpi Dp'i; ^:i^ ns ke poureth contempt 
 upon the princes and looseth the belt of the strong 
 Job. 12, 21. 
 
 [d] with a verb in l^n^; e. g. D''ton D^n Dl^tif '"^j^lD^ DOT 
 *^]y"'5^^ ^^ maketh thy border peace, he filleth thee 
 with the fat of wheat Ps. 147, 14 conf. v. 15. 
 
 [e] with a verb in "l^Piy with 1 conversive; e. g. "^D 
 "^ i^n^l i:^ l^n i^^'in ^1D^? ze//^^ then is he that hath 
 caught venison, and brought it to me Gen. 27, 33. 
 
 (/) with a verb in TH^ with 1 conjunctive; D''^i;i'' ^^Xi 
 b^in^ D^l^Qli^l ^"h^ he leadeth counsellors away as 
 spoil, and judges he maketh fools Job. 12, 17 conf. 
 vv. 19 ff. 
 
 Rem. 3. When the subject has not been named before, a personal 
 pronoun is added to the participle as subject. Sometimes, however, this 
 pronoun is omitted, and must be supplied fi'om the context; e. g. with 
 the ist pers. DD'iD^lD ^JjD ^^'D ^^3 (supply i:Dii< from v. 6) for I work 
 a tvork ifi your days Hab. I, 5; with the 2^ pers. ^^D^ i^pirT) ^'^'^ 
 thoti hast sinned against thy soul Hab. 2, 10; with the 3^ pers. n^ni 
 D^^DUn 7^ itiV ^^^ behold he stood by the camels. Gen. 24, 30. Conf. 
 Gen. 32, 7; 37, 15; 38, 24; 39, 22 (plur.); Jes. 26, 3; 33, 5. 
 
 5) A participle of the same stem as the verb to which 
 it belongs is not unfrequently used to express the in- 
 definite idea: one , somebody, e. g. DD HID^ ""Dl. if anyone 
 die Num. 6, 9; b^T\ ^D]" ^"2 if anyone fall Deut. 22, 8; 
 };titi^n VQ^I whosoever heareth it 2 Sam. 17, 9; "^'"IT ^ 
 ^^IIl) ^^ one shall tread Jes. 16, 10 ; T\^T\ niSlT anyone 
 who seeth it Jes. 28, 4; ^irin li^nni doth anyone plough 
 
64 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 Jes. 28, 24; ^^bB DH^ D.te? ^b) D} urh Dli; i^^ //^^r^ shall 
 not one of them flee away^ there shall not one of them 
 escape Amos 9, i. 
 
 6) As regards its construction also, the twofold cha- 
 racter of the participle should be borne in mind. When 
 used as an adjective it follows the rules of the adjec- 
 tives (conf. 4; gramm. 66, 68, 69.), while with a 
 verbal meaning it follows the construction of the verb , 
 taking the verbal suffixes and not the nominal ; e. g. J^Dn 
 J?^"1 who hath pleasure in wickedness Ps. 5 , 5 ; D^3 D^Tfin 
 who ruled over the people i Kings 9, 23 ; ''rii^ ti^nli shall 
 inherit from me Gen. 15, 3; ""^ti^^ who has created me 
 Job. 31, 15. 
 
 Rem. 4 A combination of both constructions is found in the expres- 
 sion ")f^{i^ ^mii^D "^ho 77iinister unto me Jer. 33, 22. 
 
 Rem. 5 Owing to the st. constr. a somewhat free construction is 
 often employed with the participle; e. g. J^ti^Q "i^ti^ who turn {front) 
 transgression Jes. 59, 20; 'y\2 '^ITI'' who go down (into) the abyss Jes. 
 38, 18; -i^p^ ^??^ "^^^^ ^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^rz^^ Ps. 88, 6. (conf. 5, 4). 
 The same construction is obtained by means of the nominal suffixes ; the 
 expressions i/^p and ']''Dp i foi' instance, have the same meaning as 
 *>7^ D^?!3p ^i^d yh)^ D''Dp "^^^^ stand up against me or against him. 
 
24- ADVERBS. 6$ 
 
 PART III. 
 
 THE PARTICLES. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. ADVERBS AND ADVERBIAL 
 EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 24 Adverbs. 
 
 i) The adverbs not only serve to determine verbs, 
 verbal expressions, and adjectives, but they occur also 
 as the determination of a noun. (Compare ^ %^5^ ^f^ipcc). 
 
 As such they stand: 
 
 (a) as opposition after the noun; e. g. l^D n^lD T]Tpr\ 
 very much understanding i Kings 5,9; tO^P D^^^^il 
 a few men Neh. 2,12. 
 
 {b) connected in st. constr. with the noun ; e. g. 'Dl 
 D|n innocent bloody (blood shed without cause) i 
 King 2 , 3 1 ; D|n "I^, a false witness , {a witness with- 
 out cause) Prov. 24; 28; TOH H^V a continual burnt 
 offering Num. 28, 6; Dinp^p ^n"^^ and pimD ^Th\^, 
 a God at hand, a God afar off Jer. 23, 23. 
 
 Rem. 1 The adverb is in this case entirely considered as a noun , 
 which is also evident from the fact that prepositions are prefixed to it; 
 - g- ]D!31 = pi ^^d ^^^'"s Esther 4, 16; Din"!?i^ ^^ ^^^^^ Ez. 6, lo. 
 
 2) The repetition of an adverb expresses the endu- 
 ring increase or the intensity of the determination; e. g. 
 n^D ni5D lower and lower Deut. 28 , 43 ; tO^^P tDiJ^P by little 
 and little Ex. 23, 30 ; li^D much Ti^p TO^D z^^rj/ w^/^/f 
 Gen. 7, 19. 
 
 5 
 
66 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 3) Several of the particles do not exactly refer to the 
 nearest following word , but to the nearest following sen- 
 tence, sometimes even to the main sentence which fol- 
 lows after the subordinate sentence containing the par- 
 ticle; e. g. with m; n;^l 'ni i^nj?n m then the Eternal, 
 when thou callest , will hear thee Jes. 58, 9; '^^^"Jj?? T^ 
 ni^.{< )ib\ then will I not answer when they call on me 
 Prov. I, 28. 
 
 with 03; D^p-J^l nnt? ^^ri? in? Dp^p^ m the son of 
 Jesse will certainly also give every one of you fields and 
 
 vineyards i Sam. 22, 7 ; "IIIBD 11TP^?t. ""rill^ti^ ! / also 
 
 release thine prisoners out of the pit Zech. 9 , 11. 
 
 with pi ; I^^Ill ^ I^^NI pi him alone they shall not 
 touch Ps. 32, 6; T\^ |r)1 IIIQ pi by insolence one produ- 
 ceth only contention. Prov. 13, 10. 
 
 with interrogative particles See 26, 8. 
 
 The same thing occurs with certain conjunctions; e. g. 
 Deut. 8, 12, where ]P refers to v. 14; (Conf. Rashi on 
 Ex. 23, 5) and with particles of negation, as )lb e. g. 
 Deut. 22, I. 
 
 Rem. 2. Concerning the manner of expressing adverbial ideas by 
 means of verbs, see 21. 
 
 25. Words expressing negation. 
 
 i) The principal adverbs of negation are: 
 
 )ib (as noun in DTO Job 6, 21) not; 
 
 ^ii (as noun Job 24, 25) not so; 
 
 pi^ (opposite of C^.1) it is not; 
 
 Dlt? not yet; 
 
25- WORDS EXPRESSING NEGATION. 6j 
 
 DD^^ no more ^ OPP^ with the prolonged ending ''T is 
 only found in the expression "IIV ''PP^^ ''^^^ / am, and 
 there is none else beside me Jes. 47, 8. 10 ; Zeph. 2, 15). 
 
 Almost exclusively poetic are ^3' ""^B. ^vbll not. 
 
 Rem. 1. ^i^ is also used as a negative conjunction = |Q, ''riT'D?: 
 that not^ lest. (Conf. 28, 5 E r) e.g. i;^ "b'^^'^ b^ ^^^^ ^^^y should 
 have dominion over me Ps. 19, 14. 
 
 2) Regarding the use of these adverbs the following 
 points should be remarked. 
 
 A. as to )ib. 
 
 oc ^ serves principally as an objective and unconditio- 
 nal negation , and hence it is usually connected 
 with nn^ or Tn^ in the indicative. As to the TH^ 
 with ^ to express a prohibition see 15, 4. 
 
 Rem. 2 \lb seldom occurs in a nominal sentence instead of pji^ ; e. g. 
 DD^^^ ni^i< tDDti^ J^^l ^^^ '^^ ^^^ ^/ ^^ ^^ upon them Job. 21, 9. 
 
 /3 ^ connected with ^3, when the latter is not fol- 
 lowed by nVTH 'n or by another determination 
 (hence, used in a general and indefinite sense, 
 3, 10, Rem. 3), means: none, none at all (nullus, 
 ne-p er Sonne , ne-rien)\ e. g. n^i^?. ^ HDi^^p ^3 no work 
 shall be done Ex. 12, 16; Hi^^l ^^ ^57 ^3 to none 
 of his words he will answer Job 33, 13; (or, as 
 is more usual \kb followed by to) pn:|. b^ ^m ^b\ 
 and no green thing was left Ex. 10, 15; n|^^ )ib 
 \\^ ^3 \>^'jil no mischief shall happen to the righteous 
 Pro V. 12, 21; b'2 ^3pp y\W )ib) and turneth not away 
 for any Prov. 30, 30 ; HD^pDI ^i:i b ^^1^^^ '^S ^DV ^ --) 
 
68 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 for no God of any nation or kingdom was able 2 
 Chr. 32, 15. 
 
 If however bl^ is determined, it has, when con- 
 nected with )ib , a different signification; e. g. 1^51 
 ni^*)n \ih but thou shalt not see the whole of it Num. 
 23. 13- 
 
 Rem. 3. In like manner pi^^ with ^3; e. g. 13"lp3 ^i^ 1111 ^D1 and 
 
 there is no breath at all in the midst of it Hab. 2, 19; ti^lpl 73 l''^^ 
 
 T T T ' 
 
 there is nothing new Ecc. i, 9. On the sama principle )^ .... ^^J^ = 
 no one , nobody ; e. g. PIT'D'' i^7 12IDD '^^\^ ^0 one of us shall with- 
 hold Gen. 23, 6. 
 
 y )^ is also used absolutely as a negative answer: 
 nay, no\ e. g. ^^ TO^^''! they said: no Gen. 19, 2; 
 ^im, )ib nay, my lord Gen. 42, 10 ; ^3 Qti^; ^IH ^^ )lb 
 nay; he would only give heed unto me Job 23, 6 
 (conf. 26, 9). 
 
 5 ^ is sometimes connected with a noun or adjec- 
 tive, with which it forms a sort of compound; e.g. 
 b)^''^ a no-god \ "^JT^"' ^ nothing; TpPI ^^ ^/^ ^*;;/- 
 /2<?2/i- Deut. 32, 21; Amos 6, 13; Ps. 43, i. 
 
 Rem. 4. Concerning the place of {^^ in the sentence conf. 40, 1 
 and Rem. i. 
 
 B. As to b^. 
 
 a b'^ denotes a subjective and couditional negation and 
 
 is , by preference , construed with the jussive ; e. g. 
 
 i^DJ h^ may he not come, or, let him not come, 
 
 (conf. 17, lb). 
 (3 bi^ (like i<b see A 7) is sometimes used also in an 
 
25- WORDS EXPRESSING NEGATION. 69 
 
 absolute sense = nay, not so (conf. (jl-^ = fj(,\^ ysvviToci) 
 e. g, ''diS b^ nay, my daughters, Ruth i, 33; ^J'^i^ 
 not so Gen. 19, 18; 33, 10 (Conf. 26, 9). 
 
 Rem. 5. Places such as Joel 2, 13 Dpii;i3 b^) DDDD^ 1V"lp^ ^^^ 
 _yor hearts and not your garments'^ Am. 5, 14 ^^ ^J^") ^"iJ^ Iti^lT 
 j^^^ good^ and not evil ^ should not be considered as belonging to rule 
 |3, for the verbs IJ^IpH and 'Iti^Tiri are to be supplied after ^i^. Si- 
 milarly, 2 Sam. I, 21 ItOQ pi"^') ^t3 ^{^ /f/ there be no dew^ nor rain \ 
 T T : 
 
 Jes. 62, 6 ; Ps. 83 , 2 i;2)1 ^i^ ^^^ M^r^ <5^ i? silence (or r<?j/), do not 
 * t: ~ 
 
 belong to it, because ^^ is elliptical for ^^ ^n"* ^i^ . ^pi "Tl''. ^i^l- 
 
 Rem. 6. Concerning the inten-ogative use of ^i^, see 26, Rem. 9. 
 C. AS to I'^i?. 
 
 oc X^^ (st. constr. of l^i<l) is the negation of ti^.1, and 
 implies the verb to be as to all its tenses; e. g. 
 1133 f^pi*! l^i^ Joseph was not in the pit Gen. 37, 29 ; 
 DD3")i^5 'D l"*^ the Eternal is not amongst you Num. 
 14, 42. Hence the positive formulas with ^.^. are 
 negatively expressed by ]^i^ ; e. g. ""T ^i^^ '^\ I have 
 it in my power Gen. 31, 29 ; liT h^, J^i^ w^ /z^z^^ it 
 not in our power Neh. 5, 5. 
 
 i3 A further consequence of this is : 
 
 1. that a personal pronoun, which is subject of a 
 sentence with p^^, is joined to it as a suffix, as ""^iii^ 
 / am not, I was not I shall net be; I^J^'t^' D^''^^ etc. 
 
 2. that the verb, which is predicate of a sentence 
 with 1^^$ always takes the form of a participle (be- 
 cause in I'lNl the verb to be is already implied); e. g, 
 ini -"-l.^^i^ / will not give Ex. 5, 10 ; ]ni fi?? ptp no 
 
70 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 Straw is given Ex. 5, 16; D.^TO ^i^i^ if thou wilt 
 not let my people go Ex. 8, 17; D''TOi<lD Dpi''^5t j^^ ^2^ 
 ;^(?/ believe Deut. i, 32. 
 
 Rem. 7. Once , Jer. 38, 5 , pj^ is found constructed with a verbum 
 finitum: "^^yi^ DDHNt ^Dl*' ^J^^l T^ ""^ f^ ^^^ ^^^S <^<^nnot do any 
 thing against you. 
 
 y Just as W, signifies : to exist , to be present , to be at 
 handy so ]''i^ expresses the contrary; e. g. 1^^''>^1 and 
 he was 710 more Gen. ; , 24 : 13j''^ "in^^HI and one is 
 not Gen. 42, 13; Uy^^) and they are not Jer. 10, 20. 
 
 Rem. 8. p^ is sometimes separated from the word to which it be- 
 longs by another word; e. g. from its participle HilDi irT'DS ]^i^ there 
 is no sincerity in his mouth Ps. 5, lo; or from its noun (especially by 
 the smaller words such as \) , Q)) or by a determination of place), 
 
 "1^1 Th pi^, ^^^<^ '^^^ ^0 child Gen. 11, 30; I'^Q^D 1^ \'^ t^^(^i '^^^^^ ^0 
 fins Lev. 11, 10. 12; dflD 13 Ti^ there is no soundness in it ]es. i, 6; 
 ini^ D3 l""!;^ ^^^^^ ^^ not one Ps. 14, 3; ?|"|3T HIDS ^i^ ^' death there 
 is no remembrance of thee Ps. 6, 65 T^tT) ini"llp P^l ^^^ ^'^ whose 
 spirit there is no guile Ps. 32; 2. The same sometimes occurs with h'^'-, 
 ^' g- ^^n^Din ^D^3 7i^ rebuke me not in thine anger Ps. 6, 2. 
 
 It should be noticed also that the usual order of p^^ and its noun 
 or participle is sometimes reversed; e. g. H/ I'^i^ D^?D lli^i^ ^^^^ ^^^ 
 no water Jes. i, 30; "jj^i^ ]'^i^ "irlDI ^^^ there is none to interpret it 
 Gen. 40, 8. 
 
 Rem. 9. In Neh. 4, 17 we find nj^; connected first with I2l{|j^, then 
 
 with other subjects, and finally all these comprised in *)inii^ Ti^* 
 
 Rem. 10. In Job 35, 15 *i2^ "]nQ pi^ ">3 but now his anger is with- 
 held |ii^ stands before IDV *^ emphasise the negation. In like manner 
 
^25. WORDS EXPRESSING NEGATION. 71 
 
 pj^ emphasises the negation in "^rb)] rt^ Jes- 45, 21 and ^nblll ]"'i$ 
 Hos. 13, 4 there is none beside me. 
 
 5 Further J*"*^ is now and then connected with a noun 
 for the purpose of expressing a negative adjective; 
 e. g. D^'i^ pi^ powerless Jes. 40, 29; U^^yi. P^ blind 
 
 * Jes. 59, 10; "ISPP p^$ innumerable Joel i, 6; ^^^. pi^ 
 powerless Ps. 88, 5 ; "IpH J^'ii! unsearchable Prov. 25, 3. 
 
 Rem. 11. 1^^ (an abbreviation of pj^ i Sam. 21, 9 = pi^, p^) is 
 sometimes connected in a similar manner ^pi ^i^ not innocent ]db 22., 2>^. 
 
 D. D"nt? ;z^/ yet, (like the adverb T^) is generally con- 
 strued with the TH^ even when the verb expresses 
 an actio perfecta. It is rarely construed with the "ID^ ; 
 e. g. J^T D'HD >^^ ^2V/ ;^^/ yet know I Sam. 3 , 7. 
 
 E. The poetic negation ^3 /z^/, is almost exclusively 
 connected with a verbum finitum. The exceptions 
 where it is found with the infinitive are very rare; 
 e. g. ^^, ^np ^1 ^/^^jj^ ^^w^ not 7iear unto thee. Ps. 
 32, 9- 
 
 F. The equally poetic ^^5 is (like i^^ see A I) and ]^^? 
 C 5) sometimes connected with a noun to express 
 the negation of the latter's idea ; e. g. pPl ""^^ be- 
 yond measure Jes 5, 14. 
 
 3) The other particles of negation are mostly all ex- 
 clusively used as conjunctions. 
 
 Concerning them the following particulars should be 
 remarked. 
 
 (a) ^vb:h (st. constr. of n^5 to disappear, to cease to 
 exists from the stem D^B, with the termination '>" 
 
72 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 see gramm. 60 D., and the letter preposition b) 
 is usually construed with the infinitive, to express 
 the negation of an action ; e. g. I^Dp ^p^^ ""n^?^ not 
 to eat of it Gen. 3 , 1 1 ; rarely with a verbum 
 finitum in the sense of: that not j lest; e. g. ^ri^5t> 
 nti^ that none doth return fram his wickedness Jer. 
 23, 14; or without [quin] 'W\^vbiy\ who follow their 
 own spirit without seeing Ez. 13, 3. 
 {b) )S (litt. removing, taking away stem njD) lest, that 
 not, stands at the beginning of a sentence, which 
 expresses fear or anxiety, especially after the verbs: 
 to fear, to beware , [vereor ne); e. g. y^'^7) JQ ^^ "ipti^il 
 beware that thou bring not Gen. 24, 6; "'P^^'l^ ""3 
 ^DH JD ""H^ID^ "? because I was afraid, because I said: 
 "-Lest thou shouldest take'' Gen. 31. 31 l^ni Iti^DIl 
 DD^V i^S t^.1 ID search and look that there be not here 
 with you 2 Kings 10, 23. 
 
 Rem. 12. The verb expressing fear or anxiety is sometimes omitted,, 
 and is to be supplied from the context; e. g. "^ Vh'^^ |D T\X^\ (^^^ 
 now (I fear) lest he put forth his hand Gen. 3, 22. 
 
 Rem. 13. In Num. 20, 18. |p is separated from its verb by the noun 
 mriB which the writer wished to emphasise: lest I come out with the 
 sword against thee (Conf. Rem. 8). 
 
 4) Two negations in the same sentence do not des- 
 troy one another, but on the contrary strengthen the 
 negation (conf. o\jy. ouleic, ouk oulocf^oog) ; e. g. pi^ *'^3pr} 
 ''"IDj? ^^^ there no graves in Egypt Ex. 14, 11 conf. 2 
 Kings 1 , 16; Dtifn^ ^ HP? r^ silver was not accounted 
 
26. INTERROGATIVE WORDS. 73 
 
 of I Kings lo, 21; (in the parallel place 2 Chr. 9, 20 
 )ih is omitted); D^l"" |"'NlID without a single inhabitant 
 Jes. 5,9; ^^^^ ^ D"1^5 before the day of the Lord's an- 
 ger come upon you Zeph. 2,2; ^^pl" ^ It^^jt. ''^30 /^^^ 
 man cannot find out Eccl. 3 , 11 ; ''^tDi^pH 15 ^pi^3 h^ 
 lest in thy anger thou bring me to nothing Jer. 10, 24. 
 
 5) When one negative sentence follows another, of- 
 ten the first sentence alone, especially in poetic paral- 
 lelism , takes the negation ; e. g. pH^ i^.^.^. I^in b^ 
 
 talk no more so exceeding proudly, let no arrogancy come 
 out of your mouth i Sam. 2, 3 ""nDDI") U^^TO, ^vb^\ ^ 
 nPIHD / have not nourished young men , nor brought up 
 virgins Jes. 23, 4; TD "h^ nnniDOl H^DIDJI DH; r\lJ)T- ^ 
 gold an crystal cannot equal it, neither shall the ex- 
 change thereof be jewels of fine gold. Job 28, 17, (conf. 
 27, 7-) 
 
 Rem. 14. Concerning the preposition ^ as negation See 27, 6 Qy. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES. 
 
 26. Interrogative words and sentences. 
 
 i) An interrogative sentence, is generally introduced 
 by a conjunction or letter of interrogation. 
 
 To the interrogative conjunctions (besides Di;^ which 
 will be spoken of later on) belong also the interrogative 
 pronouns, and the words derived from them; e. g. n^3 
 riD^ iyilO (these call for no particular comment), ""Ni which 
 
74 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 transforms a pronoun or adverb into a question (as to 
 which the lexicon should be consulted), and finally a 
 few particles, such as n^i<!> t^)D^> DD^i^. 
 
 Rem. 1. The formula Q^ ^"Ti"i *i^ Esther 4, 14 has an affirmative signi- 
 fication who knoweth whether not (= I believe that , nescio anj.^ 
 
 Rem. 2. In Jon. i, 7. 8 -^ and "y^^ have owing to the subsequent 
 *^u) ^^ signification of: for whose caused. 
 
 2) Direct simple questions are generally introduced by 
 prefixing H to the first word of the sentence; while di- 
 rect disjunctive questions have H in the first member and 
 Di< in the second ; e.g. ^^n^ Di^t "^.^.^Q shall we go to 
 battle J or shall we forbear -, i Kings 22, 15. 
 
 3) The n interrogative is mostly used in questions, 
 of which the answer is uncertain ; e. g. ^3^ npti^n hast 
 thou considered? Job 2,3; occasionally also in questions 
 to which a negative answer is expected; e. g. "iQOT 
 ''di^ ""D^ ^^ I fi^y brother's keeper? Gen. 4, 9; D^n^n 
 ^^// ^^ live? Job. 14, 14. Sometimes H is used for the 
 simply purpose of emphasising the negation ; e. g. T\T\'^i\ 
 n.ipn shalt thou build me a house? 2 Sam. 7, 5. (the pa- 
 rallel place, I Chr. 17, 4, reads n.;?n nn^$ ^). On the 
 contrary H connected with i<^ (^^^H) serves to express 
 and to strengthen the affirmation, with the consequence 
 that )ibT\ (nonne) is almost equal to T\T\ ; e. g. "IH ^^H 
 inripp doth not {= behold) David hide himself? Ps. 54, 2; 
 D^'Din? DH i^^n ^r^ /A^jj/ ;2<?/ written ? 2 Kings 15, 2 1 ; 
 20, 20; Esther 10, 2 = ''Din? W^ conf. 2 Chr. 27, 7; 
 32, 32. But even the simple H without )lb sometimes 
 
26. INTERROGATIVE WORDS. 75 
 
 differs but little from i^Li; e. g. V^b^^ H'^^^D. ^^^ / twt 
 reveal myself? i Sam. 2, 27; DIJ^^TH ^<? ye not know? 
 I Kings 22, 3 ; riJ^T Hi^Tn knowest thou not this. Job 20, 4. 
 (See Kimchi on i Sam. 2, 27). 
 
 Rem. 3. The few instances, where a simple question is introduced 
 by J'^, are based upon the omission of the preceding member of a 
 
 disjunctive question; e. g. nTH "iDin H^m Tj^Dn "i;]!!^ Di^D Di^ ^'-^ 
 //^zV Mm^ done by my lord the king? i Kings 1,27; 1ii"jin "l^HD Di^ 
 ^^pi j/ita// M^ potter be counted as clay? Jes. 29, 16; D^iD^^ HD Di^ 
 '^riS ^-^ ''^J^' strength the strength of stones? Job 6, 12. (Conf. Lat. 
 and 28, 5 A^.) 
 
 Rem. 4. Instead of QJ^ .]! in a disjunctive question , we also 
 
 find Di^i n; e. g. DD^nn^ "id^s dj^i n^^r nn^nn /^^^ ^^^> 
 
 been in your days or in the days of your fathers ? Joel i , 2 j . - . . llDi J^H 
 
 Qi^*1 is my complaint of man^ or why should I not be impatient? Job 
 
 21, 45 sometimes with p) being repeated after Di^lj ^' g 15 c*^ 
 
 nDD TTW Di^*l -y^^^^ ^ child be born unto him that is a hundred years 
 : T T : 
 
 old? or shall Sara^ who is ninety years old ^ hear? Gen. 17, 17; or 
 with special emphasis on the first member of the question; e. g. ri^H 
 
 r)*i^iJ Di^l i^iti^ shall even one that hateth right govern ? or wilt 
 thou condemn the just and mighty? Job 34, 17; Conf. 40, 8, 9. 
 
 After a negative sentence QJi^*] sometimes stands as if in the second 
 
 member of a disjunctive question; e. g. "T^lp ITi Qj^ll jdn D?^? ^57 "^3 
 *111*1 f^ riches are not for ever^ or doth the crown endure for all ge- 
 nerations? Prov. 27, 24. 
 
 Rem. 5. In the second member 1{^ or^ is occasionally found instead 
 of Di^5 e g. n;iirn ^S "^TlQl n$ 1i^ nn nni^ \^r\^ shallvain words 
 have an end? or what provoketh thee that thou answer est} Job 16, 3; 
 Conf. Eccl. 2, 19. 
 
76 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 4) Questions with D^ H need not always express 
 an opposition , for they frequently merely repeat the same 
 question with different words; e. g. {;} )^'^b^ "^^pn ^ten 
 1^3 b'^Dri bm shalt thou indeed reign over us? or shalt 
 thou indeed have dominion over us? Gen. 37, 8. This 
 especially occurs in poetic parallelisms; e. g. "I^^Dn^n 
 !3i{nn bl^^l Wi^ inin shall the axe boast itself against 
 him that heweth therewith? or shall the saw magnify 
 itself against him that shaketh it? Jes. 10, 15; Conf, 
 Jer. 5, 29; Job 4, 17; 6, 5. 6; 8, 3; 10, 4. 5; ii, 2. 
 7; 22, 3. 
 
 Rem. 6. In questions of this kind the second member is now and 
 then introduced by *| instead of by Q^ or Q^"); e. g. II^IH ^^/il 
 rT'p'l 1"l5in 1^1 n^")J^ ^^'^'^ y^ speak unrighteously for the Lord^ or talk 
 
 deceitfully for him? Job 13, 7; n^^lH HlV:!:! ^^D^l I^ID DIJ^ llt^^^lH 
 
 T : T T : : : "t t t ' : 
 
 art thou the first man that was born^ or wast thou brought forth be- 
 fore the hills? Job 15, 7. Sometimes *) is even omitted 5 e. g. Di^^Tl 
 
 "D 'h'2 in^^ ^^"^^ HiiB ^'2 i^ttH <^^^ l^^ ^^^h grow up without mire^ 
 T : T V : T : : V 
 
 or can the flag grow without water ? Job. 8 , 1 1 ; lti^^Dp"^J! V"inn 
 D^pn^7 IDV Vp^in Dy dost thou know the balancings of the 
 clouds ^ .... or dost thou with him spread out the sky ? Job 37, I6. 18*^ 
 Rem. 7. The second member is rarely introduced by H ^'^^ then it 
 really continues the question of the preceding member; e. g. "t^l^ip^n 
 
 h'S^ "i^.T] T\^^ ^'^'^P. ^X^ "^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^f ^^^^^^ deliver me up 
 into his hand ^ and will Sanl come down? i Sam. 23, II. Yet even in 
 tbe case of an opposition p] is found in the second member ; e. g. li^ll?!! 
 i^tTl 1^7 Dni^np have ye called us to take our possessions ^ or tiot? 
 Judges 14, 15. 
 
 Rem. 8. Once, Job 6, 12, vi& find Qi^ both in the first and in the 
 
26. INTERROGATIVE WORDS. J'J 
 
 second member, while the third member (v. 13) is introduced by QJi^n' 
 
 ''ilDD ^^ ^^y strength the strength of stones , or my flesh of brass , or 
 is it ftot that there is no help for me ^ and that sound counsel is dri- 
 ven away from me? 
 
 5) A question may further be expressed by the tone of 
 speech (gathered from the context) without either word 
 or letter of interrogation ; e. g. li''^^ "^te^ b^^'0 shall Saul 
 reign over us? i Sam. 11, 12; ^'^tl D1^^ is it well with 
 the boy? 2 Sam. 18, 29; and especially before gutturals 
 n is omitted; e. g. T\\ T\T\% Gen. 27, 24 (although v. 21 
 we read PIT nn^n) ; ^thxyr\ Dl*"!] have I to-day begun ? i 
 Sam. 22, 15; rnV ^in shall this teach? Hab. 2, 19; ^"tV 
 piTQD dost thou still hold fast? Job 2,9. 
 
 This manner of asking a question more frequently 
 occurs, when such question is connected with a pre- 
 ceding sentence by "); e. g. I^^TH fin^^l and shouldest 
 thou possess them? Judges 11, 23; h'^^ nn^^l and shalt 
 thou be delivered? Jes. 37, 1 1 ; D^^^^ )ib ""i^^I and should 
 not I have pity? Jonas 4, 1 1 ; or by D^; e. g. T!^5 03 
 ^B\ should it also be marvellous in my eyes? Zech. 8,6. 
 
 Negative sentences are now and then pronounced in 
 an interrogative manner. They are then introduced by 
 )h or )^\, and cause an affirmative answer to be ex- 
 pected ; e. g. mT\ ^ 11''^:^ -iDp otit of the mouth of the 
 most High cometh there not evil and good? Lam 3, 38; 
 li^pp^ ^\ and will they not stone us? Ex. 8, 22. 
 
 Rem. 9 Once, however, we find such a negative question introduced 
 
78 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 by bt^'-) Dl'^n DritOti^D bt^ ^^^ y^ not make a raid today? i Sam. 27, lo 
 (conf. however LXX which suggests the reading 1D"S{<) Translator. 
 
 6) Indirect simple questions (after verbs of inquiring,, 
 doubting, observing) are introduced as well by H; e. g. 
 D^Dn l^pn. ^1^^"^7 to see if the waters were abated Gen. 8, 
 8; as by U)!<\ e. g. T\XVB U^ Hi^"}^ let us see whether the 
 vine has budded Cant. 7, 1 3 ; H'^ni^ Di^ 1ti^"ll inquire 
 whether I shall recover 2 Kings i , 2. 
 
 Indirect disjunctive questions are introduced by H 
 U^ ''", e. g. i^^ Di^ ISni 'n n^'^^nn n^l^ Z^? know whether 
 the Lord has made his journey prosperous or not Gen. 
 24 , 21; ^^^'D^t ""nnin^ ":|5?.^n 'l-l^^i!^. ^/^<^^ / may prove them 
 whether they will walk in my law or not Ex. 16, 4 , 
 sometimes by H !]; e. g. HDnn ^T\ pTm Dri^i^-jl 
 ^;/</ ^^^ whether they be strong or weak Num. 13, 18. 
 
 7) To intensify the question the words DT and T\\k^ 
 (conf. II, 3^) and ^^1D^5t (not to be confounded with 
 n'D'^N! where?) then, now are added; e. g. ^^ID^^ '^j^ HD 
 what aileth thee now? Jes. 22, i ; J^lDi^ T\^^ where is then 
 my hope? Job 17, 15. 
 
 Rem. 10 {^iDi^ is sometimes placed after the real question is 
 finished; e. g. i^*iF]i^ i^TT^ n?!D!I11 fof' wherein now shall it be known 
 Ex. 33, 16; sometimes also after a word on which the emphasis falls, 
 and consequently before the real question; e. g. "]^^ ^JiH fc^lD i^lDi;<{ ""D 
 who then is he that hath taken venison Gen. 27, 33. 
 
 8) The particles of interrogation like the other parti- 
 cles (conf. 24, 3) sometimes refer not to that part of 
 the sentence in which they stand, but to that which 
 
25- INTERROGATIVE WORDS. 79 
 
 follows ; e.g. ti^'^i;^ l''^it1 ""n^B }^1^ wherefore was there no 
 one when I came? Jes. 50, 2; H^^n ^^ "IDI riDin if one 
 assay to commune with thee, wilt thou be grieved? Job 4, 2. 
 
 9) An affirmative answer is expressed by repetition 
 of the main word in the question (changing of course 
 the 2^ person into the i^^ if necessary); e. g. ^)^, "'P^nrj 
 wilt thou go .... and she said, I will go Gen. 24, 58; 
 "^ij T\V\^ is it thou .... aud he said: it is I. Gen. 27, 
 24 ; Judg. 13, II; li^T DJI1)^T.l! know ye .... and 
 they said: we do know Gen. 29, 5; th^ d^^H is it 
 well with him .... and they said: it is well; ibid, v, 6; 
 ^y:i T\T\3 ^;!3 niniin is it thy sons coat .... and he 
 said: it is my son's coat. Gen. 37, 33' "111 "'D.^Q wilt 
 Saul come down .... and the Lord said: he will come 
 down I Sam. 23, 11. 
 
 A negative answer is expressed by repetition of the 
 main word with ^b-, e. g. ""p-TDI ^mr\_ ^^'m ^^V&^ ^P"^^ 
 
 '^^^-y^ nnpi^. ^b) i^niiii ^b) '\:irpyiiMb np^^'^i- "i^d inripjj 
 
 n^l^P whom have I defrauded? whom, have I oppressed? 
 of whose hand have I taken a bribe ? .... and they said: 
 thou hast not defrauded us, nor oppressed us, neither 
 hast thou taken aught of any mans hand i Sam. 12, 
 4. 5 ; n^n ^b II?^''! Tq^r\ shall I smite them ? and he 
 said thou shalt not smite them 2 Kings 6, 21. 22; or 
 by \ib (or b)^) alone. (Gonf. 25, 2 A y, B /3). 
 
80 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTER Vni. THE REMAINING PARTICLES. 
 
 27. The Prepositions. 
 
 i) Most of the simple prepositions had originally only 
 a local meaning, but subsequently came also to be 
 used to express ideas of time , causality ^ etc. 
 
 The prepositions express either rest in a place, or 
 motion to or from a place. 
 
 2) The principal prepositions of place are: 
 
 (a) of rest'. 3 at , in, on; b)l upon, over; XT\V\ under ^ 
 in the place of; "in^> ''IQ^^ behind, after; ""^D^ before; 
 bT^ . Ij^) . n^i over against , before ; ?^i^ at the side of, 
 by; V\\K near, by, with; 1^5 (lit. in distance from) 
 behind, round about (xfiCpi); ]^'I1 between, 15V. cit the 
 side of. 
 
 (b) of motion: ]p fro7n; b^^ and b to, towards; 1)1 to, 
 unto , as far as , towards. 
 
 3) Many of the above mentioned prepositions express 
 also ideas of time; e. g. 5 within, in; bt^^ p l)i etc. 
 
 4) The other relations are expressed by 3 as (''111 as 
 often as ; ^DS according to) ; UV, with , together with ; HTIT > 
 ""li^.^? without, besides; ]T-> ]W^ because of; ^^n OJ^.);. (^'/^ 
 reward of , in consequence of) for. 
 
 5) The Hebrew language is, owing to the compoun- 
 ding of prepositions exceedingly well fitted to express 
 various grammatical relations with the greatest accuracy. 
 Thus the prepositions of motion are often prefixed to 
 other prepositions of place in order to denote the local 
 state which existed before the action, or that which 
 
27- PREPOSITIONS. 8 1 
 
 will exist after the action is completed, (conf. de chez , 
 (Taupres). When Moses, for instance, says to Aaron, 
 Num. 17, II Take thy censer and put fire therein 
 nSTDil ^^Q from off the altar'' he expresses most accu- 
 rately that the fire is to be found on the altar. 
 Thus we find the following compounds: 
 
 (a) with p (p or ?p) ; *in{<D usually ^"in^'P from behind; 
 pS'? or ^'i^''5P from between \ l^J^ from upon, from 
 above ; D^D or D^^D from , from with , from at ; finnp 
 from under. 
 
 (b) with b^ - nii''5 .... b^ between , into between ; b^ 
 b n^5P (and b n^5P^ Num. i^,y) forth within (lit. /^ 
 the place which is within) 2 Kings 11,15; IP ^^ 
 (lit. to out from) even out from Job 5, 5; ^ }*inp b^ 
 
 forth without (lit. to the place which is without) 
 Num. 5, 3; nnn b^ beneath , underneath (lit. to the 
 place underneath). 
 
 Rem. 1 I Kings 8, 6 is instructive as to this use of prepositions. 
 
 (c) with b (more rarely with ]P) following; owing to 
 which adverbs composed of prepositions return again 
 into prepositions; e. g. ^)^p above (adv.) b byij^, over 
 (prep.) ; nnnp below (adv.) b nnnp under (prep.); {^inp 
 without , outside (adv.) b }^inp outside (prep.); "13^ 
 separately, )p ID^ besides. 
 
 Rem. 2 IP also stands before adverbs; e. g. ID^D (= p ID^) 
 besides; *i"lV^3p (= JP ""IV.^?) ^^^id^s ^ without^ except. 
 
 Rem. 3 It seldom occurs that the preposition is omitted; e. g. 
 D^P nnnp Job. 26, 5 (= Q^^^ nnnp) below the waters. 
 
82 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 6) The following remarks may serve as a compendium 
 of the main significations of the more frequently recur- 
 ring prepositions, as also of their construction with 
 verbs, and of their principal idioms. 
 A. 5 denotes : 
 
 a. originally to be in a place n?33; then reference to 
 time Ts^'^^^, to a state or condition d!?^3, or 
 to a multitude (= amongst) D^il-IB; D''"lj^^3 among the 
 herdmen Amos i, i DH^.^D^p? amongst their noble 
 ones. Ps. 78, 31. 
 
 It further serves to enumerate the component 
 parts of a genus or collective idea; e. g. 1OT ^D 
 l^nf n ^p^l r\Xa\ npn?D1 n^V? and all flesh died both 
 fowl, aud cattle J and beast , and every creeping thing. 
 Gen. 7, 21 conf. 8, 17; 9, 10. 
 
 With reference to enclosing boundaries it means 
 within \ e. g. D''n^t^3 within the gates; ^^y^^ in the 
 eyes of, within the reach of the eyes; ^p.TiJ? iji the 
 ears of, within hearing. 
 
 Connected with things of high stature it is = on , 
 as D^piDS on the horses. 
 (3 It should be noticed also that the Hebrews say 
 to drink iji or at a cup (because the lips of one 
 drinking are placed at the brim of the cup) ; e. g. 
 13 ''il^^. nriti^l l^^^. out of which (lit. in which) my 
 lord drinketh Gen. 44, 5 ; ]:: ''pHIP? D^dt^n that drink 
 out of bozvls of wine Amos 6, 6. (In like manner 
 in Aramaic Dan. 5, 2. conf. sv TroT'/iplcf} Trivsiv; in 
 ossibus bibere; boire dans une tasse). 
 
2/. PREPOSITIONS. 83 
 
 7 in the manner = after the manner ; e. g. ")D"15 accor- 
 ding to the command ; T\^% according to the coun- 
 sel of\ 1iD^^5 after our image Gen. i, 26; iniD"l5 
 after his likeness Gen. 5, 3; pn^^5 ^//^r /^^^^ Gen. 
 21, 12; ?]pp5 /2y^^ silver Jes. 48, 10 ; Jti^^^S like smoke 
 Ps. 37, 20; 102, 4; D^^S /^/^^ ^/^ image [shadow) 
 Ps. 39, 7. 
 
 With this is closely connected : 
 5 ^^, /?2 //^^ quality of (lat. tamquam ^ french ^72) the 
 so called 5 essentiae; e. g. "'1^ ^^i!5 <3;i' God Almighty 
 Ex. 6, 3; pTn? (^J.? ^ strong one Jes. 40, 10 ; D""?!? 
 ^i" a mulitude Vs. 55, 19; 1D^ H^B y<2^ ^^ -^^j- /^^//^^ 
 Ps. 68, 5; Conf. Jes. 26, 4; ^!?PD3 the Lord shall 
 be thy confidence Prov. 3, 26; iriNtD ^ini ^2/2f //"^ ^.y 
 one '= He remains the same Job 23, 13; l*"^!!^? like 
 his priests Ps. 99, 6. 
 
 i through , with (3 instrumentalis) ; e. g. tOD^S with a 
 rod Micha 4, 14. Also with persons as auctores; e.g. 
 ^5 by J through thee Ps. 18, 30 (conf. Ps. 44, 6 where 
 ^??:^5 is parallel to it) ; non^pni 'T\Jjy\ n^j^B by sword 
 by bow, or by battle Hos. i, 7; and with 13^ in the 
 sense of to make one work DH^ TQ\ "1^^5 wherein 
 they made them to work Ex. I, 14; in passive 
 "^3 "13^ "lti^^^ wherein thou wast made to work Jes 14, 
 3 (Conf. 34, 2). 
 
 Hence it is also used in the sense of propter, 
 e. g. nTOQS because of five G^n. 18, 28; and as 3 
 pretii, because the price is considered as a means 
 
84 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 of transaction; e. g. ^D3 I'^V HTOn^ for fifteen sil- 
 ver pieces Hos. 3, 2. 
 X, to be on a spot\ e. g, IDS "in^5 on the river Ke- 
 bar Ez. 10, 15; more frequently near, unto a 
 spot (whereas h'^ means towards, without deciding 
 whether the end is reached, and "I^ unto denotes 
 the end to be reached) ; e. g. D.^'OTD 1^i^"l whose top 
 [may reach) unto heaven Gen. 11,4. It signifies 
 therefore a sort of being joined to, to touch at. 
 Hence with transitive verbs it is frequently used 
 to introduce their object (Lat. ad and in)\ e. g. 
 3 h)^ to ask at, to consult', 3 VTW^ to take hold of-, 
 
 :~T ' ':~T -J ^ 
 
 5 ^y^ to touch ; 5 i^^i^ to call upon ; 3 ^^^ to swear 
 by ; 5 XW\ to look upon ; 3 i^Qtif to listen to. When 
 . used with the two last verbs and others of the 
 same kind, 3 frequently implies the idea of sha- 
 ring in joy, sorrow or pain; e. g. "l^^H DIDB HiSl")^ b^ 
 I will not behold the death of the child Gen. 21, 16. 
 
 The same fundamental idea of being joined to 
 shows itself in the construction of the verba cordis 
 with 5; e. g. 5 n^3 to trust ift; 5 VQW!) to believe 
 in-, 12 riDti^ to rejoice in. 
 
 To this signification belongs also the partitive 
 use of 5 , as in 5 ^^J to take part in bearing a thing 
 (mit daran tragen}\ e. g. D^n i<ti^^5 ^^ li^ti^JI and 
 they shall bear the burden of the people with thee 
 Num. II, 17; Ex. 18, 20. Job. 7, 13. ? h'^^ to take 
 part in eating anything (mit essen); e. g. 13 ^D^"* ^<7 
 ?2t? alien shall eat thereof ^yi. 12, 43; Lev. 22, ii; 
 
2/. PREPOSITIONS. 85 
 
 Judges 13, 16; Job 21, 25. 5 pbn to impart (antheil 
 geben an); e. g. ny^S H^ p^PI ^\neither has he im- 
 parted to her understanding Job. 39, 17; D DiS to 
 assist in building anything (an etwas m,itbauen)\ e. g. 
 Dpins niip^ ^Dli ^^^ w^ are not able to build the wall 
 Neh. 4,4. 
 
 Rem. 4 concerning ;2 objecti and its signification see 35 , 6. 
 
 J? with, implying an accompaniment , which idea is 
 affiHated to that of vicinity ; e. g. Iti^DJ? <^?^/ 7?^jA with 
 the life thereof Gen. 9, 4; !:'115^ ti^?"l.5 ze/^V^ ^r^^/ 
 possessions Gen. 15, 14; ''^pQ? 'tJoith my staff Gen. 
 32, II. In connection with this it should be 
 noticed that verbs of coming and going with 5 
 express the idea of coming with something , hence 
 of bringing; e. g. uyyy\ urb^ IDIp ^ because they 
 met you not with bread and with water = because 
 
 they brought not Deut. 23, 5 ; ''T^ ""TO IpPM 
 
 and Samson brought his wife a kid Judges 15, i. 
 
 B. b)i signifies: 
 
 upon, over; frequently implying an idea of motion, 
 upwards, towards, (German hinauf, hinuber). In 
 the sense of down upoii (Germ, herab auf) it is 
 governed by the verbs to press , to be heavy, to be 
 burdensome (lit. to lay heavily upon); e. g. PlltO^ ""^^J. 'T'n 
 they are burdensome to me Jes. i, 14; i^TO^ "h^_^ ^^k^^ 
 so that I am a burden to myself Job 7, 20; 'l^ 
 "nn^^ bt ni55 mine hand (LXX IT his hand) layeth 
 heavily upon m,ine groaning Job 23, 2. Hence it is 
 
86 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 used with the verbs to appoint , to command ^)^ 1I2.D ' 
 because the command or duty is laid upon (conf. 2 
 Sam. 1 8 , II ^\ it would have been incumbent on 
 me to give), and with the verbs to pity, to have com- 
 passion b^ on , b^ ^Dn also in the sense to spare. 
 
 /3 in addition to, besides-, a sense closely allied to the 
 preceding (the addition being considered as laying 
 upon); e. g. V^^ 7^ besides the wives whom he had 
 Gen. 28, 9; ""nii? ^^ besides my daughters Gen. 31, 
 50 ; D'l^J 7^ Di<l mother with children Gen. 32, 12 ; 
 Deut. 22, 6; Hos. 10, 14. 
 
 according to, in consequence of (the consequence 
 being considered an addition to the utterance or 
 action) Dfll^Dli b'^_ according to their hosts Ex. 12, 5 1 ; 
 ^^^"Tti^.'' ""iS niDti^ b'^ according to the names of the chil- 
 dren of Israel Ex. 28 , 1 1 ; 'H ^D ^^ according to 
 (on) the command of the Lord. 
 
 because of, concerning "l^lu ^^ ^T^!^ ^T. ^i:5 be not 
 anxious concerning the boy Gen. 21, 1 2 ; Di?5"T."lr ^"^^^H ^i^ 
 because of the sins of Jeroboa^n i King 15, 30. (as 
 to the signification although , see 28 , 5 , G /3.) 
 
 y over, used frequendly with the verbs to cover, to 
 protect h'^_ np3 . b>^_ ]3 (lit. to make a covering or pro- 
 tection upon or over anything), to propitiate ^i "1D3 
 (which also really means to cover conf. DlDS cover 
 and JIV y^ riDD forgive not (lit. cover not) their ini- 
 quity Neh. 3, 37); and with other afHliated verbs, 
 as h'^_ UVh^ Judges 9, 17 to fight for anyone (in or- 
 der to protect him). 
 
2/. PREPOSITIONS. 87 
 
 ^ at, (by) before , at the side of, chiefly when the po- 
 sition of a person or object implies an elevation 
 above other persons or objects, such as the posi- 
 tion of a person standing being higher than that 
 of one sitting; e. g. 'H ^^ 3?^^nn^ to present them- 
 selves (lit. to take a stand) before the Lord Job i , 
 6; l^^^n t'^ 1J^ standing by the river Gen. 41, i; 
 D?D ^^?S ^^ Tinti^ planted by streams of water Ps. i , 
 3. Later also with the signification of b)^ at, to; 
 e. g. 'n ^V_ ^^DTini and she prayed to the Lord i Sam. 
 I, 10 ; and even with the meaning oi towards; e.g. 
 d:?^^l! ^V_ towards heaven Ex. 9, 22; T ^^. ""T ^^ 
 / />^^ side ^/ Job I, 14. 
 
 f ^/?z/;/ 2^/<?;/, forth upon when considered as implying 
 a motion; and against, chiefly in a hostile sense. 
 
 C. p signifies: 
 
 <x a motion, removal away from. The principal signi- 
 fication is that of separation from a whole (because 
 IP probably is the st. constr. of a nomen signifying 
 part of). Thus it means some , something of (more 
 rarely somebody of), and is placed before the whole 
 from which a part is separated ; e. g. HDnsn p Lev. 
 I, 2 n^n^np of the cattle i Kings 18, 5; ^ij^ntf^? ntfi^D 
 of the princes of Israel 2 Chr. 21, 4; "ISH Dip of 
 the blood of the bullock Ex. 29, 12; VD'p during a 
 part of his days = ever in his life i Kings 1,6; 
 "iD^p as long as I live Job 27, 6 ; ^""PJ? ever in thy life 
 Job 38, 12; and is used with singularia not having 
 the force of collectiva; e. g. ^pp out of thee Micha 
 
88 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 5, I; *1^3D out of a shoot, Dan. ii, 7. Hence, //^r^ 
 of origin, descent; as, '^J>^'0 from Thecoa Am. i, i; 
 and from ajnongst [e numero)\ e. g. I^Dp Gen. 3, 22; 
 D'lD^l^n ^3?p /r^;';^ among all nations Ex. 1 9, 5 ; ''^|P 
 among women Judges 5, 24; and thus with verbs 
 of choosing; e. g. DD^ ^30 irii^ IIIDI <^?^<^ choose him 
 out of all the tribes i Sam. 2, 28. 
 N.B. From this subordination of the idea which is 
 connected with p may be fitly explained the use of ]P 
 to express the comparative and superlative. (Conf. 8.) 
 jS the same signification, more absolutely considered, 
 becomes, removed from, empty of, withont ; e. g. 
 n^lP.P without bow Jes. 22, 3; DIDp without defect 
 Job II, 15; "^Iti'^pi empty, destitute of my flesh I shall 
 behold God Job 19, 26; insp without fear Job 21, 9. 
 y as the opposite of ?^ and "li^, it is found not only 
 with such verbs as , to go away , to flee from , but 
 also with the kindred verbs to fear, to hide , to be- 
 ware (conf. custodire ab , caver e ab , zxKutttcc xtto) ; 
 e. g. "15"? '"^^ ^.r^.T! is anything too wonderful for 
 the Lord Gen. 18, 14; "^'Drip VQ3 "l^^i who shaketh 
 his hands from holding of bribes Jes. 33, 15. Hence, 
 it frequently has the pregnant sense, to be concealed 
 from, so that not (ut non), that not (ne); e. g. ni^D 
 that (I) should not bear Gen. 16, 2; I^J^p so that 
 (thou) art not able to bury thy dead Gen. 23, 6; 
 ni^n ^T^)iJ^ hidden from the sight of the congregation 
 Num. 15, 24; ^13p so that no one can come in Jes. 
 24, lO; 12^.P that the waters shotdd no more go over 
 
2/. PREPOSITIONS. 89 
 
 Jes. 54, 9. With the same meaning also before 
 nouns; e. g. "?|!?DP (= yf^ HITip) from being king 
 I Sam. 15, 23 conf. v. 26; D^Q that it be no loyiger 
 a people Jes. 7, 8; y^VD from being a city Jes. 17, i; 
 niisp j-^? /^^^ M^r^ is no house Jes. 23, i; nilDD 
 that I cannot redeem Jes. 50, 2; H^^IP /^<???^ being a 
 shepherd Jer 17, 16; ""liip /rd?;/^ <5^2>e^ nation Jer. 
 48, 2; Ps. 83, 5 (Conf. 28, 5 E towards the end.) 
 
 Rem. 5 With the same signification it is often pleonastically pre- 
 fixed to p^i^ ; e. g. IHti^l^ I'ti^D Dli^ VW^ without man without inhabi- 
 tant Jes. 6, II (conf. 25, 4). 
 
 Sometimes even without a negation ]Q is used pleonastically , as 
 
 n^riD nni^?!3 anyone of them Lev. 4,2; n^i^?D IPIi^^D anyone of these 
 things (conf. 13, 8). 
 
 5 used with reference to time p signifies either /r^;/^, 
 when reckoning is made from the beginning of a 
 period (conf. de node ^ 01.7:0 vunTog), or immediately 
 after, reckoning being made from the end of a 
 period (conf. ab itinere , i^ otphrov); e. g. ppnp 
 as a dream when one awaketh Ps. 73, 20; ^^TOD 
 D^ti^nn after about three months Gen. 38, 24; D;>pi''p 
 after two days Hos. 6,2. Of frequent occufcnce 
 are the expressions J^jpp from the end = after ; Diiipp 
 towards the end. 
 
 e upon the idea to go out from is based the frequent 
 causative signification because of, in consequence of-, 
 e. g. !li"llp because of the multitude Gen. 32, 13; 
 I Kings 3 , 8 (Conf. A b). 
 
90 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 Rem. 6 Concerning the use of |^ for expressing the idea of rest 
 
 at the side of an object, with which a removal away from the object 
 is not lost sight of (conf. prope abesse ab , stare ab , pendere ab) see 
 n 5 fl:, 3 and c. 
 
 D. ^iSl (poetic vi^ lit. region, direction) denotes: 
 
 motion, direction towards, (also in a moral sense = 
 with regard to , concerning-, e. g. TTW b'^ ri'J^i^t "ip^''J 
 and Abraham said concerning Sara Gen. 20 , 2) ; 
 sometimes implying that the terminus or finis of 
 the action has been reached hence = 1^ e. g. IH^D ^^1 
 unto his mouth Job 40, 23; sometimes denoting ^^- 
 tering into , hence = "^in 7^^; e. g. nD^nn 7i^ i^3 come 
 into the ark Gen. j, i. Generally however it is 
 used without implying the terminus to have been 
 reached. 
 
 /3 by, at, in, rare and pregnant, because instead of 
 the terminus the motion towards it is present to 
 the mind, hence = rest in a place reached; e. g. 7iS! 
 
 nsin Dlp^n at the place which .... thou shalt 
 
 sacrifice Deut. 16, 6; Q:Dfn % ^n?^ DpP ^^J 2;^ thy 
 dwelling place , in heaven i Kings 8, 30; D^51 ^1^ ^^ 
 by the great waters Jer. 41, 12; n?u) "inri'b^ <?;^ M^ 
 mountain I Sam. 17, 3. (Conf. the analogous use of 
 zu in Germ. e. g. ^// Hause), 
 
 E. ^ is an abbreviation from b)^, but is distinguished 
 from it. 
 
 a b generally expresses only a direction (not a ^notion) 
 towards, and is more frequently used in figurative 
 language. 
 
27. PREPOSITIONS. 91 
 
 fi from the idea direction towards, turning to may- 
 be explained the use of h as dative and as a qua- 
 lification of the possessor or auctor (conf. 7, 2) 
 with the meaning: respective of, with regard to \ e.g. 
 niODripl "I^V? <^^ regards riches and wisdom i Kings 
 10, 23; D'^^'ID?') ^pT}? as for chariots and horsemen 
 Jes 36, 9 ; njIDj^^ but not what regards faithfulness 
 Jer. 9, 2 ; liiti^^^ as regards our tongue we will pre- 
 vail Ps. 12,5; ^^^, unto (for) a wife. Hence the 
 so called 7 inscriptionis = for, in behalf of; e. g. 
 TWob for the chief musician. (Conf. 41 Rem. i). 
 From the fundamental idea direction towards may 
 perhaps also be explained the use of b with the 
 infinitive, as in the frequently occurring 1?^^^^ lit. 
 ad loquendum , hence for the purpose of saying = 
 namely, to wit; Conf. ^T1^ ni^*l7 [namely) gazing upon 
 thy power and majesty Ps. 63, 3 ; ll*"?^ ni"lp2 (na- 
 mely) rebelling against the most High Ps. 78, 17; 
 lOi, 8; Jer. 44, 7. 8. 
 
 y b also expresses the dativus commodi (rarely the 
 dativus incommodi ; e. g. 1^7 l^ll^i we are entirely cut 
 off Ez. 37, 11), in which sense it stands with many 
 verbs, especially with the imperative, pleonasti- 
 cally; e. g. ^^ "^^ go; ^ TT^ flee [to save thyself); 
 1^ d; he fleeth; ^^ 'h^,^ go up Jes. 40, 9; "^^ n^?rn 
 and thou trusted Jes. 36, 9; DD^ l^in ^^'t^i'^ ye Jes. 
 2, 22; ^^ riDl ^;2^ ^^ M^ //'^^ Cant. 2, 17; "l^tS^H 
 ^7 beware. 
 
 ^ r^^/ in a place; e. g. ^TO*"^ ^^ thy right hand Ps. 
 
92 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 45, 10; and with reference to time towards ^)h 
 towards the evening. 
 6 to the solecisms of later Hebrew belongs the intro- 
 duction of the object by "? (which is common in Ara- 
 maic) ; e. g. Vy^b n^Ii^ ke sent his princes 2 Chr. 17, 
 7; Conf. Ezra 8, 16; rht> Djn Xlb'^TO as the sea 
 causeth its waves to come up Ez. 26 , ^ : TlT'^^!' nVl!^ 
 thou knowest my foolishness Ps. 69, 6; ''JDID^ rinriD 
 thou hast loosed my bonds Ps. 116, 16; lirT^P^ T\T\Tl 
 "^T^ and he slew- Sihon and Og Ps. 136, 19. 20 ; 
 Conf. Job 5, 2; uht^Ti bd") 'H ^^1D the Lord uphol- 
 
 deth all that fall Ps. 145 , 14 ; D'^inp^ -["QTA 
 
 D^^r'^l (where other objects with P^il precede) and he 
 appointed both the priests and the Levites 2 Chr. 31,2. 
 
 Rem. 7 As to the use of 7 with passive verbs and ideas see 34, 2* 
 F. 3 (as adverb almost^ about, circiter) used as pre- 
 position signifies : 
 X as (used in a comparison conf. 35, 4). When dou- 
 bled 3 3 (or y\ 3 ; e. g. HH^ ^ri331 m ^1133 as 
 
 my strength was then, so is my strength now Jos. 
 
 14, 11) it means as so; e. g. ]n'33 W]iQ as with 
 
 the people so with the priest Jes. 24, 2; but also 
 
 so as\ e. g. ^^^"53 p^l^i that so the righteous 
 
 should be as the wicked Gen. 18, 25; n^"}33 ^1D3 "'3 
 for thou art as Pharaoh Gen. 44, 18. (Conf. Abn- 
 
 Ezra on Hosea 4, 9). We find also 3 "l^^it3; e.g. 
 
 l!i y^ti^3 '^'QW "1^^3 as the report concerning Egypt 
 
 so the report of Tyre Jes. 23, 5 (Conf. 28, 5 H). 
 /3 after, according to, in proportion as. With reference 
 
2/. PREPOSITIONS. 93 
 
 to time about (lit. at) ; e. g. T\T\ n^3 ^^^?// the same 
 time (lit. ^^ the time as it is reviving or returning) 
 Gen. 18, 10 ; "HID D^I) /^ morrow about this time 
 (lit. ^5- //^^ time to morrow) i Sam. 9, 16. 
 
 Confer ID as a conjunction prefixed to an infinitive 
 with reference to time [when) ; e. g. UXl^ i^lDlI) ze^A^;/ 
 Abram was come Gen. 12, 14; *lt^V i!W3 t:;^^;2 j5"j-^/^ 
 heard Gen. 27, 34. 
 y the use of the so called 3 veritatis should also be 
 noticed ; e. g. npi< W\K2 ^T\ 15 /i^r he is like a true 
 man (the meaning is : he behaves as a true man , 
 and he truly is such) Neh. 7, 2; ti^''"inQp iHi] ^/^^^f ^^ 
 .^^/(^T is peace i Sam. 10, 27; tO^ypS z/^rjj/ small Jes. 
 I, 9; Ps. 105, 12 (otherwise Il^^pS = nearly y almost); 
 ytf^n? ^j- />^^ wicked Job 27, 7. In like manner nDDHD^ 
 D^HT Jes. 1,7 after ^^i^^ ''^di^ D""*!! strangers devour 
 it, and it is as overthrown by strangers. 
 7) In poetic parallelisms the influence of a preposi- 
 tion in the first member not unfrequently extends itself 
 to the corresponding part of the second member; e.g. 
 (-}) Qiri^D lynj^ ^55? liipri nt^i;.! (= ''Iti^P?) the Lord shall 
 perform, his pleasure on Babylon and his strength on the 
 Chaldeans Jes. 48, 14; conf. Job 15, 3; (?) ^I^njy Dl^3 
 
 rrjID^^I.- (= n^JD^^DI) are but as yesterday and as 
 
 a watch in the night Ps. 90, 4 ; 6) nj;nD^ DiJ^ ^^P^W 
 7TO1--- (= ^TO^I) <3:;2<^ he has made me a father to Pha- 
 raoh and a ruler over all the land Gen. 45, 8; 
 
 conf. Jes. 28, 6; Job 34, 10 ; (l^) O'l^i^ "li^DI HH^^? D^^^JJ l]^ 
 nn^^^ (= U^)^ "li^3 i;^*).) the howling thereof unto Eglaim 
 
94 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 and the howling thereof unto Beer-elim Jes. 15,8; (|J?D^) 
 
 ^^ D^p^^ .^n^nni ^^ ^im VV l^Di^ (= ^n)nn ]vj^b)) for mine 
 
 name's sake will I defer mine anger, and for my praise 
 will I refrain from thee Jes. 48 , 9 ; (nnn) DpHOT nnn 
 Dj^^P 1-)"i; HD^pi n^ra (= niD^3 nnn^) instead of your shame 
 (ye shall have) double, and instead of confusion they shall 
 rejoice in their portion Jes. 61, 7. Conf. 25, 5. 
 
 28. Conjunctions. 
 
 i) Conjunctions may be formed of prepositions by 
 connecting them with ^W.^.,, "? or W^; e. g. 1^^^ i;^, 
 "P 13L' Di$ "I^ until, ^-^^-^ as, "l^i:^ \;5?p because etc. (Conf. 
 Grammar 85, 4). Yet the means at hand for accura- 
 tely expressing the connection between sentences are 
 not always used. (Conf. 19, i). The Hebrew writers 
 more than once content themselves with imperfect means 
 of connecting two sentences. Hence, some frequently 
 occurring conjunctions, chiefly V ""P and "1^1^, have a 
 great number of significations. 
 
 2) The conjunction more frequently used than any 
 other is 1 or 1 (conf. Gramm. 85 B). 
 
 It's use is as follows: 
 
 A. properly as copulative = and, connecting both words 
 
 and sentences. A few instances 1 \ and .... and; 
 
 e. g. DID) Dpn both chariot and horse Ps. 'j6, 7 ; ti^lpl 
 J^5^1 both the sanctuary and the host Dan. 8, 13; 
 
 sometimes also \ I without emphasis; e.g. nj^*] 
 
 n:^l and Ajah and Anah Gen. 36, 24. When three 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. 95 
 
 or more words are connected it may be prefixed 
 to each one of them ; e. g. m) ^p.J^n m) -"iiipn m 
 -nspL! n4$l ^nnn n^^] '^pyjl the Kenite and the Keniz- 
 zite and the Kadmonite and the Hittite and the Pe- 
 rizzite Gen. 15, 19; or to some of them, or to the 
 second word only; e. g. ni)^''iJp HlS'l^^l "1ID myrrh, and 
 aloes, and cassia Ps. 45, 9; or to the last word 
 only ; e. g. niin\1 ^1>. ll^rp^ inii<1 Reuben, and Simeon, 
 and Levi, and Judah Ex. i, 2. 3. (Conf. Abn-Ezra 
 on this place). 
 
 Further in the sense of or; e. g. IDi^^l V?i< H^DI 
 and he that smiteth his father or his mother Ex. 
 21, 15 (conf. below 5 B .) 
 
 Rem. 1 1 is omitted in certain idiomatic expressions; e. g. ^'j^H 
 Dl^7ti^ //z^ day before yesterday (heretofore) Ex. 5,8;' and also in 
 vivid descriptions to express greater emphasis (Constrtictio asyndeta) ; 
 e- g- 13!D^ ^Di V*P h^ bowed, he fell ^ he lay Judges 5, 27; )^^") 13 
 Q"i^^ 131V ^^ ^^^ oppressed and forsaken the poor. Job 20, 19; TpT] 
 17 "Tjpn ^he rain is over and gone Cant. 2,11; "IDV P^^H ^"111*1 ^"^ ^''^J 
 beloved had withdrawn himself and was gone Cant. 5,6. 
 
 B. it is explicative (= isque , et quidem 1 explicativum) 
 = namely , to wit; e. g. inPI^p !?i^1 !P5D ^^ '^^^^ ^/^^ 
 Zf7r<3f had respect unto Abel and to his sacrifice Gen. 
 4, 4; in^i^pl HD'ID 2/2 Ramah, namely, in his own city 
 I Sam. 28, 3; Dl^ri DJ^T ''"l^tH ^;/<3f w^^w /^^r^ came 
 a lion, even with a bear i Sam. 17, 34; DDI^/pn VIJPI 
 D^pn"]Sn IP*) of the seed royal , namely, of the nobles 
 Dan. I, 3; occasionally also emphasising the idea; 
 
96 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 e. g. b)m rgr^) vy^J^ b ^59 from the hand of his 
 enemies and (especially) from the hand of Saul 2 
 Sam. 22, I ; D^^^ll^l Tr\T\\ b'^_ concerning Judah ana 
 (chiefly) Jerusalem Jos. i, i; 2, i. 
 
 Two ideas are sometimes so connected by 1 that 
 they form one idea (?> %iol 1v6iv)\ e.g. "^i'lni '^;51D^V 
 the sorrow of thy coitception Gen. 3, 16; ^D^T HIDpn 
 ^IpV. thou multiplieth changes of hosts (host after host) 
 against me ]oh 10, ly ; D^^]) D^pt^5 spices of different 
 sorts 2 Chr. 16, 14. 
 
 C. it is used for effecting a climax, both with words 
 and sentences (= and even), for the purpose of 
 strengthening an idea already expressed ; e. g. J^5.M1 
 ^^") ^7 he shall deliver thee in six troubles; yea , in 
 seven no evil shall touch thee Job 5, 19; frequently 
 with numbers ; e. g. ^ n^jn^^t b^\ pTOl ^"^^^ H^t?^ b^__ 
 li^i^i^^^ for three transgressions of Damascus, yea, for 
 four I will not turn away the punishment thereof 
 Amos I, 3. 6; conf. Prov. 6, 16; 30, 18; ^^T ""Dl 
 *li''^iip"^^5^ eveyi when he shall tread in our palaces 
 Micha 5, 4; 1^ ^^^\ ask rather (at once) for hi^n 
 the kingdom i Kings 2, 22. 
 
 D. it is also used in comparisons, chiefly in prover- 
 bial language, when facts of the moral order are com- 
 pared with those of the physical order, and then often 
 is equivalent to even as, so; e.g. f]1J^ iniBpl P]^"! ""iDI 
 
 just as the sparks (by their nature) fly upwards 
 Job 5, 7; ^ D);tp^ ^5^ "^jHI even as the palate taste th 
 its meat} Job 12, 11 ; conf. 34, 3; nini ni3^ )riD1 so 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. 97 
 
 the Lord trieth the hearts Prov. 17, 3; PlDltO n^^lD^I 
 so is good news from a far country Prov. 25, 25. 
 (The transition to this signification may be easily- 
 found in Prov. 25, 3 j^^ D''D^p ^\ pij^;^ \y<\ urb rM 
 
 "1j?n the heaven as regards height, and the earth as 
 regards depth, and the heart of kings is unsear- 
 chable = just as the height of heaven and the depth 
 of the earth , so is the heart of kings unsearchable^ 
 
 Rem. 2 Sometimes such sentences are found together without a pro- 
 per conjunction or even without *|; e. g. nV^ti^ ]Tl^ 7^^ DDH H^DID ^o 
 
 - T 'V - T T - 
 
 is a wise reprover upon a listening ear Pr. 25, 12 conf. v. 26. 
 
 E. most frequently of all it stands for the purpose 
 of introducing the apodosis; e. g. nn^^ i^'TI^ and be- 
 fore they were laid down , she came up Jos. 2, 8 ; 
 i^3 V^^!l lOT^ when Jacob was gone , Esau his brother 
 came in frotn his hunting Gen. 27, 30. This is chiefly 
 the case after determinations of time; e.g. D1'"5'>D 
 DD"'!!''^. inpDi) that on the day ye eat thereof , then 
 shall your eyes be opened Gen. 3, 5 ; J^^^l ''t^'^^^n Dl''^ 
 on the third day , when Abraham lifted up his eyes 
 Gen. 22,4; rm hrr\^ D^^ 15IP l-^T)^ while he yet spoke 
 with them , Rachel came Gen. 29, 9 ; ^p''? ^^^^^ ^^^ 
 and afterwards build thine house Prov. 24, 27 ; or 
 after other determinations ; e. g. T\IT\\ 'pl^nS in my 
 dream, behold a vine was before me Gen. 40, 9; or 
 also after a conditional sentence; e. g. 'pj^Dti^n U^ 
 T\yy^^^, if (thou wilt take) the left hand, then I will 
 go the right Gen. 13, 9 (conf. 41, 3). 
 
 7 
 
98 . HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 F. it introduces the subject of a sentence (generally 
 a nominal sentence), denoting a simultaneous condi- 
 tion ; e. g. D^i 101^1 and the two angels came to So- 
 dom at even, while Lot sat in the gate of Sodom 
 Gen. 19, I; Iljti^ i^lD^ when they came into the house, 
 while he lay on his bed 2 Sam. 4, 7; also when 
 such a sentence at the same time expresses a con- 
 trast (= whereas, and yet, while yet)-, e. g. ^3^i;Jl 
 '^'y^!^. ^y^ Lord what wilt thou give me , while 
 yet I go childless Gen. 15, 2; ^^3 H^V? ^Ti^. because 
 of the woman thou hast taken, seeing that she is a 
 mans wife Gen. 20, 3 ; 'n^ pi^^ ^3^^ how canst thou 
 see I love thee , whereas (while yet) thine heart is 
 not with me Judges 16, 15; U^^vb}^ ^ ^^^- and yet 
 I did not send them Jer. 14, 15. 
 
 Rem. 3 Such a *| , when following a negation , is equivalent to 
 i^ 13 on the contrary, e. g. i;ilti^7 1i^!!l ^"^"IDV*! ^^^^ t^^^y ^^^^ unto 
 him: nay my lord ^ but to buy food are thy serva7tts come Gen. 42, il. 
 
 G. it also introduces a causal sentence (= because); e. g. 
 D"J njLl^n \^^\ for vain is the help of man Ps. 60, 
 1 3 ; ripOT )ib\ because thou hast not withheld thy 
 son Gen. 22, 12; DH^^T UT\)^, for ye know Ex. 23,9; 
 T\Vb irl3l for the righteous God trieth the hearts and 
 reins Ps. 7, 10, "'^p ^^^ Hi^n.l for behold the head 
 of the stars (i. e. the highest stars) Job. 22, 12. 
 
 H. in inferential sentences (= then, so then, therefore); 
 e. g. ITII O'l^ni wherefore be converted , and live Ez. 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. 99 
 
 18, 32. Sometimes with the same signification even 
 at the beginning of a sentence; e. g. inpl but he 
 said: bring therefore meal 2 Kings 4, 41 ; inp^l let 
 them therefore take five of the horses 2 Kings 7, 1 3 ; 
 1i^"I1 y^;2^w ye then that the Lord Ps. 4, 4. (In all 
 these instances nri}i^1 is usually employed). 
 
 I. it is likewise found at the beginning of a sentence, 
 uttered under the impulse of grief, or connected 
 with a protasis which through haste was suppressed, 
 and which therefore has to be supplied; e.g. TOt1 
 n^^DB p^^ pT and the Lord said unto Moses : if her 
 father had but spit in her face Num. 12, 14; pH^l 
 i^in DD and Aaron, what then is he that ye murmur 
 against him Num. 16, 11 ; "'^Spijti^ri HD^I wherefore 
 then doest thou ask of me i Sam. 28, 16; Dn*!^!? DH^^l 
 Ah ye, ye have destroyed Jes. 3, 14; ""rippi "'i^^l /^/^^zt; 
 ye , I my self have annointed my king Ps. 2, 6. 
 
 K. finally, it very frequently introduces a j^;^^/ j-^;/- 
 tence (= that) , and is then construed as \ cons ecu- 
 tivum with the cohortative or jussive; e. g. ^^^^^l 
 //2<3;^ / ^/i-*? ;;2<^j/ be builded (i. e. obtain children) by 
 her Gen. 30, 3 ; 1^''^^ ^5 irT'DI^'l that they may judge 
 betwixt us two Gen. 31, 37; T^.ti^nT that she may 
 be burnt Gen. 38, 24; l!?i^l"l that they come up out 
 of Jordan Jos. 4, 16; inii<p n^"lli^ ^/^^/ ze/^ ;;^^j>/ in- 
 quire from him i Kings 22, 7; ^D^l ^i^^l //^<^/ he may 
 go up and fall i Kings 22, 20. 
 
 Rem. 4 The ") is sometimes found pleonastically at the beginning of 
 
100 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 the main sentence to emphasise the idea; e. g. 'H HDI^*) niay the Lord 
 add I Sam. 24 , 3 ; nJlH ]D7"1 ^^'^ therefore behold Jes. 8 , 7. 
 Rem. 5 Concerning ") conversive see 16. 
 
 3) The relativa Iti^i^. and ^'2 that ^ because are of an 
 almost equally extensive use, and parallel in their significa- 
 tion , except that 1^^. also serves as nota relationis , and 
 as a relative pronoun , whereas ""S, as a conjunction, is 
 used more frequently and in a more general manner. 
 
 Both stand at the beginning of sentences, which as 
 accusative objecti are governed by a preceding verbum 
 activum (conf. Lat. quod), "l^i^. in these cases is someti- 
 mes even preceded by n^^ as nota objecti; e.g. liJ^D^ ""D 
 ti^"'5in 1^i< T\)^ for we have heard how the Lord dried up 
 Jos. 2, 10; ^^ni n^ii!. T\^^ ^T"^.. 1^"} thine eyes have seen how 
 the Lord has delivered thee into my hands i Sam. 24, 1 1 ; 
 ^m ^^W^ "If ^. n^l Dl'-n nijn npi and thou hast declared 
 this day how that thou hast dealt well with }ne i Sam. 
 24, 19- 
 
 4) With regard to the use of "l^ii^ and ^3 the follo- 
 wing points should be noted. ""3 stands: 
 
 [a) as an introduction of the oratio recta {on) ; e. g. 
 ^:^}p^ 'n n^n ^3 nim ^D for she said: the Lord has 
 looked upon my affliction Gen. 29, 32. 
 
 In a few instances also "l^i^ ; e.g. ^IJ^f "Ip^''! 
 "TIJ^W "lt^l$ and Saul said unto Samuel: I have 
 listened to the voice i Sam. 15, 20. 
 
 [b) as a temporal conjunction (conf. ots properly, at the 
 tifne that , when) when , further, supposing that , in 
 
28. coNjuNCTio:^?g> ; . . ; i' V,^' V\ \ ViW' 
 
 case that, not of course in the same sense as the 
 conditional DNl if, *) 
 
 seldom Itf^^^ {=when) l^iiH^l^nn 1^J< when the flocks 
 came to drink Gen. 30, 38; ^ I^^D.I Iti^J*^. in case 
 that they have sinned against thee i Kings 8, 33. 
 
 Rem. 6 Now and then, however, 13 occurs with the signification of 
 n^'t e. g. j;in ""S i/" ^hou kmwest Job 38, 5 conf. v. 4 and i8. Some- 
 times also '^W^j, e. g. i^ton]' ^^ti^i "Iti^i^ w/^^ (if J a ruler sinneth ^ 
 Lev. 4, 22; IJ^D^l 1^^< z/j^ j/^// hearken Deut. ii, 27. 
 
 (^) as a causal conjunction = /^^^^^/^^ (Lat. eo quod), 
 fully "^5 l^iT-; frequently to be rendered by for, in 
 which sense it is sometimes also used as a particle 
 of affirmation: yes, indeed (-= it is certain that), 
 chiefly after other particles of the same kind ; e. g. 
 "I>^p niDD ''3 nj"! ""D and the Lord said: verily the cry 
 of Sodom is great; verily their sin is very grievous. 
 Gen. 18, 20. 
 
 Also "l^i:^ sometimes has a causal meaning; e. g. 
 ^i< ^P ^V.^. for what God is there Deut. 3, 24; 1^^^ 
 t3^D ^rip^i^ ""^i^ /<?r / w^i- but a little angry Zech. 1,15. 
 
 (d) 13 (never "1^^*) when following a negation, has an 
 adversative meaning but (properly on the contrary 
 because) ; e. g. Hpn^ ''S i^^ nay ; but thou didst laugh 
 (prop, nay it is not so, because thou etc.) Gen. 18, 
 1 5 ; ^b\ ininiD ""S >^ nay; but we will abide the night 
 
 i) For the better understanding of this distinction Ex. ch. 21 will 
 be found to be very instructive. 
 
1-02 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 in the street (prop, no ^ we refuse, because we will 
 etc.) Gen. 19, 2. 
 
 In like manner, when the negation is not clearly 
 expressed, but virtually implied; for instance after 
 a question which is equivalent to a negation; e. g. 
 
 T^^^.^O ""^ "^ "T^^^? ^^ '^^^i have I done unto thee 
 
 (i. e. / have done nothing against thee) .... nay (= on 
 the contrary), I brought thee up out of Egypt etc. Micha 
 6, 3.4; D^^D i;^l-l ^lIV^p I? nay, (the orphan can say), 
 from my youth he brought me up as a father Job 
 31 ; 18. In this sence, therefore ""D is equivalent to 
 U^ ^'3 conf. below 5,1/3. 
 
 Rem. 7 13 sometimes has a concessive sense = although \ e. g. 7^^*11*) 
 DDi i^/ ""^ DD?? ^^^ he would go. although he was not accustomed to 
 
 T V VT 
 
 it (prop, he wanted just to try to walk with the arms ^ f o r he had 
 
 never yet carried such arms) i Sam. 17, 39. (Conf. Pr. Driver's "notes 
 
 on the Hebrew text" on this place): i^'in y^T) 13 DTl^i^ DPli i^^l 
 
 't v: TT : 
 
 God led them not by the way of the land of the Philistines ^ although 
 that was near (prop. God did not lead them fete, although this might 
 have been expected ^ f o r it was the shorter way) Ex. 13, 17. 
 
 It follows, therefore, that 13 in such cases retains its value as a 
 
 causative conjunction 5 only the reason stated does not refer to the 
 entire preceding clause, but merely to a part of it. 
 
 [e) *1^^. (never ''3) serves as a final conjunction in the 
 sense of that (= "1^^. li^D^ see below 5, Ea); e. g. 
 ^ypti^;^ ^ "Iti^l^ that they may not understand Gen. 
 1 1 , 7 ; ^ D^^^ nti^^. that he may do good unto thee 
 Deut. 6 , 3 ; ]1)^T "1^^. that they may know Jos. 3, 7. 
 
 (/) ^%, occasionally also possesses the meaning of 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. IO3 
 
 -|^^.D; e. g. D^DfD i^5^ -IDD: ^^ "1?^^^ ^^ ^'/^^ >^^^/ of 
 heaven cannot be numbered {th.Q. main sentence com- 
 mences with 15) Jer. 33, 22. 
 
 Rem. 8 With *1^^^ as <?/a relationis the demonstrative word is 
 sometimes omitted, so that the relative particle is expressed by 
 
 ^^'^ alone ; e. g. >^ ^^^ = U^ "lli^i^ wkere the children of Js- 
 V ~: T V -; T V -: 
 
 rael strove mith the Lord Num. 20, 13; liiniDi^, '^l!?!?!! I^^i^ where 
 our fathers praised thee Jes. 64, 10. 
 
 5) Subjoined is a short compendium of the different 
 classes of conjunctions with remarks as to what is of 
 importance concerning the use of some of them. 
 
 What remains beyond this more properly belongs to 
 the sphere of the Lexicon. 
 
 A. as copulative i besides 1, we find DJ also ^ and the 
 intensive or progressive '^ {in addition to) yet more ^ 
 even. 
 X D3 often serves to reduce two or more persons or 
 objects to one head or group; e. g. DD^j^ D^ tvhy 
 should I be bereaved of both of you Gen. 27, 45 ; 
 73 D^ all together. 
 
 It is further used simply to emphasise the words 
 following; e. g. HiJ/JD ^ni X\^ Dl and he loved Rachel 
 even more than Lea Gen. 29, 30 (conf. in Lat. the 
 comparative with etiam); T\^^ D3 rii^l see, yea, see 
 I Sam. 24, 12. 
 
 Ul Dl (or Ddil D3 Gen. 24, 44 HH^ HH^ Ul 
 
 n^^ij "^b^yb D^l both drink thou, and I will also 
 draw for thy camels) means as well as , 
 
I04 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 both and. Sometimes we find D3 in this sense 
 
 thrice repeated ; e. g. DipD D3 i^lDpp D3 pH DJ we have 
 both straw and provender enough aud room to lodge 
 
 in Gen. 24, 25; Conf. 32, 20. Also 1 \ is used 
 
 in the same sense ; e. g. ^i^:i^5ti'1\ nnSl^Dn T&n^ ^i^ IJ^D^I 
 injl'il Uni""! /^^/^ ^<3:w^ /^ Gedaliah to Mizpah, both Is- 
 mael , and Johanan and Jonathan Jer. 40, 8 ; "l51i<. HD 
 nt:^^ m^] "h ^m] what shall I say? he hath both 
 spoken unto 7ne and himself has done it Jer. 38, 15. 
 
 /3 *"3 ^^ (prop- (^dd to this that , not to mention that) 
 = surely then , and according to the context quanto 
 magis or tanto minus; how much more, how much less. 
 In a question , as exclamation it means perhaps , 
 perchance, mayhap \ e. g. U^xh^^ 1D^ ^3 ^ hath God 
 perchance said, ye shall not Gen. 3, i. 
 
 Once we find D3 ^ together Lev. 26. 44 ^ii\ 
 Dp'in^.i^ \ypl DniTO Xm Ul and yet for all that, when 
 Jhey be in the land of their enemies, I will not 
 reject them. 
 
 B. The disjunctive conjunctions are: 
 
 a. principally 1i^ or (prop, from free choice, just as 
 the Latin conjunction vel). It occurs however also 
 with an exclusive meaning (like the Lat. aut) ; e. g. 
 ^1^^*'3^ XV^ 1i^ Q^'inn in^S upon some moujttain, or 
 into some valley 2 Kings 2, 16. 
 
 1^ sometimes stands elliptically, and is equivalent 
 to ''D 1i^ or (if it should be) that; e.g. ^f^J?? pjni1^< 
 or else let him take hold of my strength Jes. 27, 5. 
 Hence the transition to the conditional meaning if, 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. IO5 
 
 if however ; e.g. ^'3 Vlli 1^ if^ however, it were known 
 Ex. 21, 36. With the same signification we once 
 find "hy^a. Hosea 8 , 7 T\^T_ "b^^ if however it yield, 
 strangers shall swallow it up. 
 
 Now and then the signification of 1^ coincides 
 with that of 1 copulative ; e. g. h'^)il 1i^ and as for a 
 ram, thou shalt prepare etc. Num. 15, 6. 
 
 /3 the disjunctive : whether or (Lat. sive . . . sive 
 
 is expressed by 1i^--- 1i^. Di<...Di^> Di^V--Di^. 1^^- --Ip, 
 
 C. Temporal conjunctions are: 
 
 (X. 1^^^ and ""3 (see above 4 B), "l^^^^ = when (Lat. quum). 
 Of rarer occurrence the conditional Di^^ [if) = when-, 
 e. g. \Tr\. D^i^ w>^^;^ M^ Z<?r^ shall have washed away 
 Jes. 4, 4; "l''2^5 "^f? ^^ when the vintage is done Jes. 
 
 24, 13. Once we find ID? in this sense Gen. 19, 15 
 nji^ inti^n IDDI ^;/<^ when the morning arose. 
 
 (3 1^^? "I^^ ^3 1^. and "i:^ alone until, sometimes Di< 1^' 
 Di^ ^^^^. 12 . 
 
 y lil^ while, as long as; 3 with the infinitive while. 
 
 5 "lt5^^^ ^^m after (1^ "iDi^ Ez. 40, i "i^^n nn?^ "it^^, "ini$ 
 
 /V^r /A^ ^//j/ w<3:^ smitten-, "inNt Job 40, 2 inJiit ""ni^ 
 'n 151 ^^<^ it came to pass after the Lord had spo- 
 ken these words); and "l^^?^ nn^$ e. g. 1^^; "I^^ID ^.0^5 
 and after they were gone Jos. 2, 7 ; and ''Tin^ alone ; 
 e. g. U^^^, Ty\^ nn.Nl ^//^r 6^^<3^ has shewed thee all 
 this Gen. 41, 39; "iDDi nni$ after he is sold Lev. 
 
 25, 48. mp (=ntf^i^. mp) since, onto, 01^5 ^</i?r^, ^^ 
 yet ^\^ D";i.^3 Zephania 2, 2 DD^.^^. k^13; ^^^ 0*195 before 
 
I06 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 the fierce anger of the Lord come upon you), also 
 nDip_(= -l:^^^ my) e. g. ra; r^^ mi0 which wither eth 
 before it groweth up Ps. 129, 6. 
 s 3 when, as\ generally with the infinitive, sometimes 
 with a participle ; e. g. !3''TO3 as he drew back his 
 hand Gen. 38, 29; nnlDD i^lHI and as it budded 
 Gen. 40, 19. 
 
 D. Causal: 
 
 Iti^ii^ and ''S (conf. above 4 C); n^^? 15 ':':^ propterea 
 quod (lit. therefore because) because; "1^i$ "IDI ^J^ and 
 l^iji. nm^ ^i^ (p^op- /^^ i^i^ cause that) because-, 
 more emphatic "^^^^ nil1i< ^3 ^^^ Jer. 3, 8 for this 
 very cause that, simply because; l^i^ "113]^3 and ]^2 
 *1^^^ because; 'y^^. nnn and *!? Dnri (prop, therefore 
 that) because; ^^, Dp^. and "Iti^J^ D|2V. (pi'op. as reward 
 that; as consequence that) because. 
 
 Rem. 9 n ^^ "1^^. J^ 34 1 ^7i ^'^^ "^^^^ frequently p ^J^ 13 
 everywhere means because^ p ^^ having been changed into a relati- 
 vum hy the ;?'/ relationis l^i^ and l^ . 
 
 Rem. 10 Very remarkable is the use of ^^ in Jer. 30, 14 "^ ^^ 
 '^^Di^tDri *1D1JV "^^liVi fo'^ fii'st it stands as the preposition propter ^'^_ 
 ^.51V 3^ '^^ account of the greatness of thine iniquity^ and then it 
 exercises its force as a causal conjunction 'n IDliV "^^i^ ?1^ because thy 
 sins were increased. 
 
 E. final: 
 
 Of' *1^^. |i^D^ and 1^0^ alone [with the intention that) 
 that, to the end that; "IID^.3 > "113^.D^ that, in order 
 that. These are also construed with the infinitive, 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. 10/ 
 
 in which case however they really are prepositions. 
 Once we find IpH^ "11:3^.3 in order to search i 
 Chr. 19, 3; but the parallel place 2 Sam. 10, 3 
 reads Ipn "113^3. 
 
 /3 \ to the end that (see above 2 K) ; perhaps also b 
 in D^ inn^ to place there the ark of the covenant 
 I Kings 6, 19. 
 
 y as to the negation b% conf. 25 Rem. i; )D lest, 
 that not 25, 3 B; ""H^?^ 25, 3 A. 
 
 Once we find ]p prefixed to the imperfect with 
 tht final meaning that not Deut. 33, 11 pDIp^ jp //^<3:/ 
 they prevail not, 
 
 F. Conditional'. 
 
 a. m^'b (rarely 1 -5^^ = 1^ Di^ Esther 7, 4) 2/; but with 
 difference of use. 
 
 W^ leaves uncertain whether anything takes place , 
 has taken place, will take place, or not (but rather 
 the former alternative); it therefore denotes the 
 pure and simple hypothesis {= if I do so\ if I did 
 so ; if I shall do so). 
 
 'h on the contrary implies that what is supposed 
 does not take place, has not taken place, or will 
 not take place; or at least that such would be im- 
 probable, [= if I did so , had done so , should do so). 
 Hence ^ is used to express a wish ; e. g. ^i^i^^^"] 1^ 
 nin") that Ismael might live before thee Gen. 17, 
 18; IjOO 1^ would that we had died Num. 14, 2; 
 and even with the imperative (conf. 17, 4^ and 
 18, 2 b). Yet also W^ is used for stating a wish 
 
I08 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 (conf. 17, 4^); and sometimes even in hypothe- 
 tical sentences of which the condition is known 
 not to be fulfilled ; e. g. D^^l.i^. D^ if I were hungry 
 Ps. 50, 12; U^mi pD^Jt D^^ if I ascend up unto hea- 
 ven Ps, 139, 8; Dn'>;53 X% l^ir UHK if they bring up 
 their children Hos. 9, 12. 
 
 V on the contrary can not be used when the 
 possibility exists that the condition will be realised. 
 /3 W^ is always used in expressions of grief, and in 
 conditional curses; e. g. HJ^T ^Tp^^^ W^ if I have 
 done this Ps. 7, 4 6; ^'T^ Di^ if we forget the 
 name of our Lord Ps. 44 , 2 1 ; ^ri"115^ W^ if I had 
 said Ps. 73, 15 ; ^;yij^. W^ if I forget thee Ps. 137, 5. 
 
 Rem. 11 The apodosis is sometimes omitted after a protasis with 
 D^' e. g. r^^ -j^ p-j;^ inn U^ ^r:^^T\\and she said if thou wilt 
 give 77ie a pledge^ till thou send it Gen. 38, 17; chiefly with threaten- 
 ing sayings \ e. g. *jni^ Plili^n X\^ Di^ ^f ^^ ^^^J '^'^y thou afflict him 
 Ex. 22, 22. 
 
 y What has been said concerning Di^ and 1^ applies 
 also to their compounds ^ih Di^. ^ib^ ^f). 
 
 5 After formulas used in swearing Di*^ has a negative 
 sense; e. g. HTO 1^5i^n W^ n^lD ""n by the life of PharaOy 
 ye shall not go forth hence Gen. 42 , 15; and (con- 
 sequently) )^ W^ an affirmative sense. To under- 
 stand this it must be borne in mind that such for- 
 mulas contain an ellipsis of what will happen or 
 would happen, were the condition to be fulfilled 
 or to remain unfulfilled. This is evident from i Sam. 
 
 . 25, 22; bpp nwi^ D^<t n^d^ rQ\ in ^n^^^^ D^n^^^ n^v.in"D 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. IO9 
 
 -l''p.5 VW^ "1i?3n "11^ ^V. 1^ ^m may God do so unto 
 the enemies of David, and more also , if I leave of 
 all that pertain to him by the morning light so much 
 as one man child i Sam. 25, 22. 
 
 Rem. 12. Once 2 Sam. 3, 35 {< 13 is found with a conditional 
 sentence after an oath formula ; i^*^;^ l^p^ QJ^ 13 DTl^i^ "b T^^\ ilD 
 on? DV^i^ ti^Dli^n May God do so to me and more also if I taste 
 bread till the sun go down. 
 
 s U^ and ^ U\^ not only possess this sense after for- 
 mulas and verbs used in swearing, but also when 
 they are used absolutely; Di;^ then denotes a strong 
 negation ; e. g. Hi^T W^ ]y^ not a shield was seen 
 Judges 5, 8; (IJjn IDp^ Di^ surely this iniquity shall 
 not be purged from you Jes. 22, 14; also when con- 
 nected with a particle of interrogation ; e. g. D^^^ 
 )}yb 1i?pr) is there no end to our dying (= shall we 
 all perish) Num. 17, 28; and ^^ DiJ^ expresses an 
 equally strong affirmation [= truly, really), e.g. 
 li^^P in?; )ib D^ surely they that did rise up against 
 us are cut off Job 22, 20. 
 
 Rem. 13. Concerning the conditional signification of "^^j 1^^, and 
 ^2 conf. above n 5 B a and n 4 Rem. 6. 
 
 G. Concessive : 
 
 (X. W^ even if, though, with the perfect ; e. g. "npl!^ Di^ 
 
 though I were righteous-, and the imperfect; e. g. Di^ 
 
 DD'^^^n l^ni though your sins be as scarlet Jes. i, 18; 
 
 ^^L n.^n? D^ though thy people be as the sand of the 
 
 sea Jes. 10, 22. 
 
no HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 (3 b2 = ^^^. b^L (prop, add to this that) although ; e. g. 
 nti^^ DDn )^ 7^ although he had done no violence Jes. 
 53, 9; "'DDB DDn i^7 7;^ although there is no violence 
 in my hands Job 16, 17; also with the infinitive; 
 e.g. ^n^"l^]l^ although thou knowest Job 10, 7. 
 
 Concerning the concessive meaning of "i? conf. 
 above Rem. 7. 
 
 H. Comparative-. 
 
 I^^D as, just as, such as, often followed by the 
 corresponding 15 in the apodosis; e. g. MV^, "1^1^31 
 yiD'] 15) n^l? 15 "^^^ but the more they afflicted them , 
 the more they multiplied and the more they spread 
 Ex. I, 12. (Conf. 27, 6 F). 
 
 1li^N!.5 , however, is sometimes omitted in the pro- 
 tasis; e. g. VCi\ 15 Y^W^ Dl'P^ IHD^ for as the heavens 
 are higher than the earth, so are my ways higher 
 than your ways Jes. 55, 9; IHOri 15 'li^'T. HDn when they 
 saw it, they were amazed Ps. 48, 6; and in like 
 manner also 15 in the apodosis ; e. g. ri''nti^ ^^.'^^ "^5 
 -I''pn U^yT\ bD in^^ '^pip.^ nn bv_ for as ye have drunk 
 upon my holy mountain so shall all the nations drink 
 continually Obadja 16. 
 
 /3 15 '^ HD^ b'3 in all points as .... so , denotes an 
 extremely precise comparison ; e. g. 15 ^^ ^t^^! b'D 
 ^.^.i. in all points as he came, so shall he go Eccl. 5, 15. 
 
 Rem. 14. In sentences such* as Ps. 42, 2 p JI^D b^il^ 
 
 1^2i aj the hart panteth after the waterbrooks , so panteth my soul 
 after thee ^ certain authors wish to explain 3 by considering it = Iti^J^D 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. 1 1 i 
 
 with a comparative sense. Such sentences may however be easily ex- 
 plained by admitting an ellipsis of '^]^^ as relativum; e. g. "n^{^ b^i^'D 
 
 '' ' V -; T : 
 
 jl^n ^^^^ t^^ ^<^^t that panteth. Conf. Deut. 32, 11; Ps. 125, i. 
 
 I. Adversative-. 
 
 a. ''S DD^ (only thai) = but , however, nevertheless, 
 (3 D^ "^3 (but if) = before , except when governing the 
 Perfect, and following a negation in the Imperfect; 
 e. g. ^np^ti^ Dij5 ^3 nt^QiJ ^ I will not keep silence be- 
 fore I have given recompense Jes. 65, 6. In this case 
 Dilit ^3 stand together as^one conjunction = but if, 
 except that, unless, and follow after a negation or 
 the equivalent of a negation. Conf. above 4 [d). 
 
 Yet Dl^ ''3 are also used in such a manner that ""D 
 belongs to the the main sentence and W^ to the 
 conditional sentence ; e. g. "in^3 ''P53n Di^ "i? for even 
 if thou wash thee with lye , thine iniquity is marked 
 before me Jer. 2. 22. 
 
 The adversative W^ *i3 before a noun means be- 
 sides e. g. ti^lp DPlS? D^^ ''S ^>^^r^ is no common bread 
 under mine hand, besides the holy bread i Sam. 21, 5. 
 
 Rem. 15. The main sentence to which the adversative QJ^ 13 belongs 
 has sometimes to be supplied from the context; e. g. "lirniDT DJ^ "^3 
 (I desire nothingj except that thou remember me Gen. 40, 145 Q^ 13 
 i^tS^i^ ViQ fo'^ ^^^^ "^^^^ I 'yespect (prop, for it cannot be otherwise than 
 
 TV TT 
 
 that I should respect him) Job 42 , 8. 
 
 K. Finally there is the conjunction HHi^l which in 
 most cases only serves to introduce the apodosis 
 after a preceding subordinate sentence. Sometimes 
 
112 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 however, it implies also a causative sense; e.g. 
 
 ^Dlpp b^ ^b ni5 nri^l therefore now flee to thy place 
 Num. 24, 1 1 ; or a concessive sense ; e. g. IDti^ nnjVl 
 njvn DHi^ D3 HD i<i However, I pray you, tarry ye 
 also here this night Num. 22, 19. (See Essay on the 
 signification of Dn^ reprinted from the "Israel. Let- 
 terbode" 1884). 
 
 6) Of two particles, of which the compound forms a 
 conjunction, frequently only one or the other of them 
 is used. This already appears from what has been 
 said before. Thus , instead of the complete "1^^. j]^! on 
 account of, because we find either "l^^$ alone, or "^2\ in- 
 stead of "^ti^^?5 cis, either D (see Rem. 14) or "lli^N!;e. g. 
 Dl^n U^m niSt Dn^i^"l n^^^. ^3 for as ye have seen the Egyp- 
 tians today, ye shall see them again no more Ex. 14, 13; 
 1^ ni5!i "IM n^^ 'D^it "!1T ^15:;;^ nn^^ "l^^^ as thou hast kept 
 with thy servant David my father that which thou didst 
 promise him i Kings 8, 24. 
 
 On the other hand a certain tendency to be prolix 
 sometimes shows itself; e.g. li^l P = "ii^ IP 5 "^ii^ p"!! 
 = p^ (conf. above 5A/3). The repetition, no doubt, of the 
 same particle points to greater emphasis ; e. g. Ti^p "1>^P > 
 T^D "li^ps. as ^m ^m^ ^m^'Hl waxed exceeding mighty Ex. 
 1,7,; ']D^^p i^DTOS ji^lDI ]^^ because, eve7t because they 
 rejected my judgments Lev. 26, 43 ; which now and then 
 also occurs with nomina ; e. g. n"^iri p"l^ pT!^ //2<3:/ which 
 is altogether just shalt thou follow Deut. 16, 20 ; conf. 
 Jes. 6, 3; Jer. 22, 29; Ez. 21, 32 (conf. 22, 4). 
 
 7) The consecutio temporum in Hebrew not unfre- 
 
28. CONJUNCTIONS. II 3 
 
 quently allows the expression of the relation between 
 
 two sentences by simply placing them one after the 
 
 other without any conjunction at all. This occurs: 
 
 x with conditional sentences ; e. g. inpj IPIi^ Dl*" DIpDll 
 
 l^^ijn \o and if they overdrive them one day, all the 
 
 flock will die Gen. 33, 13; "^^ b^S^'^ HD ^T\)Km (prop. 
 
 Weill I have sinned) if I have sinned, what {harm) 
 
 do I unto thee Job 7, 20 ; ""Ci^ Dn"]3|Pl iniD^ (at my 
 
 death) when I die etc. i Kings 13, 31 ; tDJ^D "11^^ 
 
 "il^i^pi if (this last) a little longer, they will stone 
 
 me, or, they be almost ready to stone me Ex. 17,4; 
 
 DIIO ^^9 T\^)!< i^^D whoso findeth a wife findeth a good 
 
 thing Pr. 18, 22. 
 
 Such sentences are sometimes introduced by an- 
 other word, generally by n.^H; e.g. ''^''"ID"! ^^t "^^-^ 
 ^T^. HD now when thy words come to pass , what 
 shall be the ordering of the child Judges 13, 12 ; 
 Tti^P ^D^n T\}7} ""S for when they escape destruction ^ 
 Egypt shall gather them up Hosea 9, 6. 
 /S with comparisons , e. g. Dp^ I^DiJ ""D^ \^5^ they devour 
 my people , as if they eat bread (lit. devouring my 
 people, they eat bread) Ps. 14, 4; np 1^; )h\ "i;! i^lp 
 "l^V as the partridge sitteth on eggs which she hath 
 not laid, so is he that getteth riches Jer. 17, 11 ; 
 IJ^^n ^1^^ :i^^ "^^^P l^n: dn Ul nj^ as drought and heat 
 consume (steal) the snowwater, so doth sheol those 
 that have sinned Job 24, 19. 
 y with sentences, which otherwise would have been 
 introduced by a relative conjunction (oratio obliqua); 
 
 8 
 
114 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 e. g. r\^ "TlHi:?. = ^l^^ ^^i^^^. ""S say, I pray, thou art my 
 sister Gen. 12, 13; V^ti^H = V^OT ^D //^^/ w-^^;/ thou 
 hear est a dream Gen. 41, 15; HDn ^1i^ d:1:i 1^1 //^^/ 
 /A^ nations m,ay know, that they are but m,en Ps. 
 9, 21 ; Ps. 50, 21 ; ''0''^^^ DHW H^D wA<2/ ye have seen 
 me do (prop, what ye have seen that I did) Judges 
 9, 48. "lUnn "I1J3 ^n^T ^3 for I knew that thou didst 
 deal very treacherously Jes. 48, 8. 
 
 N.B. In English such a sentence is always an object 
 sentence , but according to Hebrew ideas it is to be con- 
 , sidered as a direct and independent sentence. 
 
 29. Interjections. 
 
 i) The Interjections which signify ah, alas, woe, ^T[%^^ 
 ^^^y ""in) are either connected with the object of the 
 threatening or lamentation by means of the particles 
 h)^^b or b'^_, or they stand absolutely, so that the object 
 of lament remains without a particle. 
 
 The first named construction is the more usual with 
 denunciations, (conf. the Latin vae tibi), the latter with 
 expressions of grief (conf. Latin vae te in Plautus) ; e. g. 
 Xh ''l^ woe us! Sam. 5, 16; ^tOD ^15 ""in Ah, sinful nation! 
 Jes. I, 4; T\'^ ^T\ Alas, my brother! i Kings 13, 30. 
 
 2) With ^"^.^^$ happy! the noun, expressing the 
 object praised, is sometimes omitted; e.g. D^^l^ ^"]ti^Ni 
 
 trii^''^ nti^^ ^ happy shall he be that rewardeth thee 
 
 as thou hast served us, happy shall he be that taketh etc. 
 Ps. 137, 8. 9; and in Ps. 65, 5 even the nota relationis 
 V. = '^^^. ' "in^n """n^^ happy the man whom thou chooses t. . 
 
30- SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. II5 
 
 ^l^i$ moreover, like n.^n, is not unfrequently connec- 
 ted with suffixes; e.g. ^n^^, "^jnti^N! happy thou I U;^^)^ 
 happy you! V^^^ or IDIJi^i^! happy he. 
 
 PART IV 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF THE SENTENCE 
 
 CHAPTER IX NOMINAL SENTENCES 
 
 30. Subject and Predicate. 
 
 i) Nominal sentences are sentences which only ex- 
 press a state of existence or being ^ and of which the 
 predicate is a nomen, 
 
 2) The predicate of a nominal sentence is either a noun, 
 adjective, participle or pronoun; e.g. 1i3^D 'H the Lord is 
 our king Jes. 33, 22; ''i^^^n*! D^)/'1 DUD ''^^^$^ and the men 
 of Seahm were wicked and sinners Gen. 13, 13; J^ii"' injl 
 ]"1^D and a river went out (prop, is going out) of Eden 
 Gen. 2, 10; "'^^'^ '^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^ case. 
 
 Rem. 1. The subject may also be a pronoun; e.g. D^Jj; D^DH Di^T 
 ^Diiy^ //^z'j is now bo?ie of my bones Gen. 2,23; VTD i^im ^'^^^ ^^ 
 was priest Gen. 14, 18. 
 
 3) A remarkable class of nominal sentences are those, 
 of which the predicate itself forms a nominal sentence ; 
 
 e. g. rin"'5 D^'ti^'n^ HTpn as for the stork the fir trees 
 
 are her nest (= HTDn^ n:3 D^^TO conf. v. 18) Ps. 104, 17; 
 l31'lD''pn ^i^n God perfect is his way Ps. 18, 31 ; 
 
Il6 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 '^^^ ^n^^D riyn '^^^ as for me , behold my covenant is with 
 thee Gen. 17, 4. 
 
 In these sentences the subject is sometimes intro- 
 duced by the (so called) 1 apodosis\ e.g. D^pD ^OT ^;il?1 
 and I behold I establish my covenant ') Gen. 9, 9. 
 
 Rem. 2 It is evident that by such sentences the Hebrews intend to 
 emphasise the position of the true subject of the sentence. In English 
 we should say the fir trees are the stork'' s nest ^ both when it is desired 
 to indicate what the nest of the stork is made of, and when it is in- 
 tended to convey where the stork (in contrast with other birds) builds 
 herself a nest. Now, in the last named alternative something is said 
 concerning the choice of the stork ^ and it is, therefore, quite coiTect 
 when the Hebrews both place the stork as subject in the beginning of 
 the sentence, and mention her again in the predicate by means of a 
 suffix. Sometimes, however, the subject is not again mentioned in the 
 predicate, and is then to be supplied from the context; e. g. ti^Dil 
 
 pinD ID /3 nDV"^ "^^ f^''" ^ hungry stomach , every thing bitter is sweet 
 (to it) Prov. 27, 7. 
 
 Rem. 3 Certain exclamations also , in which the reader is left to 
 supply a nominal or verbal predicate, are to be considered as nominal 
 sentences; e. g. D"'D!D TPID ^ rashness (as quick) as water Gen. 49, 4; 
 V^'nnn p^J^m D''iDn D^iDn multitudes after multitudes (are seen) in 
 the valley of Haruti Joel 4, 14. 
 
 4) The use of a noun as predicate of a nominal sen- 
 tence chiefly occurs when the equivalent adjective is 
 wanting; e. g. |^^. *)*'r)"1''p1 and the walls thereof were of wood 
 Ez. 41,21 (conf. 4, 7 and Rem. i). The harshness of such 
 
 i) This kind of nominal sentence is called by certain Grammarians a 
 compound nomiftal sentence. 
 
30. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. II7 
 
 an expression is occasionally softened by repeating the 
 subject nomen and connecting it in st. constr. with the 
 predicate ; e. g. ''113 D^^Di^ 113 Dtii is then my strength (the 
 strength) of stone? Job 6, 12; "^Tfob^ 103^ l^-ip IDD^ a 
 sceptre of equity is the sceptre of thy kingdom Ps. 45, 7. 
 
 This repetition of the subject nomen is the more 
 usual construction when a comparison is intended; e.g. 
 HDnn 11^3 T\'^^r\ ^\^ n;ni and the light of the moon shall 
 be as the light of the sun Jes. 30, 26; or when the pre- 
 dicate cannot be expressed by an adjective; e. g. ^HID^D 
 D'lp^V ^3 ni3^C) thy kingdom is a kingdom of all eternity 
 Ps. 145, 13. (No adjective can be formed to express 
 Qip^J^'^p of all eternity, for the adjective formed from 
 D^V would mQ^.n eternal), Itf^)? n^ D?TnpP^l^P ^pH the 
 voice is Jacob's voice , but the hands are the hands of 
 Esau Gen. 27, 22. 
 
 The construction in the two last named cases be- 
 comes very bold, when the subject nomen is not repea- 
 ted in the predicate ; e. g. VniVP3 ^^^p ""Nl^^^l thy seed 
 also had been as the sand, and the offspring of thy 
 bowels as (the offspring) of its bowels Jes. 48, 19; 
 n^5 "T|1-i5 T^)?^ = ^^ TP^ ^1A55 =^^1J?1 and thy garments 
 are like (the garments) of him, that treadeth in the wine- 
 fat Jes. 63, 2; 113J3 Viin = 113:1 ^5in3 ViJn their arrows shall 
 be like (the arrows of) a skilled mighty man Jer. 50,9; 
 D''p^;i n^n = D^D^^ nj;. r\V,J] and it is a time of much rain 
 Ezra 10, 13; and this construction becomes still bolder 
 when the 3 comparationis is omitted ; e. g. D''^17^^ ^^P3 
 = n^Tf)^ ^333 ^^^03 thy throne is (like the throne of) God 
 
Il8 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 Ps. 45, 7; D^il^ ^OT = D^;i^ ''i;3;3 "Tj-ii^V. thine eyes are {like 
 the eyes of) doves Cant, i, 15 (conf. 3 Rem. 2). 
 
 5) When the subject of a nominal sentence is an infi- 
 nitive, it is by preference introduced by h\ e.g. DIIO 
 DD^J it is better to dwell in the corner of the housetop 
 Prov. 21, 9 (in v. 19 b is omitted "IJIO p.ij? HJ^ Dit: 
 it is better to dwell in a desert land) ; "l^tDpH^ -IH^V ^ ^ 
 it is not thine office , Uzia , to sacrifice 2 Chr. 26, 1 8 ; 
 seldom by 5 ; e. g. 'T\^ ^Q^ra ^^;^n T\^\>^, )h let it not seem 
 hard unto thee to let him go free Deut. 15, 18; but ne- 
 ver when the infinitive stands in the st. constr. ; e. g. 
 113^ Ul^T] ni^p ^1^ ^^ it is not good that the 7nan should 
 be alone Gen. 2, 18; DltO \lb i^^i^l ^;JD Tm: to accept the per- 
 son of the wicked is not good Prov. 18, 5. 
 
 Rem. 4 Now and then an adverb is found as predicate ; e. g. 13 
 ^liriji^ ^IDH for we are but of yesterday Job. 8, 9; ^^^n V"l3 "'3 t^^i 
 they are set on evil Ex. 32 , 22 ; 2^ but more rarely as subject ; e. g. 
 D^n IP h^ nSin DJI ^^^ many of the people also are fallen 2 Sam* 
 1,4; D^iyn 7b riTli i^^ iriD3 there has not ever been the like]oe\ 2, 2. 
 
 T T ' T : T 
 
 Concerning Dp''i''^3 Pi^S IPiDD i^l^H ^'-^ ^'^ ^<^^ ^-^ nothing in your eyes ? 
 Haggai 2, 3. Conf. 27, 6 Fa. 
 
 6) The infinitive also as predicate is sometimes found 
 with b and sometimes without b\ e.g. ^iji^.^li^in? 'H the 
 Lord is ready to save me Jes. 38, 20 ; Dl Dli^^. D''^^1 ""l^l 
 the words of the wicked are a lying in wait for blood 
 
 2) The Samaritan text reads i^')n ^IQ 13 that they were broken loose ; 
 conf. V. 25. 
 
31- THE COPULA IN NOMINAL SENTENCES. II9 
 
 Prov. 12, 6; Vy^ y\D D^^^p5 HDi^lHI z^ is an abomination 
 to fools to depart from evil Prov. 13, 19. 
 
 31. Expression of the copula in nominal sentences. 
 
 i) The subject and predicate of a nominal sentence 
 are generally placed next to one another without any 
 copula ; e. g. DItO ^iCm }>"1Nin nHTI and the gold of that land 
 (is) good Gen. 2, 12; ti^"}(^n X^^ ^^^^ "'W ten cubits (shall 
 be) the length of a board Ex. 26, 16; DDP! ^T\ D^ he also 
 (is) wise Jes. 31,2; "^.^O D^; a deputy (was) king i 
 Kings 22, 48. 
 
 2) The personal pronoun of the 3d person is but seldom 
 used as copula ; e. g. ^T\ IT)^ DI^H the dream is one Gen. 
 41, 26; i<^n D-'H^^^ nnD nr this is the gift of God .cc\. 5, 18; 
 n^n D^^59 ^^? ^-^^C^ ^^^ sottish children Jer. 4, 22; VD^ 
 n^n Qi^^ ^Dti^ rilitDri rl"ip /.^^ j-^^/^;/ ^^^<^ kine are seven 
 years Gen. 41, 26. 
 
 This chiefly occurs when the relative pronoun 1^^:^ 
 is the subject; e. g. in ^ID "1^1^ tol. ^3 every moving thing 
 that liveth Gen. 9, 3 ; and especially in negative senten- 
 ces ; e. g. i^^n niHLD ^^ It^^^l. HDnsn ]P1 ^;/</ ^/ the beasts 
 that are not clean Gen. 7, 2 ; T\T\ rh)^r\ D^l^n n^D i^^ n^^^ 
 which are not of the cities of these nations Deut. 20, 15. 
 
 The same pronoun is sometimes used as copula even 
 when the subject is a pronoun of the ist or 2d person; 
 e. g. i^in i^J^ i^ijt 15 j-^^ now : it is /, ^^^ / Deut. 32, 39; 
 i3^D )^r\ nn^ //^^z/ ^r/ ;;2j king Ps. 44, 5 ; U^'V'O Um ^l 
 riDH i5"}n ''.^^n ye Ethiopians also , are victims of my sword 
 Zephania 2, 12. 
 
I20 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 3) Still more rarely the forms of r\T\ are used as co- 
 pula ; e. g. )Tiy\, inn nn''n }^"}.i{ni and the earth was waste 
 and void Gen. i, 2. D'n}^ H^n ^n|ni ;^d7; //^^ serpent was 
 7nore subtil Gen. 3, i ; D^li^i Hjn ra; DT^ Dq^ ^D) ^/^^ ^// 
 M^ bread of their provision was dry and mouldy Jos. 9, 5 ; 
 "tOj^^D Vr\ D^P^P D^V^^ threescore and ten kings were 
 gathering (their meat) under m.y table Judges i, 7. 
 
 4) If the subject should be a personal pronoun, and 
 the predicate is expressed by a participle, the subject 
 is then sometimes, as suffix, joined to ^.1 or pj^ (which 
 are properly substantiva), according as the sentence is 
 affirmative or negative ; e. g. ^"^^ID ^\ Di< if thou savest 
 Judges 6, 36; uW^ ^?^ D^l (^^d if thou wilt not send 
 him Gen. 43, 5. 
 
 CHAPTER X VERBAL SENTENCES. 
 
 32. Object of the verb. 
 
 i) Verbal sentences are sentences of which the pre- 
 dicate is a verbum finitum and which express an action. 
 
 A verbum finitum , by its indication of persons , inde- 
 pendently of all further determinations, may form a com- 
 plete sentence; e.g. "^^M. Diji;.! Hli^;^! ^Di^''! ^;/^ he ate, and 
 drunk, and rose up, and went his way. Gen. 25, 34. 
 
 A single verb therefore is found more than once to 
 suffice when intransitive, but when transitive an object 
 generally follows as an important factor of the sentence. 
 
 2) The most simple manner of connecting a noun 
 
32. OBJECT OF THE VERB. 121 
 
 as object with a verb, is by adding it to the verb 
 without preformative, afiformative , or particle indicative 
 of its relation as object; e. g. Dp^ ^D^"" he eats bread, or 
 (when definite) Qp/'n b^^iC he eats the bread. UVb, or Dn^pn 
 in this case is called the object. 
 
 The object however is frequently connected with the 
 preposition DJ^ ("n^<t) , chiefly when it is determined by 
 ^i^^TLJ'n, a St. constr., a pronominal suffix, or in any 
 other way ; e. g. D^^^^H DijJ ^"Q God created the heaven 
 Gen. 1,1; ^^5^^^ "is n^ ^^.^1 a^id he brought the bullock 
 of the sin offering. Lev. 8, 14; 1^i^"l T\^ p^gl and wring 
 off its head Lev. i, 15; 1:D1^ Hi^ T^ID and Haran begat 
 Lot Gen. 11, 27; n^rni;it P^;; i^^ neither doth a fool un- 
 derstand this Ps. 92, 7; n^^lS! ''p'H^ whom shall I send 
 Jes. 6, 8. 
 
 Rem. 1 n^i^ seldom stands before an indefinite noun; e. g. p^"' ^D") 
 ni^i^"ni^ 1i^ ^^i^"ni^ *)1ti^ (^^^ ivhen an ox gore a man or woman 
 
 T V 
 
 Ex. 21, 28; generally only in poetical style; e. g. d|p^'^ D'^P^l^ HNl^ 
 ^1^ but the righteous shall be recompensed with good Prov. 13, 21. 
 
 3) The use of the object without preposition is more 
 frequent in Hebrew than in EngHsh. For almost all ideas 
 which are in any way related to the action of the verb, 
 may be expressed as object of the verb. We have already 
 seen something similar with regard to the st. constr. 
 See 5, 4. 
 
 4) Thus it is that many verbs may be used both 
 with an object (transitive), and without an object (in- 
 transitive) ; e. g. riDJ means as well to weep , as to de- 
 
122 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 plore (conf. Lat. flere)\ Dti^^ and p^ to dwell and to 
 inhabit ) ^^T\ to go and to go through ; as ^3 Hi^ ^l\ 
 13"]Dri ^;2<^ we went through all the wilderness Deut. 1,19. 
 
 5) Even verbs, the action of which can really only 
 be conceived as intransitive, often have as object a 
 noun of the same stem ; e. g. "ins to fear, inD lin.D they 
 were in great fear Ps. 14, 5 ; ^^9^ to sin H^ltpn ^V\ Je- 
 rusalem has grievously sinned Sam. i, 8. 
 
 This chiefly occurs with verba denoininativa\ e. g. 
 i^^l i^^in let the earth put forth grass Gen. i , 1 1 ; 
 15V ^^'^^ when I bring a cloud Gen. 9, 14; Q^ill^ HiB^i 
 /^/ us make brick Gen. 11,3; Q''^^i< D^p^i:$D binding 
 sheaves Gen. 37, 7 ; niiV^nT)^ *1i^?^n /^^ //^^/ kindled the 
 fire Ex. 22, 5. 
 
 Especially when the action of the verb is determined 
 by an adverbial expression, such determinations are 
 generally in the form of an adjective, or in any other 
 form, added to a noun of the same stem as the verb; 
 e.g. D'l^lll D^iVJ^ Vii to plague severely Gen. 12, 17; lin 
 n^l^ ninn to fear greatly Gen. 27, 33; n^l^ HiJ^Q ^tjn 
 to sin grievously Ex. 32, 31 ; Trp\ H^IJ Hj^li p;y^ to cry 
 loudly and bitterly Est. 4,1; H^l^ HiJ^t^ i^.^tf^ to hate 
 keenly 2 Sam. 13, 15 ; 13 ni^^ -lt5^^5 I'^^nTliJ rbr\ to be deathly 
 sick 2 Kings 13, 14; n"T.p ">n^5 DSD TBT\ to smite irresistibly 
 Jes. 14, 6; D^|^"3"l D^fP D^^J^n /^ answer 7nuch Jes. 21, 7; 
 "113"^^ "I'lp^^ riDDi:?. IDD^I to be gathered as prisoners Jes. 
 24, 22; D'^P^IV TOIti^n i^ti^li /^ save for ever Jes. 45, 17; 
 n^3 ^i^ |nn t^lt^P W to rejoice thoroughly Jes. 62, 5 ; 
 
 n^-i;i nnpti^ nDti^ Jon. 4, 6; i Chr. 29, 9; n^i;i n^^j? ^.^i? 
 
32. OBJECT OF THE VERB. 1 23 
 
 to be very jealous, to strive jealously Zech. i, 14; rj^p 
 by^ J^iJp to be very wroth Zech. i, 15 (conf. also n. 11). 
 In all these instances the noun adds nothing to the 
 meaning already expressed by the verb. 
 
 6) The same connection of the object without prepo- 
 sition or prefix also occurs with determinations oi place 
 of the most general kind , in answer to the questions : 
 where , whither, unto what , whence e. g. TTWT\ ^yL)^^ let us 
 go forth into the jield Cant. 7, 1 2 ; "I'l^n Di^ l^^ii^ they were 
 gone out of the city (conf. Lat. egredi urbem) Gen. 44, 4 ; 
 HTOin npD^I and thou shalt pour it upon the dry land 
 Ex. 4, 9; ^lOn *'i^D''1 may thy favours come unto me 
 Ps. 119, 41. 
 
 Rem. 2 Suchlike expressions, however, may also be expresssd in a 
 different manner. See 35 , 2. 
 
 7) With the verbs signifying to flow, to stream 
 etc. , that which flows , or better that with which 
 overflows anything, stands in poetry as object; e.g. 
 
 D?D nil"" ''^1^. mine eye overflows with water (= tears) 
 Lam. I, 16 conf. 3, 48 Jer. 9, 17; 13, 17; Dnnri ')St^\ 
 
 tains shall drop new wine, the hills shall flow with milk, 
 and all the brooks of Judah shall flow with waters. 
 Joel 4, 18. conf. Amos 9, 13; Hp^lJi r^'S^ overflowing with 
 righteousness Jes. 10, 22. In like manner also expressions 
 such as D^;i^pp l^p n^^ my\ and, lo , it all (= the field) 
 is gone up in thorns Prov. 24, 31 ; conf. Jes. 5, 6; 34, 13. 
 
 8) Further large classes of verbs are to be found 
 
124 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 which are construed with an accusative of object; namely: 
 
 a) all verbs signifiying a putting on or putting off 
 one's garments , covering y enveloping, adorning , and 
 suchlike, as ti^3^> tD^D. rri^' ^^^ ^ "^^^^ when used in 
 metaphorical language ; e. g. \^)iT\ D^ID ^^ the pas- 
 tures are clothed with flocks Ps. 65, 14; "11i^ Dbi^ 
 who envelops himself with light Ps. 104, 2; Iti^??"! 
 nti^S ^""^^P^ ItO^ll. n?5^I) ""^tOIti^ w^j/ m^;^^ adversaries be 
 clothed with dishonour, and may they cover them- 
 selves with their shame as with a m^antle Ps. 109, 29. 
 (Conf. 35. 3)- 
 
 b) verbs signifying: to be full , to lack, as i^^^ to be 
 full', J^l'^ to swarm, to abound Gen. i, 20; i^3^ /<? 
 ^^ satisfied; }^"1D /<? increase , to overflow (conf n. 7) 
 Prov. 3, 10 ; ion ^^ 2/<2:;2^ (that which is wanting 
 being object, and the person or thing to which 
 anything is wanting subject); e.g. D''TOn I'npni ""^li^ 
 n^pn Dfpil^n peradventure there shall lack five of 
 the fifty righteous Gen. 18, 28; ^D^ to be bereaved 
 Gen. 27, 45. 
 
 c) several verbs of dwelling, and not only near or 
 in a place, as |D^ Jes. 33, 16, 1W Gen. 4, 20, 
 *11J Judges 5, 17, but also with somebody, with a 
 people ; e.g. )^\ ^1^"] ^7 /^^ ^z;^7 man shall not dwell 
 with thee Ps. 5, 5. Conf. Ps. 120, 5. 
 
 9) The same construction without preposition or pre- 
 fix is also used to express the adverbial relations, as 
 after the manner of, in proportion to, what regards, as 
 for, according to, etc.; e. g. Ht^^n ^ ^5^ D^O?? ^-^ for the 
 
32. OBJECT OF THE VERB. 12$ 
 
 dead thou shalt make no mourning Ez. 24, 17; T&^T^^ 
 D^p ISPp ni^V and he offered burnt offerings according 
 to the number of them all Job 1,5; ^DP ^'^}^ ^???D p!! ^/^Z;^ 
 ^^i" regards the throne will I be greater than thou Gen. 
 ^i, 40; "1^ Dnin "Tl^lD j-^/// up as with a close seal Job 
 41,7; "in^ n^ Qn?n^ /^ 7%"^^ /^<^.y w^VA the decision of) 
 one mouth = with one consent Zeph. 3, 9. 
 
 It further expresses all "sorts of adverbial determi- 
 nations; e. g. ^^^'T) "ip.ti^ they persecute me wrongfully 
 Ps. 119,86; bnn "'i^Dmn ^^^1 and how will ye foolishly 
 comfort me^ Job 21, 34; riD"!^ 053^ ^ ^^^^ //^^;;2 freely 
 Hosea 14, 5 ; onnpn Dnpi;^ D^:^?n Ephraim has bitterly 
 grieved Hosea 12, 15 ; D^^^^D "il.ril ^^^ is come down asto- 
 nishingly Lam. I, 9; very frequently with the verb ^^'> 
 e.g. ""D^ ID^n they are gone unto captivity Lam. i, 5 5 
 ""li?. W l^^ni D^l ^<^ ^/:^^ r^^^i-/ me Lev. 26, 21 ; --l^^l 
 ri^l^p.- and he came joyfully i Sam. 15, 32; "T|1^i^ iD^n^ 
 ninti^ they shall come bending unto thee Jes. 60, 14; i^?') 
 T\W\ ID^n neither shall ye walk straight = haughtily 
 Mich 2, 3. 
 
 Rem. 3 These kinds of determination are often also expressed in 
 a different manner. See 35, 4. 
 
 10) The determination of time also is frequently ex- 
 pressed as object to the verb, namely in answer: 
 
 a) to the question how long? e. g. r\'^ Tm TTsM. ^^W 
 they served twelve years Gen. 14, 4; conf. Deut. i, 
 46; 9, 25. 
 
 b) to the question when? r\r\^W)^ Ql"! ^|5p1 ^^yiatmor- 
 ning , at evening, at noonday I pray Ps. 55, 18. 
 
126 HEBREW SYNTAX. * 
 
 ii) With verbs signifying to speak, to cry, to work, 
 to save etc. the organ with which the action is perfor- 
 med frequently stands as object, and the adverbial deter- 
 mination as determination of the organ (conf. n. 5); eg. 
 hT\l ^p p<^Ti<tJ and I cried with a loud voice Ez. 11, 13; 
 conf. 2 Sam. 15, 23; H^D"] f]D H^V '^^^ the poor worketh 
 with a slack hand Prov. 10, 4 (conf. our expressions 
 such as to play football)-, frequently also without deter- 
 mination; e. g. ^"Ipi^ ""^p / cry unto the Lord with my 
 voice Ps. 3, 5; conf. 27, 7; 142, 2; Jes. 10, 30; TO! ID^D 
 they speak with their mouth Ps. 17, 10 conf. 66, 17; 
 ''l^in y^"1D i^Di ng^D deliver me from the wicked by the 
 sword Ps. 17, 13; ^i"ip1 rD^^i^in save with thy right hand 
 Ps. 60, 7; 108, 7; conf. 44, 3. (In i Sam. 25, 26. 33 
 however T is subject). 
 
 This construction is known by the name of accusati- 
 vus instruments 
 
 Rem. 4 Other constructions of course are also possible. See 34 , 2 
 and 35, 6. 
 
 12) The verba sentiendi , chiefly n^"J, sometimes go- 
 vern as object a nomen which is really the subject of 
 a subordinate clause (antiptosis); e.g. "I'ii^nTli^. 'n^^. i^"P>. 
 DItO ^3 and God saw that the light was good Gen. i, 4 
 conf. Gen. 6, 2; 12, 14; 49, 15; Ex. 2, 2; Ps. 25, 19; 
 with i^T e. g. i^in V"p ''? D:?n"n^jl n:;!; thou knowest that 
 the people are set on evil Ex. 32, 22, conf. 2 Sam. 3, 25; 
 17, 8; I Kings 5, 17. 
 
 13) The Hebrews, moreover, in the case of many 
 verbs, consider as object the person who in the English 
 
32. OBJECT OF THE VERB. 12J 
 
 language is but one interested in the action ; e. g. with 
 Iti^S to bring a message \ nj^ to answer; "13^ to serve 
 (e.g. Gen. 15, 13); D^l^ to stand security-, HJ^ to com- 
 mand \ ^"1 to take up the quarrel , dispute. 
 
 15) Many intransitive verbs, even passive and re- 
 flexive verbs (in ^^D^. ^i^pH and ^]^srin) may with a cer- 
 tain modification of meaning be connected with an 
 object; e. g. J^cn {to be favourably inclined, generally 
 with 3) to desire , to will ^'Hi^Dn "^ D'^'ID DTI / desire not 
 the blood of bullocks Jes. i, 1 1 ; i^3^ [to be moved to speak) 
 to propheUs^ II^^PI? ^5^ "'^^ which Jeremia hath pro- 
 phesied Jer. 25, 13; DDj [to place oneself round anything) 
 to surround ^]'^^^^it ISDJ they surrounded the house Jud- 
 ges 19, 22; ^;i1Dn^^l they fight against me Ps. 109, 3; 
 ^n^nn to appropriate Lev. 25,46; Jes. 14, 2; IJl^ tein!!5 
 to make one the object of intrigue, to conspire against 
 one Gen. 37, 18; p.isnn to consider Job 37, 14; 'D ?AS"^.^ 1^1^"?^ 
 /^ appear before the Lord i Sam. i, 22 (conf. n. 4). 
 
 Rem. 5 The object is sometimes omitted in expressions which are 
 frequently used: e. g. i^ti^i = D^iD i^ti^i ^^ receive favourably Gen. 
 
 T T T TT 
 
 4, 7; 18, 24. 26: or = )*iy i^ti^i to bear punishment Jes. 2,9; or 
 
 ' T T T 
 
 = !?1P i<ti^i ^^ ^^^>s"^ ^'^^^ ^^^'-^^ ) ^^ <^0^ loudly Jes. 3,7; DID = rT'lS HID 
 
 ' T T -T : -T 
 
 to make a covettant i Sam. 20, 16: H^ti^ = "I"" Pl^ti^ ^^ put forth one's 
 
 -T T -T 
 
 y^a??^ 2 Sam. 6, 6 perhaps also Ps. 18, 17 DIIDD n^^"' He put forth 
 his hand from on high; ItD^ (= IDti^) = HJ^ "ItO^ ^^ remain angry 
 
 -T - T I- -T 
 
 Jer. 3, 5; Ps. 103, 9. 
 
 Rem. 6 Concerning the use of ^ with the object see 27, 6 E s. 
 
128 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 33- Verbs with a twofold object. 
 
 i) The causative forms {b^B and ^"^^DH) of verbs which 
 already in bp__ have an object, often govern a twofold 
 object; e. g. in^np-HifJ ^P1''"ni!5 ItO^^PH and they stript Jo- 
 seph of his coat Gen. 37, 23; ^^5^n to clothe Gen. 41,42; 
 ^^P to fill Ex. 28, 3; brqm to feed Deut. 8, 16; ^m 
 and "ipn to crown and to make any one to be wanting 
 in a thing Ps. 8, 6; "ij.i^ to gird Ps. 18, 33. 
 
 2) Many verbs also govern in ^12 a twofold object; 
 e. g. li^p to strengthen UVh'VB ^B^ "J^P strengthen thine 
 heart with a morsel of bread Judges 19, 5 ; ^DJ to repay 
 I Sam. 24, 18; n^ to spread over Ez. 13, 10 ; "1^^ to 
 crown Ps. 5, 13; *) PITO to anoint Vs. /\.^, 8; "^JDD to uphold^ 
 to aid Ps. 51, 14. to bestow upon Gen. 27, 37; V3)^ to 
 despoil Prov. 22, 23; also expressions of sowing and 
 planting; e.g. PI^D Hl^'jri ^^<^ sowed it with' salt Judges 
 9, 45; conf. Jes. 5, 2; 17, lO; 30, 23. 
 
 3) The Hebrews generally express the thing produced 
 or obtained by any action, as object along with the 
 object denoting the material of which it has been pro- 
 duced; e. g. nynn n^^ nt^i^n Cp. with partitions shalt 
 thou make the ark Gen. 6, I3;^^nn;i U^y^ ]1D^1'^^$ ^'D for a 
 father of a m-ultitude of nations have I made thee Gen. 17, 5 
 (conf. Lat. reddere)\ D^Di^tO!^ Ut)'^ ^'^W^ ^^d I will make 
 them savoury meat for thy father Gen. 27, 9; HDiiD nrj^ DW 
 
 i) 'lilt^^ri however may also be a form of 7^^Qn , iii which the 
 plin of the byiBTl 'V ^^^ fallen away, like 1D"}T1 Jer- 9, 2 ; conf. author's 
 gramm. i8, 4. Rem. i. 
 
33- VERBS WITH A TWOFOLD OBJECT. 1 29 
 
 aud he set it up for a pillar Gen. 28, 18; IDIi^ n''tr:i;i 
 ^j[p nnti^p JD^ and thou shalt make of it an holy an- 
 ointing oil Ex. 30, 25 ; ni-5n Tr\M QW nn^^ n^D^l and thou 
 shalt bake twelve cakes thereof Lev. 24, 5; DNl njDI 
 ?13T?p D''^3^^^ <3:?2</ A^ built an altar with the stones I 
 Kings 18, 32. 
 
 This construction becomes remarkable when the 
 object of the material stands last; e. g. D^^ V^D ^D 
 Wnp he made all its vessels of brass Ex. 38, 3 ; 11i'']il 
 *1D;^ Ql'^C ^^ * ^^ formed the man of dust Gen. 2, 7. 
 
 4) When the speaker or writer wishes to indicate 
 what part of the object is more especially affected by 
 the action, then this part also takes the place of object; 
 . g. '^^ ^Dltfi^l ^T\ he will wound thee in the head Gen. 
 3, 15; ^pj lipi J^^ let us not take his life Gen. 37, 21 
 (prop, to smite him what regards his life Conf. Deut. 
 19, 6; 22, 26); V^p^ D.'^ino l^np smite his adversaries in 
 the loins Deut. 33, 11 ; ti^ipnn D^ TQ'^X he smote him there 
 in the belly 2 Sam. 3, 27 ; 'Pi) *'3^^^ ^D n^ r\^^r\ thou hast 
 smitten all mine enemies on the cheek Ps. 3, 8. 
 
 The same construction also occurs with the intran- 
 sitive verbs ; e. g. vyr\ fl^ njn he was diseased in his 
 feet I Kings 15, 23. The parallel place 2 Chron. 16, 12 
 reads: V^jI?. 
 
 Concerning the construction of these verbs when 
 used in the passive, see 34. 
 
 Rem. 7 35,7 will show that here also other constructions are 
 possible. 
 
130 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 34. Construction of the Passive, 
 i) A passive expression in Hebrew is frequently con-^ 
 nected with an object; namely: 
 
 a) when a causative verb (^^D and b^^^DTl) governs a. 
 double object ( 33, i), then in the passive that 
 object alone which is directly affected by the 
 action, changes into the subject, while the other 
 object remains object, and this irrespective of whe- 
 ther the subject is a nomen or pronomen, or is 
 implied in the verbum finitum ; e. g. H'^i]^"})! *\'^^, which 
 has been shewed thee Ex. 26, 30; ni^"iD HH^ Iti^J^ Ex. 
 25, 40 ; ""ni^^ ^^1 ^^\>3 I shall be deprived of mine 
 remaining year's Jes. 38, 10 ; VTTi U^^T\ IDD the momi- 
 tains were covered with the shadow of it. Ps. 80, 1 1 ;, 
 ^j^ ^THl ^ ""O^n^n so am I made to possess months 
 of vanity Job 7, 3. 
 
 b) with regard to the construction explained in 33, 4, 
 the person alone who undergoes the action, be- 
 comes subject, while the further determination re- 
 mains object; e.g. D^n^lV^ Itf? m Dn^D^I and ye 
 shall be circumcised in the flesh of your foreskin. 
 Gen. 17, II. 14. 24. 25.*) 
 
 c) a transitive verb with its object, is not unfrequently 
 changed into passive in such a manner that the 
 verb alone changes its gender, while the object re- 
 
 i) This construction of the passive is very similar to that of various 
 intransitive verbs mentioned in 32 , 9. 
 
34- CONSTRUCTION OF THE PASSIVE. 131 
 
 tains its place as object ; e. g. TV},} ^^5l T^D^ "l.^'l''! 
 and unto Henoch was born Irad. Gen. 4, 18 conf. 
 21, 5 ; 40, 20; WV, n51 n^ npD-]^ li^l ^;2^ /A^ Wd?^^^ 
 of Esau were told to Rebeka Gen. 27, 42 conf. 2 
 Sam. 21, II; I Kings 18, 13; "^m n^ TO ^^li^l ^^b1 
 neither shall thy name any more be called Q^n, 17,5; 
 Dh^^ K"!^? ^5?^^ '^^'^ ^^^ /^;^</ 2f (3:^ filled with them 
 Ex. I, 6; \^mL n^5 nt$^D n^t Dti^l"! and Moses and 
 Aaron were brought again unto, Pharaoh Ex. 10, 8; 
 \*^^X\ riNl jri.^ /^/ this land be given Num. 32, 5 ; conf. 
 I Kings 2, 21 ; "l^ti^ ns^ T\^^'^^ and the gate is smitten 
 with destruction Jes. 24, 12. The same construction 
 occurs with the participle ; e. g. njH IIOHH n^l "ini^HT 
 and this great store is left 2 Chron. 31, 10. ^) 
 2) The operating cause in the passive is generally 
 expressed by h\ e. g. ^^^ D'J?^ ^'''I? blessed be Abram of 
 (= ^j/) God Gen. 14, 19; 1^ "inj^^l ;2^ /^^ Z^r^ 2/^j in- 
 treated by him Gen. 25, 21 ; ^n ^^;ti^'>. IH^^ D^ the poor 
 is hated even of his friend Pro v. 14, 20. 
 
 2) In many of these instances the passive may be changed into the 
 
 active with an indefinite subject (one). By this it becomes clearer to 
 
 our western way of understanding, that the object may remain in the 
 
 passive, and that it does not agree in number and gender with the 
 
 verb, even when it precedes, seeing that it is not subject but object; 
 
 e- g- 13 "iSy 1^{^ n^pn miDyn ^^^^ hard service wherein thou wast 
 't -._ V . T 't- t -:t 
 
 made to serve = wherein they made thee to serve Jes. 14,3; H^p Dlin 
 
 ^ mn <2! grievous vision is declared unto me Jes. 21,2; D^^H'' nii^lTI 
 
 {^^'li and the arms of the fatherless have been broken Job 22, 9; 
 T \ : 
 
 "nnni D'')^3Ii^ '^pti^ seventy weeks are decreed upon Dan. 9, 24. 
 
132 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 More rarely by ]P (or "D) e. g. 1)V "it^J b'D r\13) ikb) 
 ^13^n ""Dp neither shall all flesh be cut off any more by 
 the waters Gen. 9, 1 1 ; I^JIS 15^ ''li^i^P 'HD a man's steps 
 are directed by the Lord Ps. 37, 23; or by ^^W^\ e.g. 
 DH^ipp DDPl J^n^n riiJ^D //^^ earth is filled with violence 
 through them Gen. 6, 13; or by 3 e.g. "^Jp^^ IDT Dl^^J 
 by man shall his blood be shed Gen. 9, 6; Tin. ""^"I^l 
 ;/^ ;/^jj/ /<?r<3f was commanded by the Lord. Num. 36, 2; 
 DD")") ^3 for in thee the fatherless findeth mercy, Hosea 
 14, 4; finally also as object; e.g. fei^H D*in /^^ shall be 
 devoured by the sword. Jes. i, 20 Conf. 32, 11. 
 
 Rem. 8 Many intransitive verbs sometimes supply the place of pas- 
 sive verbs ; e. g. H^V ^^ ^^ brought up , to be offered Lev. 2 , 12; /^ 
 /^^ booked^ to be entered in "1SDD3 "IDDDH TU^ neither was the num- 
 ber entered into the account I Chron. 27, 245 J^J^^ to be brought forth 
 
 TT 
 
 Deut. 14, 22. 
 
 35. Connection of the noun with the verb through 
 the addition of letters or words. 
 
 i) In most of the cases, mentioned in 32, letter 
 or word prepositions are not unfrequently used. Even 
 the passive object is sometimes connected with b\ e.g. 
 "l.iDt^^ Xr\X\ they slew Abner 2 Sam. 3, 30 conf. 27, 6 E f . 
 
 2) The answer to the question whither? ( 32, 6) 
 is frequently expressed by h)^ or b e. g. "I31p b^ IJ^lJl'^ 
 'y^ and they went to the wilderness of Shur. Ex. 15, 22; 
 Dpiri^DP? w get you unto your burdens Ex. 5, 4. 
 
 This is the only construction when a person is the 
 
35- CONNECTION OF THE NOUN WITH THE VERB. 1 33 
 
 terminus of the action, except in the case of those verbs 
 with which a person may also stand as object (see 
 32, 6). If however the terminus of the action is not 
 a person H appended to the noun (locative D) is also 
 frequently used, sometimes even in answer to the ques- 
 tion where? e. g. l^i? n^"}^ I^DJl \'m T^^^ nifl to go into 
 the land of Canaan , and they came into the land of Ca- 
 naan Gen. 12, 5. Generally, however, the place where 
 any thing occurs is indicated by the prefix 3 : e. g. D^^ 
 YTQ. TD^n wherefore standest thou without? Gen. 24, 31. 
 
 3) Also with the verbs, named in 32, 8, other con- 
 structions than those which have been there set forth 
 not unfrequently occur ; e. g. T^^^_ DDt^ 7^1 and he shall 
 cover his beard Lev. 13, 45 ; tO^^DH i^iPD 'IIDD he hath 
 stripped me of my glory Job 19, 9. 
 
 4) The manner in which anything takes place is 
 usually expressed by 3 (ID?) ; e. g. jgij ID? n^lJiDD they 
 went down into the depths like a stone ^yi. 15, 5; ^T^^'V 
 DHin? set me as a seal Cant. 8, 6 (conf. 32, 9). 
 
 The other conjunctive words or letters are in this 
 case usually omitted ; e. g. n'''}1)?i3 as in her youth Lev. 
 22, 13; Q"a"}.? as in their stable Jes. 5, 17; li^JDH^ D^D ]3^D 
 the waters are frozen as into a stone Job 38. 30; I^Elll 
 '^ "l^pp and they waited for me as for rain Job 29, 23; 
 "113^3 13 pp^On canst thou play with him as with a bird? 
 Job 40, 29. 
 
 Rem. 1 Other prepositions are rarely added; e. g. Hi^D ^IJIIDD 
 within as it were half a furrow i Sam. 14, 14; Hil^i^IDD and Pl^nriDD 
 
134 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 as in the beginning Jes. 1,265 T\T\ ''^DDS as it were before the sword 
 Lev. 26, 36; pn"!P3"^3^I) as much as in all riches Ps. 1 19, 14. 
 
 5) Determinations of time in answer to the question 
 when (Conf. 32, 10^) are usually expressed by 3; 
 e. g. "Ipp3 D?^!!l and he rose early in the morning Gen. 
 22, 3; "^S^nOP DI^J DI1 ^DDI //^ 2e;^?2/ ^z/^rj/ day Est. 2, 11. 
 
 6) The organ also through which an action is per- 
 formed ( 32, 11), is usually expressed by 3 (ID?); e.g. 
 "'D? ^^"11^ with my mouth will I make known Ps. 89, 2 ; 
 195 nil^ zf2V/2 7ny mouth I wilt give thanks Ps. 109, 30; 
 1^ \T\T\^ ''D ID? / intreat him with my mouth Job 19, 16; 
 "ti^^"! ID? Dp^Jp^. ^J^^^^5t1 and I could shake mine head at you 
 Job 16, 4 (conf. ti^{^-l IJ^^;!; Ps. 22, 8); It^^i^")? TiJI and he 
 shall shake his head Jer. 18, 16. Conf. also Ps. 35, 16 
 and Lam. 2, 16 with Job 16, 9. 
 
 The ? instrumentalis is not unfrequently used in He- 
 brew even where we in English have the simple object; 
 e. g. n^D? Dnjl <3:;/^ he lifted up the rod Ex. 7, 20; H^OJ 
 n^lp? ""^^ (conf. li?1p jrii) /^ raise one's voice Jer. 1 2, 8 ; 
 HDt^? ITOD: //2^j ^/^;/ M^ mouth Ps. 22, 8; i:i^.^:^ D?^:! 
 niD^^? thou hast covered us with the shadow of death 
 Ps. 44, 20 ; n''P? "i^^ 'n;^D /A^jj/ opened their mouth at me 
 Job 16, 10 with which conf. H^D TTp^^ Jes. 5, 14; "llDp:i 
 iDin^? Xih'^ she shall rain his food upon him Job 20, 23 
 with which conf. Di;)^ Tppp Ex. 16,4; H^T? l?;i nt^"]D 
 Zion wrung her hands Lam. i, 17. 
 
 (For the rest, consult the Lexicon). 
 
 7) Prepositions are also occasionally used to express 
 
36. CONSTRUCTIO AD SYNESIN. 1 35 
 
 a second object which is added to determine the first 
 object more accurately; e. g. ti^^DH biA iri5]ll ke smote him 
 in the belly 2 Sam. 2, 23; TbT\ b'^_ 13^ they shall smite the 
 judge upon the cheek Michah 4, 14. Conf. Deut. 28, 35. 
 
 CHAPTER XI. THE INFLUENCE OF THE SUBJECT 
 
 UPON THE PREDICATE AS REGARDS GENDER 
 
 AND NUMBER. 
 
 36. Constructio ad Synesin. 
 
 i) The general rule that the predicate agrees in 
 gender and number with the subject also exists in 
 Hebrew. It is, however, frequently not observed, be- 
 cause the attention is directed more to the idea and 
 signification of the subject than to its grammatical form. 
 {Constructio ad synesin). 
 
 2) Hence singularia which express a collective idea, 
 as D}^. ""l-l people , T\^^ family, \^^ flock , or which in cer- 
 tain cases have acquired a collective signification (Conf. 
 2, I c), are by preference construed in the plural ; e. g. 
 l^^iinj^Dn the flock came Gen. 30, 38; ^jDI'' D^S I^M and 
 the house of Joseph went up Judges i, 22; '^^)^ li^lll 
 h)KW^, and the men of Israel saw Judges 9, 55 ; D"^^^. ID.iJl 
 xind Aram fled i Kings 20, 20 ; D^H I^TI the people shall 
 know Jes. 9, 8 ; Dgl IDH the oppressors are consumed 
 Jes. 16, 4; DJlD^n (refers to T},^ v. 10) it shall be broken 
 up Jes. 27, 1 1 ; D^^^. D^ l!?J1 and the people of Aram shall 
 go into captivity. Amos i, 5; V^'J ^1"^ T^:!^) 1DJ the wicked 
 jlee when no man pursueth Prov. 28, i. 
 
136 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 The predicate agrees with the signification of a col- 
 lective noun not only in number but also in gender;, 
 e. g. D'idS Kl^"? ^?^- ^^<^ ^^^ t^^ country wept 2 Sam. 15^ 
 
 23 conf. I Sam. 17, 46, i Kings 10, 24; ^ ^ni^lDI 
 
 Vr\\ and thy issue shall be thine Gen. 48, 6 ; ^pt 
 
 iniD'' ^r^iB n"^3^D and all the increase of thine house shall 
 ^ I ..... J 
 
 die I Sam. 2, 33; Dn:^i:in h^l^\ ^^t^7\, ^nd all the con- 
 gregation of Israel that were assembled i Kings 8, 5 ; 
 Qin^^Q n''"}i:^.^ 1"i5iJ1 ci^d the remnant of the Philistines 
 shall perish Amos i, 8; Hlti^lri ')^'1 "ij^S- ^^^ cows were- 
 plowing Job I, 14. 
 
 Rem. 1. The predicate seldom stands in the singular when the- 
 subject is a coUectivum ; e. g. l*jj i^ti^'i "^ nation shall not lift up 
 
 T 
 
 sward against nation Jes. 2, 4 (conf. however, the parallel place- 
 Michah 4, 3. 
 
 Rem. 2. Constructions such as Gen. 34, 30 are very peculiar 5 ^iJ^^ 
 
 1SD?D TlD 'vohile I (and those with me) are few in number. 
 T : : 
 
 Rem. 3. The construction sometimes commences in the singular 
 (chiefly when the verb precedes the subject) and changes, after the col- 
 lectivum has been named, into the plural; e. g. l73i^r)'''1 D^H J^Dti^^l' 
 in^ ^^1 and when the people heard ... .they mourned .^ and no one- 
 put on etc. Ex. 33, 4. 
 
 5) On the other hand, pluralia with a singular signi- 
 fication, chiefly the so called pluralia excellentiae , ( 2,. 
 2 e), are often construed in the singular ; e. g. Vili;?. Diiit 
 TW\^ 'h jn^. if his master give him a wife Ex. 21, 4;. 
 DDIi l*!^^? DJ1 and his owner also shall be put to death 
 Ex. 21, 29. The same construction however also occurs 
 with other nouns; e. g. O'l^J") the ostrich Job 39, 13 
 
36. CONSTRUCTIO AD SYNESIN. I3f 
 
 and ff. (conf. Talm. Babyl. Menach. 66 b); U^l^ face , 
 front 2 Sam. lo, 9; vmiVj (= ni.t^) field Hab. 3, 17. 
 
 When the subject is a feminine noun with a mascu- 
 line signification the predicate is , for the same reason , 
 construed masculine ; e. g. DDp D^Hp ^^5 the preacher was 
 wise Eccl. 12, 9. 
 
 4) Pluralia which signify animals or material objects, 
 whether of the masc. or fem. gender, are by preference 
 construed with the fem. sing. (conf. i, 3^); e.g. nn^i^l 
 
 "';in m^ nn?ni Dn;p n^p^DIJ^l and thorns shall come up 
 
 in her palaces and it shall be an habitation of 
 
 jackals Jes. 34, 13 nniHi^t. D'^^pDl sorrows have taken hold 
 of her Jer. 49, 24 ; n|Dp "ID \lb (the suffix refers to n^^tSO) 
 he departed not therefrom (i. e. the sins of Jeroboam) 
 
 2 Kings 3, 3; n^lin rm^ (refers to n^^^5) that the 
 
 foot may crush them that the wild beast may trample 
 them (i.e. her eggs) Job 39, 15. 
 
 5) Plural nouns also of persons are sometimes con- 
 strued with the singular; namely when the attention 
 is more directed to the individuals of the subject (conf. 
 553 = omyiis and omnes) ; e. g. Dl^.^ nii3 his branches creep 
 over the wall Gen. 49, 22; I^J^*"?^ (referring to D''};^^^) 
 when he (i. e. the wicked) bringeth it Prov. 21, 27; 
 n^p;i "TiDDD D''j?''1^1 but the righteous are bold as a lion 
 Prov. 28, I; chiefly when the subject is a participle j 
 e. g. "^1-19 T?^i?9'' "I'l"'^ Tt^^ cursed be every 07ie that 
 curseth thee y and blessed be every one that blesseth thee 
 Gen. 27, 29 ; npT" DID H^^iop every one that profaneth it 
 shall surely be put to death Ex. 31, 14; ^^li^p W^ii ""Dia 
 
138 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 as for my people, children are their oppressors ]qs,. 3, I2; 
 I^^P n^5^^*5 ' ^^<^ happy is every one that retaineth her 
 Prov. 3, 18. 
 
 6) With duals the predicate stands in the plur., because 
 no dualform exists of verbs, adjectives and pronouns 
 e. g. msi HNl^ \i''Jl and Lea^s eyes were tender Gen. 29, 17 
 rilV^ n''r)Dt^ her lips were moving i Sam. i, 13; DD''!' 
 li^.^D D''P"!J j^^^r hands are full of blood Jes. i, 15 ; DPI D3 
 X\^ X')^ (referring to Q?rii?) it (i. e. the light of mine eyes) 
 also is gone from me Ps. 38, 1 1 ; sometimes, however, it 
 is found in the sing. (conf. n. 4) ; e. g. nijij Vy^.l ci,nd his 
 eyes were set i Sam. 4, 1 5 ; li^'A'^J! 11''^? Tnni ^?2^ /^/ ^2/r 
 ^/^j gaze upon Zion Michah 4, 1 1 . 
 
 37. The construction of sentences in which the pre- 
 dicate precedes the subject. 
 
 i) The predicate frequently differs in gender and 
 number from its subject because of its position in the 
 sentence ; for the speaker or writer, (as if not yet quite 
 certain about the right grammatical construction), often 
 begins with the most simple form, namely that of the 
 masc. sing., although a fem. or plur. noun will fol- 
 low; e.g. 
 
 a) with the verb as predicate ; ril^^p X\\ let there be 
 lights Gen. i, 14; Dlijn nin33 nti^l and the loftiness 
 of man shall be bowed down Jes. 2, 17; DID?? JD? ^ 
 reproaches shall not depart Michah 2, 6 ; Cti^J ^^\ 
 no women were found Job 42, 15. 
 
 This construction is more rare when the subject 
 
37- PREDICATE PRECEDING ITS SUBJECT. 1 39 
 
 is fern, plur., for then the predicate is construed 
 at least in the plur. masc. i7^ DliD li^^.l fke daughters 
 of Shiloh come out Judges 21, 21 ; UyhT\ 1D3ini be- 
 fore your feet stumble Jer. 13, 16; Vrjp^V ID^.I his 
 branches shall spread Hosea 14, 7. 
 h) with an adj. as predicate; e.g. ^X^^^^ Iti^^ upright 
 are thy judgments Ps. 119, 37; H^lti^^ C^^^IP pITJ 
 salvation is far from the wicked Ps. 119, 155. 
 c) with a participle as predicate ; ^^l^^. Ji^li Dj;") thy ser- 
 vants are shepherds Gen. 47. 3. 
 ^/) with the copula n;n or i^lH; ^T\, X^T^'^ r\\ and all 
 the days of Enoch were Gen. 5, 23; n!^i HIH^ ^6 J "IDDI 
 /2:;/<3^ the flower becometh a ripening grape Jes. 18, 5; 
 
 in^rji i^in 'n ""^S^^^ ^/^^ offerings of the Lord made 
 
 by fire are his inheritance Jos. 13, 14; D^DiJ^H Hlpn 
 ^in 75ri /br //^^ customs of the nations are vanity 
 Jer. 10, 3. 
 2) If, however, in such cases the sentence is con- 
 tinued after the subject, the subsequent predicates agree 
 with the subject in gender and number; e.g. dl^D'^ni 
 ')''nV-- let there be lights and let them be Gen. i, 14; 
 
 ,n^ni l^iin IDOl'X and the flocks conceived and brought 
 
 forth Gen. 30, 39 ; ^JD^ ID^^l D^^^i^. "h^ ^DJl and the 
 
 elders of Israel came unto me and sat before me Ez. 
 14, I (conf. 38, 3). 
 
 Rem. 1. In general it is noticeable that the feminine forms are 
 sparingly used, for, not unfrequently , only that particular predicate 
 which stands nearest to the subject is construed fern. (Conf. 4, 11); 
 e. g. ^ "llli; DTJI nnnD b'S^ sheol from beneath is moved . . . 
 
 ': t; T : 
 
140 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 ... // stirreth up the shades for thee Jes. 14, 9: V-)J^ D^^Di^ hz^. 
 
 V T T : : \ - T 
 
 the land mourneth and languisheth Jes. 33, 9. The same thing may 
 also be noticed as regards adjectives, suffixes, participles, and other 
 words 5 viz. the feminine is only expressed once, and that by the word 
 which is nearest to the subject; e.g. Pl^rT^ .... nRTD pi^ni ^^^ ^^^-S" 
 
 stone shall be God's house Gen. 28, 22: iniDD*) Dn^H ninDD i/" ^^ 
 
 T : T v : 
 
 come to the one company and smite it Gen. 32, 9; pin*) D^llH HII' 
 a great and strong wind i Kings 19, 115 "j^ Dim w^ T\TV\7^ "1^ ^ 
 hand put forth unto tne ^ and ^ lo ^ therein a roll of a book Ez. i, 9. 
 
 In like manner, in a series of successive forms of the second pers^ 
 sing, imperf. , it will more than once be found that the first form alone 
 
 possesses the fem. termination 1" : e. g. n"1Dni ^^VDI ^-^^^ ^^^ 
 
 T : '^. 
 
 gone up and made thee a covenant Jes. 57, 8; "H^^^ ''^''T'i?^^ 
 
 i^llUn*) thou hast caused thy days to draw near^ and thou art come 
 
 Ez. 22, 4 ; pnii!? n^nn Titian t^^u shalt drink thou shall 
 
 be laughed to scorn Ez. 23, 32. 
 
 Finally, the masc. instead of the fem. is sometimes found in a sub- 
 ordinate sentence 5 e. g. pjQ^ {^7 ^^ fi^^ lho,l ^^ not blown Job 20,26. ')> 
 
 Rem. 2. The change of gender in Nah. 3, 15 is very irregular 
 nini^S *'"13Dnn ^rO "13Dnn ^o-ke thyself many as the cankerworm y 
 make thyself many as the locust. 
 
 3) The instances in which a suffix, referring ta 
 something plural, is used with a distributive sense in 
 
 the sing., are numerous ; e. g. 1W H^D^I '^:;f^)K b'^ 
 
 against thine enemies and thou carriest them away 
 
 captive Deut. 21, lO; conf. 28,48; TOp D^DTO ^;.^ 
 
 i) Instances such as Lev. 2, i ; 5, i are of a different kind, for 
 the fem. noun ^Di ^s referring to a person of the male sex, is in the 
 continuation of the sentence construed as masc. 
 
38. COMPOUND SUBJECTS. I4I 
 
 two cherubim each ten cubits high i Kings 6, 23; 
 
 1^ pl^l D113^ to the nations and he will hiss for 
 
 them Jes. 5, 26; n^niip")^$ n^?iJ1 V'T^? upon his cities 
 
 und it will devour the castles thereof Hosea 8, 14 (See 
 Abn-Ezra on this place); in!i^3 ni"lJ?D )^tr\i\, canst thou 
 lead forth the Mazzaroth in their season? Job 38, 32. 
 
 Rem. 3. The instances where the predicate, even when following 
 its subject, differs from it in gender and number are to be explained 
 on the one hand by the tendency to use the third pers. plur. masc. of 
 -Jinj? instead of the third pers. plur. fem. ; e. g. Vrliip^^l. ID^i^ DNll 
 ')"]711 and God healed his wife and maid servants ^ and they bore child- 
 ren Gen. 20, 17; ]1D"T' ^ri^DDI ^f^^ ^y high ways shall be exalted 
 Jes. 49, 1 1 5 l^pD^ Vni''"nni ^'^^ their women with child shall be ripped 
 
 -up Hosea 14, i ; ni'^^rT'T D^ti^J^'^DI DID^D r\r\^\^^\ HIIlD the daughters 
 T :-; : t:t :-;- t 
 
 saw her and called her blessed^ yea the queens and the concubines ^ and 
 they praised her Cant. 6, 9 (Conf. 18, 3 Rem. )j and on the other 
 hand by the circumstance that the predicate is often a participle which 
 should be considered as a noun ; e. g. V^*) ni^tSD nHD? ^^^ coucheth 
 at the door Gen. 4, 7. 
 
 The same irregularity also occurs a few times with the verb rT^ni 
 
 TT 
 
 .g- r\X\ ntD^yi and it was dark Gen. 15, 17; r\X\^ niTH "^"Tm 
 T T T T.- V : T - - : - : 
 
 and four parts shall be your own Gen. 47, 24; n"lTJ^7 n^D^ Dnj^ miH 
 
 T : VT V : T 
 
 vne law shall be to him that is homeborn Ex. 12, 49; 1^ pj'^D D^D ''iD 
 / had servants born in my house Eccl. 2, 7. In the last example ^^ H^H 
 may also be considered as a new sentence and may be translated and 
 homeborn slaves^ also these were given to me. 
 
 38. The construction of subjects consisting of more 
 than one word. (Compound subjects). 
 
 i) When the subject consists of a noun in st. constr. 
 
142 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 connected with another noun, the predicate agrees in 
 gender and number with the nomen regens. Sometimes ,> 
 however, it agrees with the nomen rectum, chiefly when 
 this contains the main idea of both nouns ; e. g. ^m ^p 
 ^V!i^ TO? the voice of thy brother's blood crieth Gen. 4 
 10; *) conf. Jes. 52, 8; Jer. 10, 22; Job 29, 10 ; "innp\' 
 li^sp Vy7^ and his chosen captains are sunk Ex. 15, 4; 
 n^nn ""ID n^^^ V^i when the plague of leprosy is in a man 
 Lev. 13, 9; riDn^Qn \i?) yh^ nn^n ^5 that the battle wa^ 
 set against him 2 Sam. lo, 9; (in this instance the verb 
 agrees with the nom. rectum , although it precedes) ; 
 1to:s;^1 -l-JP. \:)? ni33 n^j?. -ISPP ^mj\ and the residue of the 
 number of the archers , the mighty men of the children 
 of Kedar, shall be feiv Jes. 21, 17; ^^r\ Win lepp') and 
 the number of his months is cut off Job 21, 21 ; D''^^ 1^ 
 HDipn ^V^y\^ and multitude of years should teach wisdom 
 Job 32, 7. 
 
 For the same reason also the predicate generally 
 stands in the plur. with the noun ^53 ; e. g. ""Ip? h"^ I^H^l 
 Dl^^ ^;2<^ all the days of Adam were Gen. 5, 5 ; ^3 IJDJ 
 )i^^D "'5^'' ^^^ ^-^^ inhabitants of Canaan are melted away 
 Ex. 15, 15; with the cardinal numbers from three to- 
 ten y and with n??p and ^^. 
 
 Rem. 1. With ^3 however the predicate not unfrequently stands in 
 the sing. ; e. g. pj^ 1?^^ ^3 IH""! ^^^ ^^-^ ^-^^ days of Noah were Gen. 9,, 
 29; nSin^ n^n l^'^lDriD !pD1 '^^'^ ^^'^'^ ^^^' pleasant things are laid 
 
 i) ^p is by some considered as an exclamation; e.g. the voice of 
 thy brother'' s bloody that crieth or lo ^ thy brother'' s blood crieth! 
 
38. COMPOUND SUBJECTS. I43 
 
 waste Jes. 64, 10; V^i^lB ^T. ^^^"pIT^D all the ways of a man are 
 clean in his own eyes Pro v. 16, 2. 
 
 Rem. 2. The predicate occasionally agrees with the nom. rectum 
 for no other reason than that it is nearest to it \ e. g. Q'^Dll D'''i!!}5 Dti^P 
 the bows of the mighty men are broken i Sam. 2, 45 QIJ^ DiriDJ "i''^ 
 ^Q^ the lofty looks of man shall be brought low Jes. 2, 1 1 ; l^iV ^'jj^')' 
 ^HiJ^ ^^5 DH D^ as for the light of mine eyes , it also is gone from me 
 Ps. 38, II. 
 
 2) With two or more subjects connected by the con- 
 junction \ the predicate generally stands in the plur., 
 provided it follows the subject; e. g. )^ T^JJI J^nj 
 
 iriS^I' seedtime and harvest shall not cease Gen. 8, 
 
 22; Di^pT n")ti^"l Dn^Di^^ now Abraham and Sarah were old 
 Gen. 18, II; D'l^ini ^^OI^DI T^5 ^^J^ -^^^-^ ^^'^ ^^J'^ daugh- 
 ters shall be given Deut. 28, 32. *) If however the pre- 
 dicate precedes, then it generally agrees in number and 
 gender with the subject which stands nearest to it; e. g. 
 V^5^ rii i^DJl and Noah and his sons went in Gen. 7, 7 ; 
 HDi^l HTIi^ "lQi^''1 ^?2<^ /^^r brother and mother said Gen* 
 24, 55; n^l^^'l ^^!l.^ D^ ^^ni ^/^^^ Z^^>^ <^/.$-^ ^/^^ her children 
 came 7iear Gen. 33, 7; Vrii^l nilD^ ^y^and Jiidah and his 
 brethren came Gen. 44, 14; b^^^. ';}?') H^D ^^^:^ Moses and 
 the children of Israel sang Ex. 15, i; pni<"l D^"}p "IBIHI 
 and Miriam and Aaron spoke Num. 1 2, i ; IH D{5^t^|'l 
 Wii:^! and David and his men took them away 2 Sam. 5, 21* 
 
 i) In Ex. 21, 4 riTir) n^l^'^l nii^J^n th^ ^(A and her children shall 
 
 T VT T T 
 
 ^^^ nti^i^n is evidently considered as the principal person. 
 
144 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 Rem. 3. The predicate occasionally stands in the plur. even when 
 it precedes : e. g. DSi^ni Hpti^D li^tDPI i^^ butler and the baker 
 
 committed offence Gen. 40, i ; H'^!}^'' ^!D*I t^lJ^ D''JDi ihe earth and all 
 
 T V : T : 1 V V : 
 
 the inhabitants thereof are dissolved Ps. 75, 4: HID^li*! ^T\ ^Xh'^'^ 
 
 V T : - : ' V \ T : 
 
 let the darkness and shadow of death claim it for their own Job 3, 5. 
 On the other hand the predicate rai-ely stands in the sing, when it 
 follows ; e. g. ^7 n?2ti'^ iTTlppI ]^ti^ ointment and perfume rejoice the 
 heart Prov. 27, 9, in which case also the masc. form is evidently pre- 
 ferred to the fem. 
 
 3) The deviations from the natural construction in 
 the case of more than one subject, are restricted to 
 the first predicate, for when more predicates follow, 
 these stand in the plur. e. g. in^^l b^DI t^P^?^5. Dgl and 
 Abimelech and Picol rose up and returned Gen. 21, 32; 
 ni!lli"iril n'^ri^i^yi. ng3"1 Dj^ni and Rebekah and her damsels 
 rose up and rode Gen. 24, 61 ; ^J1Q^^^1 T\'^\ ^m j^ril and 
 Rachel and Lea answered and said Gen. 31, 14; WJ^_ 
 linn^^'l tH:T\ n^jj? DJ and Leah also and her children came 
 near and bowed themselves Gen. 33, 7. (Conf. 37, 2). 
 
 CHAPTER Xn. SEQUENCE OE THE DIFFERENT 
 PARTS OF THE SENTENCE. 
 
 39. Place of the Subject and of the Predicate. 
 
 i) The Hebrews are fond of placing the principal 
 idea or word at the beginning of the sentence. The 
 other portions of the sentence follow according to the 
 greater or less value which they have in the opinion of 
 
39- PLACE OF THE SUBJECT AND OF THE PREDICATE. 145 
 
 the Speaker or writer, so that the relative preference 
 given to the various portions of the sentence may serve 
 as a standard for estimating the importance or value 
 which the speaker or writer assigns to them. 
 
 Rem. 1. The portion of the sentence, on which the greatest em- 
 phasis rests , is seldom placed at the end ; e. g. ... H^i^n D^"n!3in VTi) 
 
 V "T 'T :- t: 
 
 ?J|327 7^^ ^^^ tkese words shall be upon thine heart Deut. 6, 6 ; 
 and in order to strengthen the emphasis, the subject already expressed 
 is repeated even after one single intermediate sentence ; e. g. t*1ii^ri 
 
 Ti^P Ti^P f^'lJ^n niDltO ")^i^^ the land which we passed through 
 
 ..... is an exceedingly good land Num. 14, 7. 
 
 2) According to the principle of n. i the verb gene- 
 rally stands first in verbal sentences; the more so, be- 
 cause the subject is already implied in the form of the 
 verb. Yet even in nominal sentences the nomen expressing 
 the predicate frequently precedes the subject, because 
 the predicate may in many cases be considered as the 
 principal word. 
 
 3) The subject, however, generally takes the first place 
 in proverbial language and in comparisons; e. g. DDPI |5 
 DNI n^t'"^ a wise son maketh a glad father Pro v. 10, i ; 
 D'^p^y 73 mD7P ^niD7P thy kingdom is an everlasting king- 
 dom Ps. 145, 13; nV1D3 ^^^ for thou art even as Pharao 
 Gen. 44, 18. 
 
 4) The subject stands first also in verbal sentences, 
 which serve to communicate something which is ne- 
 cessary to the context, but for which no fit opportunity 
 has yet presented itself [pluperfect), or shall present 
 
146 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 itself in the continuation of the narrative ; e. g. Hsfel 
 n^dti^ H'2'^ now the queen of Sheba had heard i Kings 
 10, I ; n^^ DnVD ^.^p n'^lD Pharaoh, king of Egypt had 
 gone up I Kings 9, 16; iriDJ irin nn^H p.ijn^ /<?^ the earth 
 was waste and formless Gen. i, 2. 
 
 Sentences with the adverb D"ltD may fitly be added 
 to this group ; e. g. \^^^ H^ni D^^ rmr\ XV'^ by\ no plant 
 of the field was yet on the earth Gen. 2, 5 ; D"l.^ ^i^lD^I 
 J^T now Samuel did not yet know the Lord i Sam. 3, 7. 
 
 5) The subject, further, naturally stands first whenever 
 it forms the principal part of the narrative, or when for 
 some other reason it requires to be prominently set forth; 
 e. g. 1"1D3 D^Dn*) now the waters had increased exceedingly 
 Gen. 7, 19 (the narrator commences to describe the par- 
 ticulars of the flood , and especially the fall of water). 
 )n >^^lp Xyi\ now Noah found grace in the eyes of the 
 Lord Gen. 6, 8 (Noah will be the chief person in the 
 subsequent history). "^^^''ti^H ^X\T\ the serpent (therefore 
 no human being) beguiled me Gen. 3, 13; D^^ D"p^ 
 Abram dwelled in the land of Canaan Gen. 13, 12 (in 
 contrast with Lot). 
 
 Relative and interrogative pronouns when subjects 
 also stand first. (Conf. 40, 3). 
 
 6) The predicate, if an adjective, participle or pronoun, 
 stands first in nominal sentences ; e. g. in^nD l>^p D1 Joel 
 2, 1 1 ; ^3:iiJ nnp or else I die Gen. 30, i ; T\)^ rh::^ ^T 
 for I fear him Gen. 32, 12; "l^'^H ^\ M^ ^^ the thing 
 Ex. 16, 16; D^"lD^n Tb\^ these are the words Deut. i, i. 
 
 If, however, the predicate is a noun then the subject 
 
39- PLACE OF THE SUBJECT AND OF THE PREDICATE. 1 4 7 
 
 stands first ; e. g. jlti^iD "IHJSiri Dli^ the name of the first is 
 Pishon Gen. 2, 1 1 ; except when special emphasis is to 
 be laid on the predicate ; e. g. DHJ^ "ID^ dust thou art 
 Gen. 3, 19; Wi!^ Gen. 12, 13; rm n^.^ll ^3 "llDni and 
 a ripening grape the flower becometh Jes. 18, 5 ; flD U)^ 
 1113 D^;p^^ 2^ my strength then of stone Job 6, 12. 
 
 Rem. 2. Expressions such as QH^ PID ^^^y ^^^^ ^ mouth Ps. 115,5; 
 ^7 riD w^<!!/ ailest thou? belong to the same class. With this kind of 
 sentence, the predicate of which is merely expressed by 7 with a suffix, 
 
 the Hebrew writers even went further, and joined the subject with the 
 predicate into one word, by appending to the noun of the predicate a 
 suffix; e.g. DH^T Ps. 115, 7 = UTp^ D^V ^^fTTi = C^ ^^.^H' 
 j^J^iQ!) = '^ ti^Il^lQI and he had a concubine Gen. 22, 24; DD^""!?!! = 
 DD^ i^^Di ^f y^ -^^^^ ^ prophet Num. 12, 6. ) 
 
 V T T 
 
 Rem. 3. Concerning the place of the attributive adjective see 4, 10 
 and Rem. 3. 
 
 40. The places of the other parts of the sentence. 
 
 i) The copula in nominal sentences stands generally 
 last, when it is a pers. pron. of the third pers., (See 
 31, 2; 37, \ d) but it precedes the predicate when 
 the copula is the verb n^H. For examples see 31, 3. 
 
 The object in verbal sentences has its place after the 
 subject and predicate. 
 
 Adverbial determinations, chiefly those of place and 
 
 i) On the other hand some writers sever the suffix from its noun, 
 and place it separately, after having connected it with a letter prepo- 
 sition; e. g. 1^ miiD = ''n"1ii?D o^i of mine affliction Jonah 2, 3. Conf. 
 
 TT XT' 
 
 the author's Essay, Darche Hannesigah, L. B. 1881, 60, 2. 
 
148 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 time, stand by preference as near as possible (either 
 before or after) to the predicate. 
 
 The negation however stands immediately before the 
 predicate. 
 
 Rem. 1. The object is seldom placed between the negation and the 
 
 verb \ e. g. npti^H ^"i^ D^P ^? ^-^^^ ^^^^ ^^^ given water to the weary 
 
 to drink Job 22, 7 ; \lThX> D'^^D )ib i^lHI a-nd one do not whet the edge 
 
 Eccl. 10, 10; seldom also the subject; e.g. "i^pl^ti^ 'D ^ the Lord 
 
 TT : 
 
 hath not sent me Num. 16, 29: "Tj^n "^^ )lh mine heart went not 
 
 '-T 
 
 2 Kings 5, 26; {^*i;31 n^n ViD^ \^ ''3 ^ godless man shall not come 
 T i-T tt: 
 
 before him Job 13, 16; or a determination; e.g. ^inHTl ^3^ "Hli^^P ^i^ 
 
 /<z>?;^ w^ ^c'/f ^w;|/ in thy long suffering ^^x. 15, 15; ^^rT'DlD ^Di^!3 7i^ 
 
 rebuke me not in thine anger Ps. 6, 2; ^^H Plp^ IHI^D '^ when he 
 
 dieth he shall carry nothing away Ps. 49, 18; ^jPl^'DIi^ ^TIDT ^^ '^ 
 
 I will not rebuke thee for thy sacrifices. Ps. 50, 8 ; Qlti^i '^^'^ ^^ '^ 
 
 "lIV ^"^^ ^^ needeth not further to consider a man Job 34, 23, Conf. 
 25 Rem. 8. 
 
 2) The deviations from the rule stated in n. i have 
 
 their ground in the greater emphasis the writer wishes 
 
 to lay upon one or other part of the sentence. Hence: 
 
 (a) the object in verbal sentences sometimes stands 
 
 before the subject; e.g. ]ri"3n rbm n^^^H n^ Dnpi 
 
 and the priest shall write these curses in a book 
 
 Num. 5,23; n)("T. ^^"J nniDn evil shall slay the wicked 
 
 Ps. 34, 22 ; or even before the verb ; e. g. '5i^p"ini 
 
 1^ njl and take the goods unto thyself Gen. 14, 21 ; 
 
 ^^IP njn -15TI n^ Oi^ if thou shalt do this thing 
 
 Ex. 18, 23; ^Vmq nninn nop / have found the book 
 
41- CASE ABSOLUTE. 1 49 
 
 of the law 2 Kings 22, 8; DHr. D^!:'?^^ '^^M as one 
 that comforteth the mourners Job. 29, 25. 
 
 Rem. 2. The arrangement: object, subject, verb, is very rare; e.g. 
 Ilin i^^DUn ^113 "nm i/ ^'^^ prophet had imposed on thee some great 
 
 V T- T T T 
 
 thing 2 Kings 5, 13; and that of: subject, object, verb, equally rare 
 and only poetical ; e. g. niH IT* ^103 t^^ weaned child shall put its 
 
 TT T T 
 
 hand Jes. n, 8; n^^^TT) "'"l^^^ Din^jpl ^^ bows shall dash the 
 young men in pieces Jes. 13, 18; ppl ""n^Dn 'D t^^ Lord will receive 
 my prayer Ps. 6, 10; jpID^ P"*!^ '"^ ^^^ Z^r^ trieth the righteous 
 Ps. II, 5. 
 
 [b] the adverbial determination stands before the verb ; 
 e.g. D''n''p^^ ^-13 n^ti^^ns Gen. I, I. 
 
 3) A few adverbs of time, such as T\V\^^ T^ almost 
 always stand at the beginning of the sentence; others 
 such as TO' TDH generally stand after the verb. 
 
 All particles of interrogation and "l^i:^ invariably stand 
 at the beginning of the sentence. 
 
 41. Case absolute. 
 
 The greatest emphasis, which can be given to an 
 idea, is obtained by placing it first [absolute), quite in- 
 depently of the place it should naturally have in the 
 sentence , and by repeating it in the subsequent sen- 
 tence; viz. by means of a pronoun when it is subject, 
 and otherwise by means of a pronominal suffix (conf. 
 c^est moi, quon a accuse). This subsequent sentence 
 should then be considered not so much as a new sen- 
 tence, but as the predicate of the idea which has been 
 placed first. This predicate may be expressed in the 
 
150 HEBREW SYNTAX. 
 
 form of a nominal sentence, the examples of which 
 have been already given in 30, 3 and Rem. 2, or by 
 a verbal sentence ; e. g. "l^ti^^n ^""H 'H 1315 the blessing 
 of the Lord, it maketh rich Prov. 10, 22; conf. v. 24; 
 ^^:^ T\mj n^t i^npn ^ "^W^ nt^ Sarai thy wife, thou shalt 
 not call her name Sarai Gen. 17, 15; ^T\\ "^113 ""^^^ as 
 for me, the Lord has led me on the way Gen. 24, 27; 
 ']:l;5^ti^^^ >i:i^ nD^^n 15 n^ O^l and also of the son of the bond- 
 woman will I make a nation Gen. 21, i^; TDVH D^H H^l 
 D**!}^?. in^ <3:;2<^ <^i- for the people, he removed them to the 
 cities Gen. 47,21; DpHD? It^Di Hj^ti^n ""^S opti^ Shechem , 
 my son, he longeth for your daughter Gen. 34, 8; 
 
 !)ti^-|T ^.1:1 \^b^' ^W '^yi the root of Jesse of him 
 
 the nations shall anxiously inquire Jes. 11, 10 ; DJU riDn* 
 pn)" ^ but as for them, their way is not right 'Kz. 33, 17; 
 DHI^^ nn^ ^"jni Pi2 summer and winter, thou hast made 
 them Ps. 74, I J (conf. 10, i). 
 
 Rem. 1. We occasionally find such a casus absolutus introduced by 
 
 : T : V T .. .-; T I vTT V -; ': 
 
 saints that are in the land ^ they are the excellent in whom is all my 
 
 delight Ps. 16, 3. 45 sometimes even when it expresses the subject 5 
 
 e.g. 1")ti^^ tODti^D^ D^'nti^^P^ and as for princes ^ they shall rule according 
 T T : : T : 
 
 to judgment Jes. 32, i ; nDH nnj^til ]P DltO i^lH "in D^^ as for a 
 living dog^ it is better than a dead lion Eccl. 9, 4; yy\T\ ^Dti^ti^^ ""ilD/*) 
 fl^ aj for the sons of Issachar , Thola and Puah etc. i Chr. 7, i ; 
 0^^ V^V "llliy ^D^ ^z'^rjj/ one that passeth by it shall be astonished 
 2 Chr. 7, 21. 
 
 The casus absolutus is now and then also introduced by r)i^5 e.g. 
 
 I^D^ !3ini3 1^n"l!3Q ^3 rii^l ^^^ ^-^ f^^ ^^^ ^^^ fugitives 
 
 ....- T t: T : 
 
41- CASE ABSOLUTE. 151 
 
 they shall fall by the sword Ez. 17, 21; ID i^^ I^H IIDV HJ^ as 
 for the pillar of cloudy it departed not Nehem. 9, 19. This Hi^ is 
 sometimes also placed before that part of the sentence which is 
 repeated after the whole sentence has been already pronounced, for 
 the purpose of bringing it forward more prominently 5 e. g. inS^Dn "Iti^i^ 
 
 T&)^ ''0^5'D ^^^ ''^ ^^ concerning the evil that I have brought 
 
 upon Jerusalem , yea as regards all that I have brought upon her 
 Ez. 14, 22; conf. Judges 20, 44. 46. fii^ with the signification as 
 regards is very clear in Jer. 23, 33. i^tfi'^ H^ Di^ t^ou shall say unto 
 
 T 
 
 them; as regards (your question) What burden! I will cast you off etc. 
 We have however already seen (10 Rem. 7) that generally cer- 
 tain words' or ideas, which have already been indicated by a suffix, are 
 purposely repeated to revive the reader's attention. 
 
 2) In 30 Rem. 2 , we have seen that with senten- 
 ces of this kind the suffix referring to the main word 
 may sometimes be omitted. Examples of such an omis- 
 sion are Michah 7, 1 1 pn pGII ^T\T\ U^ instead of IpH 
 as for that day, its decrie shall be far removed \ Ps. 9, 7. 
 
 m^.^ niDin idh D?i^n instead of vniBin or ^^oi3in the 
 
 enemy are come to an end, his ruins are for ever\ or 
 
 thou enemy . . . thy ruins etc. In this case the pre- 
 dicate is frequently introduced by \ (the so called \ 
 apodosis) ; e. g. *lpn ^\ Viti^ "ISDD (namely |n^) the number 
 of his years is unsearchable Job 36 , 26 ; T\^x\ n^BH 
 b^'yv: \;5 "^in? ^n;D^) (namely 13) as for this house . . . 
 . . . / will dwell (in it) amongst the children of Israel 
 
 1 Kings 6, 12; Wr;^^ )ib\ I^HDtf^ Tm^ (namely n^) as for 
 the commandment of his lips, I did not reject it ]o\i 23, 12. 
 
 Rem. 2. The *| apodosis^ however, appears also where the suffix has 
 
152 
 
 HEBREW SYNTAX. 41. CASE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 not been omitted; e.g. DD^Dli^l "^i^iti^D ^^ fo'*' those that hate me^ 
 I will cut them off 2 Sam. 22, 41 ; n3 IDNlp''^ "'n^lini (^nd as for my 
 law ^ they have rejected it Jer. 6, 19; chiefly when the casus absolutus 
 indicates the subject, and is introduced by another word; e.g. iH^I 
 
 liiCI D^"li^^in ^^^ ^5' y^'^ them who were left^ they were scattered 
 
 1 Sam. II, 11; riiripl nD*l!!}n nn^l ^ now as for tMs pre- 
 sent let it be given i Sam. 25, 27. 
 
 3) When such a casus absolutus is expressed by a 
 participle, it not unfrequently contains a conditional 
 sentence ; e. g. Dj^") Din;^5^ ]^)2 T\T\ ^3 if anyone slayeth 
 Cainy vengeance shall be taken on him sevenfold Gen. 4, 
 15; l^'jm ^XW ny^^i'p y^rp ^p -l^ii^. at which, if anyone 
 heareth it, both his ears shall tingle i Sam. 3, 11 , conf. 
 
 2 Kings 21, 12; 13 T&i^\ Dpn "iSpi"* ^y one begetteth a wise 
 child, he shall have joy of him, Prov. 23, 24. (In Keri 
 
 T^W l^l^l and he that begetteth a wise child shall 
 
 have joy of him). irl3n y^ )^y\ PIDT D^T W\^ ^3 when any 
 m,an offered, the priesfs servant came, i Sam. 2, 13. 
 Conf. 28, 2 e. 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 1, 1. 16, 3 
 
 Gen. 3, 
 
 13. 
 
 11, 3 c 
 
 32, 2 
 
 
 
 39, 5 
 
 40, 2 ^ 
 
 3, 
 
 15. 
 
 33, 4 
 
 1, 2. 4, 7 
 
 3, 
 
 16. 
 
 28, 2 b 
 
 31, 3 
 
 3, 
 
 19. 
 
 39, 6 
 
 39, 4 
 
 3, 
 
 22. 
 
 5 Rem. 4 
 
 1, 4. 32, 12 
 
 
 
 16, 1 
 
 1, 6. 17, 3 
 
 3, 
 
 22. 
 
 25 Rem. 12 
 
 1, 11. 32, 5 
 
 
 
 27, 6 C <aj 
 
 1, 14. 37, 1 
 
 4, 
 
 2. 
 
 6, Rem. 1 
 
 37, 2 
 
 
 
 6, 4 
 
 1, 16. 8, 2 
 
 4, 
 
 4. 
 
 28, 2* 
 
 1, 26. 27, 6 A r 
 
 4, 
 
 7. 
 
 32 Rem. 5 
 
 1, 30. 12, 1 
 
 
 
 37 Rem. 3 
 
 2, 5. 15, 7 
 
 4, 
 
 9. 
 
 26, 3 
 
 39, 4 
 
 4, 
 
 10. 
 
 38, 1 
 
 2, 7. 33, 3 
 
 4, 
 
 13. 
 
 8, 3 
 
 2, 10. 15, 5 
 
 4, 
 
 14. 
 
 16, 2. 
 
 30, 2 
 
 4, 
 
 15. 
 
 9, 9 
 
 2, 11. 12, 1 
 
 
 
 41, 3 
 
 39, 6 
 
 4, 
 
 18. 
 
 34, 1 c 
 
 2, 12. 31, 1 
 
 4, 
 
 20. 
 
 32, 8 c 
 
 2, 16. 15, 6 
 
 4, 
 
 26. 
 
 10, 1 
 
 2, 18. 22, 3 
 
 
 
 19, 4c 
 
 30, 5 
 
 5, 
 
 3. 
 
 27, 6Ar 
 
 2, 19. 10 Rem. 7 
 
 5, 
 
 5. 
 
 38, 1 
 
 2, 23. 30 Rem. 1 
 
 5, 
 
 23. 
 
 37, 1 rf 
 
 2, 24. 15, 5 
 
 5, 
 
 24. 
 
 25, 2Cr 
 
 3, 1. 28, 5 A /3 
 
 6, 
 
 2. 
 
 32. 12 
 
 31, 3 
 
 6, 
 
 8. 
 
 39, 5 
 
 3, 4. 22 Rem. 2 
 
 6, 
 
 13. 
 
 33, 3 
 
 3, 5. 28, 2<9 
 
 
 
 34, 2 
 
 3, 11. 25, 3 ^ 
 
 6, 
 
 16. 
 
 33, 3 
 
154 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 Gen. 6, 17. 
 
 7, 1. 
 
 1, 2. 
 
 7, 4. 
 
 7, 7. 
 
 7, 9. 
 
 7, 19. 
 
 7, 21. 
 
 8, 4. 
 8, 7. 
 8, 8. 
 8, 17. 
 
 8, 22. 
 
 9, 2. 
 9, 3. 
 9. 4. 
 9, 6. 
 9, 7. 
 9, 9. 
 9, 10. 
 9, 11. 
 9, 14. 
 9, 20. 
 9, 29, 
 
 IL, 3. 
 11, 4. 
 11, 7. 
 
 11, 9. 
 
 11, 10. 
 
 11, 27. 
 
 11. 28. 
 
 11, 30. 
 
 12, 4. 
 12, 5. 
 
 12, 11. 
 12, 12. 
 12. 13. 
 
 12, 14. 
 
 12, 17. 
 
 13, 2. 
 13. 8. 
 
 23 Rem. 2 
 27, 6 D a 
 31, 2 
 23, 3 
 38, 2 
 14. 1 
 9, 8d 
 24, 2 
 39, 5 
 27, 6 A 
 2, 9 
 22,4 
 26, 6 
 27, 6 A ^ 
 38, 2 
 10. 5 
 31, 2 
 27, 6A,, 
 34, 2 
 19. 5 
 30, 3 
 27, 6 A^ 
 34, 2 
 32, 5 
 
 2C 
 
 Rem. 1 
 
 5 
 
 6A^ 
 
 2 
 
 21 
 38 
 32 
 27 
 15. 
 28, 4 e 
 19, 4fl5 
 16, 3 
 32 
 
 1.3 
 
 6, 4 
 
 25 Rem. 8 
 9, 5 
 6 Rem 
 35, 2 
 4, 15 
 16, 2 
 18, 2 flf 
 28, 7 c 
 39, 6 
 27, 6F/3 
 32, 12 
 32, 5. 
 3, \a, 
 6, 1 
 
 Gen. 13, 9. 
 
 
 
 28, 3e 
 
 13, 11. 
 
 
 
 13, Tc 
 
 13. 12. 
 
 
 
 39, 5 
 
 13, 13. 
 
 
 30, 2 
 
 14, 1. 
 
 
 
 16, 5 
 
 14, 4. 
 
 
 
 32, 10 
 
 14, 10. 
 
 
 
 2, 6 
 
 
 
 
 5 Rem. 1 
 
 14, 18. 
 
 
 
 30 Rem. 1 
 
 14, 19. 
 
 
 
 34, 2 
 
 14, 21. 
 
 
 
 40, 2 a 
 
 14, 23. 
 
 
 
 19, 5. 
 
 15. 2. 
 
 
 28, 2/ 
 
 15, 3. 
 
 
 
 23, 3.6 
 
 
 
 
 32, 13 
 
 15, 4. 
 
 
 
 23, 3 
 
 15, 13. 
 
 
 
 12. 5 
 
 15, 14. 
 
 
 
 23, 3 
 27, 6 A^ 
 
 15, 15. 
 
 
 
 19, 5 
 
 15, 17. 
 
 
 
 16, 5 
 
 
 
 
 37 Rem. 3 
 
 15, 19. 
 
 
 28, 2 a 
 
 15. 20. 
 
 
 
 28, 2 
 
 16, 2. 
 
 
 
 27, 6Cr 
 
 16, 12. 
 
 
 
 6 Rem. 2 
 
 17, 4. 
 
 
 
 30, 3 
 
 17, 5. 
 
 
 
 33, 3. 
 
 
 
 
 34, \c 
 
 17. 8. 
 
 
 
 4, 3. 
 
 17, 10. 
 
 
 
 5 Rem. 5 
 
 17, 11. 
 
 
 34, \b 
 
 17, 14. 
 
 
 
 34, lb 
 
 17, 15. 
 
 
 
 41, 1 
 
 17, 17. 
 
 
 
 26 Rem. 4 
 
 17, 18. 
 
 
 
 28, 5 Fa 
 
 17, 24. 
 
 
 
 34, lb 
 
 17, 25. 
 
 
 
 34, lb 
 
 18, 1. 
 
 
 
 23, 3 
 
 18, 6. 
 
 
 
 21, 3 
 
 18. 7. 
 
 
 
 10 Rem. 6 
 
 18, 10. 
 
 
 
 27, 6r/3 
 
 18, 11. 
 
 
 
 38, 2 
 
 18, 14. 
 
 
 
 13. 4 
 
 
 
 
 27, 6 Cy 
 
 18, 18. 
 
 
 
 28, 4^d 
 
 18, 20. 
 
 
 28, 4 c 
 
 18, 24. 
 
 
 
 9, 3 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 155 
 
 Gen. 
 
 18, 24. 32 Rem. 5 
 
 Gen. 24, 
 
 21. 26, 6 
 
 18, 25. 27, 6 F ^ 
 
 24, 
 
 23. 11, 5 
 
 18, 26. 32 Rem. 5 
 
 24, 
 
 25. 28, 5 A flj 
 
 18, 28. 27, 6 A s 
 
 24, 
 
 27. 41, 1 
 
 32, 8 b 
 
 24, 
 
 30. 4, 3 
 
 19, 1. 28, 2/ 
 
 24, 
 
 31. 23 Rem. 3 
 
 19, 2. 28, 4 fl? 
 
 
 35, 2 
 
 19, 8. 13, 4 
 
 24, 
 
 40. 16, 1 
 
 19, 11. 3, 1 c 
 
 24, 
 
 44. 28, 5 A a 
 
 19, 14. 6 Rem. 8 
 
 24, 
 
 55. 38, 2 
 
 19, 15. 28, 5 C a 
 
 24, 
 
 58. 26, 9 
 
 19, 16. 22, 2 
 
 24, 
 
 61. 38, 3 
 
 19, 17. 15, 4. 
 
 24, 
 
 63. 1, 1 
 
 19, 18. 25. 2B/3 
 
 25, 
 
 1. 21, 2Cr 
 
 19, 33. 3 Rem. 5 
 
 25, 
 
 19. 16, 2 
 
 20, 2. 27, 6D 
 
 25, 
 
 21. 34, 2 
 
 20, 3. 28, 2/ 
 
 25, 
 
 25. 19, 4d 
 
 20, 7. 18, 3 
 
 25, 
 
 26. 22, 2 
 
 20, 9. 15, 6 
 
 25, 
 
 34. 32, 1 
 
 20, 17. 37 Rem. 3. 
 
 26, 
 
 7. 19 Rem. 2 
 
 21. 5. 34, 1 c 
 
 26, 
 
 10. 13, 3(7 
 
 21, 12. 27. 6 A r 
 
 26, 
 
 12. 9, 4 
 
 27, 6 B /3 
 
 26. 
 
 13. 22, 4. 
 
 21, 13. 41, 1 
 
 27, 
 
 1. 22, 3. 
 
 21, 16. 27, 6 A ^ 
 
 27, 
 
 9, 33, 3 
 
 21, 25. 14, 1 
 
 27, 
 
 n. 4, 8 
 
 21, 32. 38, 3 
 
 27, 
 
 13. 10, 5 
 
 22, 1. 16, 5 
 
 27, 
 
 20. 21, 2 6 
 
 22, 3. 35, 5. 
 
 27, 
 
 21. 26, 5 
 
 22, 4. 16, 3 
 
 27, 
 
 22. 30, 4. 
 
 28, 2 <? 
 
 27, 
 
 24. 11, 3 c 
 
 22, 12. 28, 2^ 
 
 
 26, 5 . 9 
 
 22, 16. 14, 2 ^ 
 
 27, 
 
 29. 36, 5 
 
 22, 20. 16, 5 
 
 27, 
 
 30. 28, 2e 
 
 22, 21. 28, 2 
 
 27, 
 
 33. 23. 4 e 
 
 22, 22. 28, 2 
 
 
 26 Rem. 1( 
 
 22, 24. 16, 4^ 
 
 
 32, 5. 
 
 39 Rem. 2 
 
 27, 
 
 34. 10, 1. 
 
 23, 1. 9, 5. 
 
 
 27, 6 F ^ 
 
 23, 4. 1 Rem. 2 
 
 27, 
 
 36. 11, 3 6 
 
 23, 6. 25 Rem, 3 
 
 27, 
 
 37. 33, 2 
 
 27, 6Cr 
 
 27, 
 
 42. 23 Rem. 2 
 
 23, 13. 17, 4d 
 
 
 34, 1 (^ 
 
 18, 2 6 
 
 27, 
 
 44. 13, 8 
 
 24, 6. 25, 3d 
 
 27, 
 
 45. 28. oAa 
 
 24, 8. 3 Rem. 5 
 
 
 32, 8 6 
 
 17. 3* 
 
 28, 
 
 9. 27, 6 B f3 
 
 24, 18. 21, 2C 
 
 28, 
 
 18. 33, 3 
 
156 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 Gen. 28. 22. 37 Rem. 1 
 
 29, 2. 19, 4 6 
 
 29, 5. 26, 9 
 
 29, 6. 26, 9 
 
 29, 7. 22, 3 
 
 29, 9. 7, 1 
 
 28, 2 ^ 
 
 29. 17. 36, 6. 
 
 29, 25. 16, 5 
 
 29, 26. 8, 2 
 
 15, 5. 
 
 29, 30. 28, 5 A 
 
 29, 32. 28, 4 
 
 30. 1. 39, 6 
 
 30, 3. 28, 2/?: 
 
 30, 31, 21, 2 C 5 
 
 30, 34. 17, 'Sa 
 
 30, 38. 28, 4 6 
 
 36, 2 
 
 30, 39. 37, 2 
 
 31, 9. 10 Rem. 5 
 
 31, 13. 3, 9. 
 
 31, 14. 38, 3. 
 
 31, 27. 21, 2B 
 
 31, 28. 21, 2 A. 
 
 31, 29. 25, 2 C ^ 
 
 31, 30. 22, 4. 
 
 31, 31. 25, 3 6 
 
 31, 32. 12 Rem. 1 
 
 31. 37. 28, 2^ 
 
 31, 42. 14, 3 
 
 31, 50. 27, 6B^ 
 
 32, 6. 17, 2 
 
 32, 7. 23 Rem. 3 
 
 32, 8. 19, 3 
 
 32, 9. 37 Rem. 1. 
 
 32, 11. 27, 6 A 1^ 
 
 32, 12. 6, 4. 
 
 23, 3. 
 
 27, 6B/3 
 
 39, 6. 
 
 32, 13. 27, 6 C e 
 
 32, 16. 1, 1 
 
 32, 19 6, 4 
 
 32, 20. 28, 5 A ^ 
 
 33, 7. 38, 2 . 3 
 
 33, 13. 1, 1 
 
 33, 18. 28, 7a 
 
 Gen. 33, 18. 
 
 25, 2 B/3 
 
 34, 8. 
 
 41, 1 
 
 34, 30. 
 
 36 Rem. 2 
 
 35, 11. 
 
 36 Rem. 1 
 
 36, 24. 
 
 28, 2a 
 
 37, 2. 
 
 3 Rem. 5 
 
 37, 3. 
 
 8, 4 
 
 37, 5. 
 
 21, 2 A 
 
 37, 7. 
 
 32, 5 
 
 37, 8. 
 
 22, 4. 
 
 37, 15. 
 
 15, 5 
 
 
 
 23 Rem. 3 
 
 37, 18. 
 
 32, 14 
 
 37, 21. 
 
 33, 4. 
 
 37, 23. 
 
 33, 1 
 
 37, 29. 
 
 25, 2 C^ 
 
 33. 
 
 22 Rem. 1 
 
 37, 33. 
 
 26, 9 
 
 38, 17. 
 
 10, 6 
 
 
 
 28 Rem. 11 
 
 38, 24. 
 
 27, 6 C a 
 
 
 
 23 Rem. 3 
 
 
 
 28, 2 k 
 
 38, 28. 
 
 13, 3d 
 
 38, 29. 
 
 28, 5 C g 
 
 39, 11. 
 
 3, id 
 
 39, 20. 
 
 5, 4 
 
 39, 22. 
 
 23 Rem. 3 
 
 40, 1. 38 Rem. 3 
 
 40, 5. 
 
 7,1 
 
 40, 8. 
 
 25 Rem. 8. 
 
 40, 9. 
 
 28, 2e 
 
 40, 10. 
 
 28, 5 C e 
 
 40, 14. 
 
 28 Rem. 15 
 
 40, 20. 
 
 34, 1 c 
 
 41, 1. 
 
 23 Rem. 1 
 
 
 
 27, 6 B ^ 
 
 41, 4. 
 
 4, 15 
 
 
 
 32, 9 
 
 41, 14. 
 
 L9, 4 6 
 
 41, 15. 
 
 28, 7e 
 
 41, 25. 
 
 23, 2 
 
 41, 26. 
 
 3 Rem. 4 
 
 
 31, 2 
 
 41, 34. 
 
 16,1 
 
 41, 39. 
 
 28, 5C^ 
 
 41, 42. 
 
 33, 1 
 
 41, 43. 
 
 22, 5 A J 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 157 
 
 Gen. 42, 10. 25, 2 Ay 
 
 Ex. 1, 6. 34, 1 c 
 
 28 Rem. 3 
 
 1, T. 28, 6 
 
 42, 13. 25, 2Cr 
 
 1, 9. 8, 1 
 
 42, 15. 28, 5 F ^ 
 
 1, 12. 28, 5 H 
 
 42, 18. 18, 3 
 
 1, 14. 27, 6 A 
 
 42, 19. 3 Note 2 
 
 2, 2. 32, 12 
 
 42, 28. 21, 3 
 
 2, 6. 10 Rem. 7. 
 
 42, 35. 13. 1. 
 
 3, 1. 23, 3. 
 
 42, 38. 16, 7 
 
 3, 3. 3, 10 
 
 43, 3. 22, 4 
 
 3, 20. 15, 1 
 
 43, 5. 31, 4 
 
 4, 9. 32, 6 
 
 43, 7. 15, 6 
 
 4, 10. 4, 8 
 
 43, 14. 3 Note 2 
 
 4, 13. 12, 5 
 
 14, 1 
 
 4, 18. 17, 1^ 
 
 43, 16. 12, 4. 
 
 5, 4. 35, 2 
 
 43, 25. 15, 1 
 
 5, 8. 28, Rem. 1 
 
 43, 27. 4, 7. 
 
 5, 10. 25, 2 C ^2 
 
 12, 2 
 
 5, 16. 25, 2 C/32 
 
 43, 33. 21, 3 
 
 5, 22. 11, 3 c. 
 
 44, 2. 10 Rem. 1 
 
 6, 3. 27, 6 A J 
 
 44, 4. 32, 6. 
 
 7, 20. 35, 6 
 
 44, 5. 27, 6 A /3 
 
 8, 17. 25, 2 C /32 
 
 44, 14. 38, 2 
 
 8, 22. 26, 5 
 
 44, 18. 15, 3 
 
 9, 22. 27, 6 B J 
 
 27, 6 F ^ 
 
 9, 27. 3 Rem. 6. 
 
 39, 3. 
 
 10, 1. 3 Rem. 5 
 
 45, 4. 12, 3 
 
 10, 2. 5 Note 1 
 
 45, 6. 12, 2 
 
 10, 8. 11, 4 
 
 45, 8. 27. 7 
 
 34, 1 c 
 
 45, 12. 3 Rem. 6 
 
 10, 15. 25, 2A^ 
 
 45, 18. 18, 2 
 
 12, 16. 25, 2 A /3 
 
 45, 19. 18, 1 
 
 12, 33. 1 Rem. 4 
 
 46, 15. 5 Note 1. 
 
 12, 43. 27, 6 A^ 
 
 46, 27. 3, 13 
 
 12, 49. 37 Rem. 3 
 
 47, 3. 37, 1 c 
 
 12, 51. 27, 6B/3 
 
 47, 21. 41, 1 
 
 13, 1 16, 3 
 
 47, 24. 37 Rem. 3. 
 
 13, 3. 22, 5 B r 
 
 48, 6. 36, 2 
 
 13, 17. 28 Rem. 7 
 
 48, 19. 14, 2a 
 
 14, 11. 25, 4 
 
 48, 21. 23, 4^ 
 
 14; 13. 28, 6 
 
 49, 4. 30 Rem. 3 
 
 15, 1. 15, 7 
 
 49, 8. 10, 1 
 
 38, 2 
 
 49, 15. 32. 12 
 
 15, 4. 38, 1 
 
 49, 22. 36, 5 
 
 15, 5. 35, 4 
 
 49, 24. 4, 9 
 
 15, 15. 38, 1 
 
 
 15, 22. 35, 2 
 
 Ex. 1, 2. 28, 2 
 
 16, 3. 17 4tf 
 
 1, 3. 28, 2a 
 
 16, 4. 26, 6 
 
158 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 Ex. 16, 4. 
 
 
 
 35, 6 
 
 Ex. 32, 
 
 22. 30 Rem. 4. 
 
 16, 16. 
 
 
 
 39, 6 
 
 
 32, 12 
 
 16, 27. 
 
 
 
 13, 8 
 
 32, 
 
 27. 18, 4 
 
 16, 29. 
 
 
 
 13, '6 a 
 
 32, 
 
 31. 32, 5 
 
 16, 32. 
 
 
 
 39, 6 
 
 32, 
 
 33. 11 Rem. 3 
 
 17, 1. 
 
 
 
 22, 3 
 
 33, 
 
 16. 26 Rem. 10 
 
 17, 4. 
 
 
 
 16, 1. 
 
 33, 
 
 4. 36 Rem. 3 
 
 
 
 
 28, 7 a 
 
 36, 
 
 4. 13, 1 
 
 17, 5. 
 
 
 
 13, 8 
 
 38, 
 
 3. 33, 3 
 
 18, 17. 
 
 
 
 23. 3 
 
 38, 
 
 27. 9, 4 
 
 18, 23. 
 
 
 
 
 16, 1 
 21, 2 A 
 
 39, 
 
 10. 6, 3 
 
 
 
 
 40, 2 a 
 
 Lev. 1, 
 
 2. 13, 3 i 
 
 19, 1. 
 
 
 
 16, 3 
 
 
 27, 6 C a: 
 
 19, 5. 
 
 
 
 27, 6 C ^ 
 
 1, 
 
 15. 32, 2 
 
 20, 3. 
 
 
 
 15, 4 
 
 2, 
 
 1. 37 Note 1 
 
 20, 20. 
 
 
 
 10, 5 
 
 2, 
 
 12. 34 Rem. 
 
 
 
 
 15, 2 
 
 4, 
 
 2. 27 Rem. 5 
 
 21 . 
 
 
 
 28 Note 1. 
 
 4, 
 
 22. 28 Rem. 6 
 
 21, 4. 
 
 
 
 36, 3 
 
 5, 
 
 1. 37 Note. 1 
 
 
 
 
 38 Note 2 
 
 5, 
 
 2. 13 4 
 
 21, 15. 
 
 
 
 28, 2 a 
 
 6, 
 
 3. 6, 2. 
 
 21, 28. 
 
 
 32 Rem. 1 
 
 6, 
 
 7. 22 Rem. 5 
 
 21, 29. 
 
 
 
 2, le 
 
 8, 
 
 14. 32, 2 
 
 
 
 
 36, 3. 
 
 11. 
 
 10. 25 Rem. 8 
 
 21, 36. 
 
 
 
 28, 5 Bcc 
 
 13, 
 
 9. 38, 1 
 
 21, 37. 
 
 
 
 1. 1 
 
 13, 
 
 45. 35, 3 
 
 
 
 
 2,1a 
 
 13, 
 
 46. 5, 4 
 
 22, 5. 
 
 
 
 32, 5 
 
 13, 
 
 52. 19, 4 rf 
 
 22, 10. 
 
 
 
 5, 4 
 
 13, 
 
 55. 19, 4<? 
 
 22, 12. 
 
 
 
 22 Rem. 1 
 
 13, 
 
 57. 19, 4 (^ 
 
 22, 22. 
 
 
 
 28 Rem. 11 
 
 19, 
 
 20. 22 Rem. 1 and 2 
 
 23, 1. 
 
 
 
 15, 4 
 
 22, 
 
 11. 27, 6 Ar 
 
 23, 9. 
 
 
 
 28, 2.^ 
 
 22, 
 
 13. 35, 4 
 
 23, 30. 
 
 
 
 24, 2 
 
 24, 
 
 5. 33, 3 
 
 24, 5. 
 
 
 
 6. L 
 
 25. 
 
 14. 22, 5 Ar 
 
 24, 10. 
 
 
 13, 5 
 
 25, 
 
 46. 32, 14 
 
 24, 14. 
 
 
 
 11 Rem. 3 
 
 26, 
 
 21. 32, 9 
 
 25, 40. 
 
 
 
 34, la 
 
 26, 
 
 24. 9, 9 
 
 20, 16. 
 
 
 
 31, 1 
 
 26, 
 
 37. 35 Rem. 1 
 
 26, 30. 
 
 
 
 34, la 
 
 26, 
 
 42. 10, 7 
 
 28, 2. 
 
 
 
 4, 5. 
 
 26, 
 
 43. 28, 6 
 
 28, 3. 
 
 
 
 33, I 
 
 26, 
 
 44. 28, 5 A/3 
 
 28, 11. 
 
 27, 6 B /3 
 
 27, 
 
 2. 19, 4^ 
 
 28, 17. 
 
 
 
 6, 2 
 
 
 
 29, 12. 
 
 27, 6 C 
 
 Num. 1, 
 
 1. 7, 2 ^ 
 
 30, 25. 
 
 
 
 33, 3. 
 
 
 9 Rem. 1 
 
 31, 14. 
 
 
 
 36, 5 
 
 1, 
 
 2. 2 Rem. 4- 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 159 
 
 3, 46. 
 
 
 
 9, 7 
 
 Num. 28, 
 
 2. 
 
 
 
 18, 1 
 
 5, 3. 
 
 27, 56 
 
 28, 
 
 4. 
 
 
 
 3 Note 2 
 
 5, 23. 
 
 
 
 40, 2 a 
 
 28, 
 
 6. 
 
 
 
 24, 16 
 
 6, 9. 
 
 
 
 13, '6 a 
 
 30, 
 
 10. 
 
 
 5 Rem. 1 
 
 
 
 
 23, 5. 
 
 32, 
 
 5. 
 
 
 
 34, \c 
 
 6, 26. 
 
 
 
 17, 3 
 
 32, 
 
 27. 
 
 
 
 23, 2 
 
 7, 87. 
 
 
 
 9, 2.5 
 
 35, 
 
 5. 
 
 
 
 9 Rem. 3 
 
 9, 35. 
 
 
 
 22, 2. 
 
 35, 
 
 19. 
 
 
 
 22, 2 
 
 11, 17. 
 
 
 
 27, 6 AJ 
 
 36, 
 
 2. 
 
 
 
 34, 2 
 
 12, 1. 
 
 
 
 38, 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 ]2, 6. 
 
 
 
 39 Rem. 2 
 
 Deut. 1, 
 
 1. 
 
 
 
 39, 6 
 
 12, 14. 
 
 
 
 28, 2 i 
 
 1, 
 
 5. 
 
 
 
 21 Rem. 4 
 
 13, 18. 
 
 
 
 26, 6 
 
 1, 
 
 19. 
 
 
 
 32, 4 
 
 13, 2. 
 
 
 
 17 Rem. 2 
 
 1, 
 
 23. 
 
 
 
 9, 2.8c 
 
 
 
 
 28, 5 F X 
 
 ), 
 
 27 
 
 
 
 22, 2 
 
 14, 7. 
 
 
 
 39 Rem. 1 
 
 1, 
 
 32. 
 
 
 
 25, 2 C /32 
 
 14, 20. 
 
 
 
 14, 2 b 
 
 1, 
 
 46. 
 
 
 
 32, 10 a 
 
 14, 32. 
 
 
 10, 1 
 
 2, 
 
 24. 
 
 
 
 21, 2 C^ 
 
 14, 42. 
 
 
 
 25, 2 Ca 
 
 2, 
 
 25. 
 
 
 
 21, 2 A 
 
 15, 6. 
 
 
 
 28, 5Ba 
 
 3, 
 
 24. 
 
 
 
 19, 5. 
 
 15, 15. 
 
 
 
 3, 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 28. 4 c 
 
 15, 24. 
 
 
 27, 6 Cr 
 
 4, 
 
 3. 
 
 
 
 23, 3 
 
 15, 35. 
 
 
 
 22, 5Ar 
 
 5; 
 
 12. 
 
 
 22, 5 Br 
 
 
 
 22 Rem. 5. 
 
 5, 
 
 26. 
 
 17, 4^ 
 
 16, 6. 
 
 
 
 18, 4 
 
 6, 
 
 3. 
 
 
 
 28, 4e 
 
 16, 9. 
 
 
 
 8, 3 
 
 6, 
 
 6. 
 
 
 
 39 Rem. 1 
 
 16, 11. 
 
 
 
 28, 2 
 
 6, 
 
 10. 
 
 
 
 16, 2 
 
 16, 15. 
 
 
 
 17, 3 6 
 
 8, 
 
 12. 
 
 
 
 24, 3 
 
 16, 29. 
 
 
 
 40 Rem. 1 
 
 8, 
 
 16. 
 
 
 33, 1 
 
 17, 3. 
 
 
 
 15, 2 
 
 9, 
 
 16. 
 
 
 
 33, 4 
 
 17, 21. 
 
 
 
 9, 2 
 
 9, 
 
 25. 
 
 
 
 32, \0a 
 
 17, 28. 
 
 
 
 28, 5 F 
 
 9, 
 
 26. 
 
 
 
 17, 36. 
 
 18, 7. 
 
 
 
 27, 5 6 
 
 10. 
 
 17. 
 
 
 3. 10 
 
 18, 23. 
 
 
 
 13,5 
 
 11, 
 
 13. 
 
 
 
 16, 2 
 
 19, 2. 
 
 
 
 6 Rem. 4 
 
 11, 
 
 27 
 
 
 
 28 Rem. 6 
 
 20, 13. 
 
 
 28 Rem. 8 
 
 12, 
 
 30. 
 
 
 
 15, 2 
 
 20, 17. 
 
 8 
 
 17, la 
 
 14, 
 
 22. 
 
 
 
 34 Rem. 
 
 20, 18. 
 
 
 
 1 Rem. 4 
 
 15, 
 
 18. 
 
 
 
 30, 5 
 
 
 
 
 25 Rem. 13 
 
 16. 
 
 6. 
 
 
 27, 6 D/3 
 
 22, 6. 
 
 
 
 21 Rem. 6 
 
 16, 
 
 20. 
 
 
 
 28, 6 
 
 22, 19. 
 
 
 
 28, hk 
 
 19, 
 
 17. 
 
 
 
 12, I 
 
 22, 30. 
 
 
 ]2, 3 
 
 20, 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 31, 2 
 
 22, 33. 
 
 
 
 10, 3 
 
 21; 
 
 10. 
 
 37, 3 
 
 
 
 
 14, 3 
 
 22, 
 
 2. 
 
 
 
 10, 4 
 
 23, 3. 
 
 
 
 13, 4 
 
 22, 
 
 6. 
 
 
 
 27, 6 B^ 
 
 23, 13. 
 
 
 
 25, 2A^ 
 
 22, 
 
 8. 
 
 
 
 19. 4 6 
 
 24, 11. 
 
 
 28, 5^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 23, 5. 
 
 28, 2. 
 
 
 
 16, 1 
 
 22, 
 
 26. 
 
 
 
 33, 4 
 
i6o 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 Deut. 23, 5. 27. 6 A ,f 
 
 Judges 1, 28. 22, 4 Rem. 2 
 
 23, 15. 13, 4 
 
 4, 20. 18 Rem. 
 
 24, 11. 12, 1 
 
 5, 8. 28, 5 Fg 
 
 28, 32. 38, 2 
 
 5. 10. 5, 5. 
 
 28, 35. 35, 7 
 
 5, 17. 32, 8 c 
 
 28, 43. 24, 2 
 
 5, 24. 27, 6 C J 
 
 28, 56. 21, 2 
 
 5, 27. 28 Rem. 1 
 
 22, 2 
 
 5, 29. 8, 4 ^ 
 
 28, 48. 37, 3 
 
 6, 25. 3 Rem. 4 
 
 28, 67. 17. 4flr 
 
 6, 36. 31, 4 
 
 29, 9. 10 Rem. 4 
 
 7, 3. 11. Rem. 3. 
 
 29, 20. 4, 10 
 
 9, 17. 27, 6Br 
 
 31, 12, 21, 2 C /3i 
 
 9, 28 11, 4 
 
 32, 11. 25, 2 AJ 
 
 9, 29. 17, U 
 
 28 Rem. 14 
 
 9, 45. 33, 2 
 
 32, 15. 19 Rem. 2 
 
 9, 48. 28, 7 c 
 
 32, 17. 19 Rem. 2 
 
 9, 55. 36, 2 
 
 32, 39. 31, 2 
 
 11, 23. 26, 5. 
 
 33, 11. 28, 5 Er 
 
 12, 7. 2, 9 
 
 33, 1 
 
 13, 11. 26, 9 
 
 33, 29. 14, 3 
 
 13, 12. 28, 7 
 
 
 13, 16. 27, 6A^ 
 
 Jos. 1, 2. 10 Rem. 7 
 
 14, 15. 26 Rem. 7 
 
 2, 7. 28, 5 C J 
 
 15, 1. 27, 6 A ^ 
 
 2, 8. 28, 2 
 
 15. 12. 19, 5 
 
 2, 10. 28, 3 
 
 15, 13, 22 Rem. 2. 
 
 3, 7. 28, 4<? 
 
 15, 18. 19 5 
 
 3, 12. 9, 8 <? 
 
 16, 14. 3 Rem. 2 
 
 3, 14. 3 Rem. 2 
 
 16, 15. 28, 2/ 
 
 3, 16. 21 Rem. 4 
 
 19, 5. 33, 2 
 
 4, 16. 28, 2 ^ 
 
 19, 6. 21, 2C 
 
 5, 1. 16, 5 
 
 19, 22. 32, 14 
 
 5, 13. 16, 5 
 
 20, 44 46. 41 Rem. 1 
 
 6, 13. 22, 4 
 
 21, 2. 37, 1 
 
 7, 7. 21, 2 C |32 
 
 
 7, 21. 3 Rem. 1 
 
 I. Sam. I. 1. 13 Rem. 1 
 
 9, 2. 32, 9 
 
 1, 10. 27, 6 B J 
 
 9, 5. 31, 3 
 
 1, 13. 36, 6 
 
 9, 12. 23, 3 
 
 1, 16. 4, 8 
 
 13, 14. 37, 1 rf 
 
 1, 22. 32, 14 
 
 14, 11. 27, 6 F <:k 
 
 2, 3. 21, 2CJ 
 
 15, 19. 10, 2. 
 
 25, 5. 
 
 19, 51. 7, 2 6 
 
 2, 4. 38 Rem. 2 
 
 22, 29. 10 Rem. 7 
 
 2, 13. 41, 3 
 
 24, 19. 2, 2 e 
 
 2, 19. 16, 6 
 
 
 2, 27. 26, 3 
 
 Judges 1, 7. 31, 3 
 
 2, 28. 10, 4. 
 
 1, 22. 36, 2 
 
 22, 5 A 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 i6i 
 
 1. 
 
 Sam. 2, 28. 27, 6 C 
 
 I. Sam. 27, 10. 26 Rem. 
 
 9 
 
 
 2, 33. 36, 2 
 
 28, 3. 28, 2 5 
 
 
 
 3, 2. 21, 2 B 
 
 28, 7. 6, 3 
 
 
 
 3, 7. 25, 2 D 
 
 28, 16. 28, 2i 
 
 
 
 39, 4 
 
 30, 6. 19, 3 
 
 
 
 3, 11. 41, 3 
 
 
 
 
 4, 15. 36, 6 
 
 II. Sam. 1, 4. 30 Rem. 
 
 4 
 
 
 9, 9. 19, 4e 
 
 1, 22, 25 Rem. 
 
 5 
 
 
 9, 24. 3, 13 
 
 2, 8. 7, 1 
 
 
 
 10, 27. 27, 6 F r 
 
 2, 23. 35, 7 
 
 
 
 11, 11. 41 Rem. 2 
 
 3, 25. 32, 12 
 
 
 
 11, 12. 26, 5 
 
 3, 27. 33, 4 
 
 
 
 12,4.5. 26, 9 
 
 3, 30. 35, 1 
 
 
 
 12, 23. 3 Note 1 
 
 3, 35. 28 Rem. 
 
 12 
 
 
 14, 14. 35 Hera. 1 
 
 4, 7. 28, 2/ 
 
 
 
 14, 45. 13, 4 
 
 5, 21. 38, 2 
 
 
 
 15, 20. 28, 4 
 
 6, 6. 32 Rem. 
 
 5 
 
 
 15, 23. 16, 4 
 
 7, 5. 26, 3 
 
 
 
 27, 6C7 
 
 7, 18. 11, 4 
 
 
 
 15, 32. 32, 9 
 
 10, 3. 28, 5 E a 
 
 
 
 16, 16. 21, 2 D 
 
 10, 9. 36, 3 
 
 
 
 17, 8. 7, 2 a 
 
 38, 1 
 
 
 
 17, 34. 28, 2 5 
 
 12, 4. 3 Rem. 
 
 4 
 
 
 17, 39. 21, 2 b 
 
 12, 6. 9, 9 
 
 
 
 28 Uem. 7 
 
 13, 15. 32, 5 
 
 
 
 17, 40. 4 Rem. 3 
 
 13, 39. 6 Rem. 
 
 1 
 
 
 17, 46. 36, 2 
 
 14, 6. 13, 7 5 
 
 
 
 18, 18. 11, 4 
 
 15, 4. 17, 4 
 
 
 
 19, 13 16. 2, 2 e 
 
 15, 23. 32, 11 
 
 
 
 19, 22. 3 Rem. 4 
 
 36, 2 
 
 
 
 19, 23. 10, 1 
 
 15, 25. 10, 3 5 
 
 
 
 20, 16. 32 Rem. 5 
 
 17, 8. 32, 12 
 
 
 
 20, 19. 21 Rem. 5 
 
 17, 9. 23, 5 
 
 
 
 21, 9. 25 Rem. 11 
 
 18, 4. 9, 8 c 
 
 
 
 22, 7. 24, 3 
 
 18, 11. 27, 6Bfl 
 
 
 
 22, 15. 26, 5 
 
 18, 12. 11 Rem. 
 
 3 
 
 
 23, 11. 26 Rem. 7 
 
 18, 22. 11 Rem. 
 
 3 
 
 
 26, 9 
 
 13,4 
 
 
 
 24, 11. 28, 3 
 
 18, 29. 26, 5 
 
 
 
 24, 12. 28, 5 A 
 
 19, 2. 16, 6 
 
 
 
 24, 14. 3, 4 
 
 19, 27. 1 Rem. 
 
 2 
 
 
 24, 18. 33, 2 
 
 21, 11. 34, Ic 
 
 
 
 24, 19. 28, 3 
 
 21, 20. 9, 8 5 
 
 
 
 25, 22. 28, 5 E J 
 
 22, 1. 28, 2 5 
 
 
 
 25, 24. 10, 1 
 
 22, 38. 17, 1 c 
 
 
 
 25, 26. 32, 11 
 
 22, 41. 41 Rem. 
 
 2 
 
 
 25, 27. 41 Rem. 2 
 
 23, 4. 4, 4 
 
 
 
 25, 33. 32, 11 
 
 24, 3. 28 Rem. 
 
 4 
 
l62 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 II. Sara. 24, 9. 
 
 5 Rem. 2 
 
 I. Kings 22, 20. 
 
 28, 2k 
 
 
 
 22, 27. 
 
 5 Rem. 4 
 
 I. Kings 1, 2. 
 
 19, 4 5 
 
 22, 28. 
 
 18, 4 
 
 
 26 Rem. 3 
 
 22, 48. 
 
 31, 1 
 
 1, 6. 1 
 
 27, 6 C 
 
 
 
 1, 12. 
 
 18, 3 
 
 II. Kings 1, 2. 
 
 26, 6 
 
 2, 21. 
 
 34, Ic 
 
 1, 8. 
 
 4, 8 
 
 2, 22. 
 
 28, 2 c 
 
 1, 16. 
 
 25, 4 
 
 2, 31. 
 
 24, lb 
 
 2, 10. 
 
 21, 2 B 
 
 2, 39. 
 
 7, 2 a 
 
 2, 16. 
 
 28, 5 B a 
 
 3, 8. 
 
 27, 6Ce 
 
 2, 24. 
 
 1 Rem. 1 
 
 3, 27. 
 
 22 Rem. 2 
 
 3, 3. 
 
 36, 4 
 
 5, 1. 
 
 16, 3 
 
 3, 16. 
 
 2,6 
 
 5, 9. 
 
 24, la 
 
 4, 16. 
 
 27, 6F|3 
 
 5, 11. 
 
 8, 4 
 
 4, 41. 
 
 28, 2 H 
 
 5, 17. 
 
 32, 12 
 
 4, 43. 
 
 22, 5B/3 
 
 6, 12. 
 
 41, 2 
 
 5, 13. 
 
 40 Rem. 2 
 
 6, 19. 
 
 28, 5E^ 
 
 5, 26. 
 
 40 Rem. 1 
 
 6, 23. 
 
 37, 3 
 
 6,21. 
 
 22. 26, 9 
 
 8, 5. 
 
 36, 2 
 
 7, 13. 
 
 28, 2 H 
 
 8, 6. 27 Rem. 1 
 
 8, 22. 
 
 15, 7 
 
 8, 24. 
 
 28, 6 
 
 8, 25. 
 
 9, 6 
 
 8, 30. 
 
 27, 6 D ^ 
 
 10, 10. 
 
 13, 8 
 
 8, 33. 
 
 28, 4 5 
 
 10, 23. 
 
 25, 3 5 
 
 8, 64. 
 
 8, 3 
 
 11, 15. 
 
 27, 5 5 
 
 9, 16. 
 
 39, 4 
 
 12, 17. 
 
 5, 1 
 
 9. 23. 
 
 23, 6 
 
 13, 14, 
 
 32, 5 
 
 9, 26. 
 
 1 Rem. 3 
 
 15, 21. 
 
 26, 3 
 
 10, 1. 
 
 39, 4 
 
 16, 14. 
 
 3 Rem. I 
 
 10, 21. 
 
 25, 4 
 
 20, 20. 
 
 26, 3 
 
 10, 23. 
 
 27, 6 E ^ 
 
 22, 1. 
 
 9, Ic 
 
 10, 24. 
 
 36, 2 
 
 22, 8. 
 
 I 40, 2 a 
 
 13, 30, 
 
 29, 1 
 
 23, 17. 
 
 3, 9 
 
 13, 31. 
 
 28, 7 a 
 
 24, 7. 
 
 19, 2 
 
 15, 3. 
 
 5, 4 
 
 
 
 15, 23. 
 
 33, 4 
 
 Jes. 1, 1. 
 
 28, 2 5 
 
 15, 30. 
 
 27, 6B/3 
 
 1, 4 
 
 29, 1 
 
 18, 5. 
 
 27, QCa 
 
 1, 5. 
 
 13, 2 
 
 18, 13. 
 
 34, Ic 
 
 1, 6. 
 
 25 Rem. 8 
 
 18, 32. 
 
 33, 3 
 
 1,7.9 
 
 27, 6 F r 
 
 19, 11. 
 
 4, 11 
 
 1, 11. 
 
 32, 14 
 
 
 
 37 Rem. 1 
 
 1,14. 
 
 21,2A.27,6Btf 
 
 20, 20. 
 
 36, 2 
 
 1, 15. 
 
 36, 6 
 
 20, 36. 
 
 3, Ic 
 
 1. 16. 
 
 4, 6 
 
 21, 7. 
 
 19, 5 
 
 1, 18. 
 
 3, 15 
 
 22, 3. 
 
 26, 3 
 
 
 28, 5 G fl? 
 
 22, 7. 
 
 28, 2 k 
 
 1. 20. 
 
 34, 2 
 
 22. 15. 
 
 26, 2 
 
 1, 26. 
 
 35 Rem. 1 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 163 
 
 Jes. 1, 
 
 1. 
 
 4. 
 
 9. 
 
 U. 
 
 17. 
 
 19 Rem. 2 
 28, 2^ 
 36 Rem. 1 
 32 Rem. 5 
 38 Rem. 2 
 37, ] 
 27, 6Er 
 
 7. 
 
 9, 
 
 9, 
 
 10, 
 
 10, 
 
 10, 
 
 11. 
 14 
 17. 
 
 32 Rem. 
 1 Rem. 
 32, 12 
 36, 5 
 
 14, L 28, 
 
 4, 8 
 
 33, 2 
 
 32, 7 
 
 19 Rem. 2 
 
 25, 4 
 
 21 Rem. 5. 
 
 
 
 5Ca 
 
 35, 
 
 2 F. 35, 6 
 4 
 
 37, 3 
 
 9, 8 
 
 6, 8. 
 6, 9. 
 
 10. 
 
 11. 
 
 13. 
 
 13, 
 
 
 
 32, 
 
 19, 
 27 
 21, 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 21. 
 
 4. 
 
 7. 
 19. 
 
 9, 1. 
 
 7a 
 
 6 
 
 2 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 Rem. 5 
 
 2Ca 
 1 Rem. 4 
 15, 1 
 19, 2 
 27, 6Cr 
 19, 4e 
 
 4 
 
 Rem. 4 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 19, 
 
 10. 
 12. 
 10. 
 15. 
 22. 
 
 10, 30. 
 
 5, 
 
 5, 
 
 36, 2 
 
 16, 6 
 3 Rem. 1 
 8 Rem. 1 
 26, 4 
 28, 5G 
 32, 7 
 32, 11 
 
 11, 
 
 2. 
 
 5 Note 1. Rem. 2 
 
 n, 
 
 8. 
 
 40 Rem 2 
 
 11, 
 
 9. 
 
 22, 
 
 2 
 
 11, 
 
 ]0. 
 
 21, 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 41, 
 
 1 
 
 12, 
 
 6. 
 
 1, 
 
 3b 
 
 13, 
 
 8. 
 
 21, 
 
 3 
 
 13, 
 
 18. 
 
 40 
 
 Rem. 2 
 
 14, 
 
 2. 
 
 32, 
 
 14 
 
 14, 
 
 3. 
 
 27, 
 
 6As 
 
 
 
 34 Note 2 
 
 14, 
 
 6. 
 
 32, 
 
 5 
 
 14, 
 
 9. 
 
 37 Rem. 1 
 
 14, 
 
 17. 
 
 21, 
 
 3 
 
 14, 
 
 19. 
 
 3, 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 5; 
 
 5 
 
 15, 
 
 8. 
 
 27, 
 
 7 
 
 16, 
 
 4. 
 
 36, 
 
 2 
 
 16, 
 
 10. 
 
 23, 
 
 5 
 
 17, 
 
 1. 
 
 27, 
 
 6Cr 
 
 17, 
 
 4. 
 
 4, 
 
 6 
 
 17, 
 
 6. 
 
 4, 
 
 9 
 
 17, 
 
 10. 
 
 33, 
 
 2 
 
 18, 
 
 5. 
 
 37, 
 
 Id 
 
 
 
 39, 
 
 6 
 
 19, 
 
 4. 
 
 2, 
 
 2e 
 
 
 
 4, 
 
 13 
 
 ]9, 
 
 11. 
 
 6, 
 
 3 
 
 19, 
 
 14. 
 
 2 
 
 Rem. 2 
 
 19, 
 
 22. 
 
 22, 
 
 4 
 
 21, 
 
 2. 
 
 34 Note 2 
 
 21, 
 
 7. 
 
 32, 
 
 5 
 
 21, 
 
 17. 
 
 5, 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 38, 
 
 1 
 
 22, 
 
 1. 
 
 26, 
 
 7 
 
 22, 
 
 3. 
 
 27, 
 
 6C^ 
 
 22, 
 
 14. 
 
 28, 
 
 5 s 
 
 22, 
 
 16. 
 
 8 
 
 Rem. 2 
 
 23, 
 
 1. 
 
 27, 
 
 6 Cr 
 
 23, 
 
 4. 
 
 25, 
 
 5 
 
 23, 
 
 5. 
 
 27, 
 
 6 Fa 
 
 23, 
 
 8. 
 
 8. 
 
 4:d 
 
 24, 
 
 2. 
 
 27, 
 
 6 Fa 
 
 24, 
 
 10. 
 
 27, 
 
 6 Cr 
 
 24, 
 
 12. 
 
 34, 
 
 Ic 
 
 24, 
 
 13. 
 
 28, 
 
 5 Ca 
 
 24, 
 
 22. 
 
 22, 
 
 5 
 
 26, 
 
 2. 
 
 2 
 
 Rem. 2 
 
1 64 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 Jes, 
 
 . 26, 3. 23 Rem. 3 
 
 Jes. 47, 1. 21 Rem. 6 
 
 26, 4. 27, 6 A J 
 
 47, 8. 10. 25, 1 
 
 27, 5. 28, 5 Ba 
 
 47, 12. 12 Rem. 1 
 
 27, 11. 36, 2 
 
 48, 8. 28, 7 c 
 
 27, 12. 5 Eem. 4 
 
 48,9.14. 27, 7 - 
 
 27, 13. 16, 2 
 
 48, 10. 27, 6 Ay 
 
 ^ 28, 4. 4, 5 
 
 48, 18. 17 Rem. 2 
 
 23, 5 
 
 48, 19. 30, 4 
 
 28, 6. 27, 7 
 
 49, 11. 37 Rem. 3 
 
 28, 9. 5, 5 
 
 49, 23. 12, 3 
 
 28, 24. 23, 5 
 
 50, 2. 26, 8 
 
 29, 16. 26 Rem. 3 
 
 27, 6Cr 
 
 29, 19. 8, 4^ 
 
 50, 10. 2 Rem. 2 
 
 30, 16. 4, 9 
 
 51, 21. 5 Rem. 4 
 
 30, 23. 33, 2 
 
 52, 8. 38, 1 
 
 30, 26. 30, 4 
 
 52, 15. 12, 4 
 
 31, 2. 31, 1 
 
 53, 9. 28, 5G/3 
 
 32, 1. 41 Rem. 1 
 
 54, 9. 27, 6 C r 
 
 32, 11. 18 Rem. 
 
 55, 9. 28, 5H 
 
 33, 1. 21, 2 D 
 
 56, 4. 12 Rem. 1 
 
 33, 5. 23 Rem. 3 
 
 57, 8. 19, 1 
 
 33, 9. 37 Rem. 1 
 
 37 Rem. 1 
 
 33, 15. 27, 6 Cy 
 
 58, 9. 24, 3 
 
 33, 16. 32, 8 c 
 
 59, 10. 25, 2 C 5 
 
 33, 22. 30, 2 
 
 59, 20. 5, 4 
 
 34, 4. 3, 1 <5 
 
 23 Rem. 5 
 
 34, 13. 32, 7 
 
 60, 2. 3, 1 c 
 
 36, 4 
 
 60, 14. 32, 9 
 
 36, 9. 27,6E/3.6Er 
 
 61, 7. 19 Rem. 2 
 
 37, 11. 26, 5 
 
 27, 7 
 
 37, 24. 4, 6 
 
 62, 5. 32, 5 
 
 37, 30. 18, 3 
 
 62, 6. 25 Rem. 5 
 
 38, 10. 34, 1 
 
 63, 2. 30. 4 
 
 38, 15. 28, 5 A a 
 
 64, 10. 28 Rem. 8 
 
 38, 18. 23 Rem. 5 
 
 38 Rem. 1 
 
 40, 9. 27, 6 Er 
 
 65, 6. 28, 5 I /3 
 
 40, 10. 27, 6 A ^ 
 
 
 40, 29. 25, 2 C^ 
 
 Jer. 2, 22. 28, 5 I /3 
 
 41, 1. 21, 3 
 
 2, 35. 22, 3 
 
 41, 8. 12, 3 
 
 3, 5. 19, 1 
 
 41, 23. I, '6 a 
 
 32 Rem. 5 
 
 42, 21. 21 Rem. 5 
 
 37 Rem. 1 
 
 42, 22. 2 Rem. 4 
 
 3, 8. 28, 5 1) 
 
 42, 24. 21, 2 A 
 
 4, 5. 21, 2 C a 
 
 44, 21. 10, 2 
 
 4, 22. 31, 2 
 
 45, 12. 10, 1 
 
 5, 29. 26, 4 
 
 45, 17. 32, 5 
 
 6, 6. 1, 3 ^ 
 
 45, 21. 25 Rem. 10 
 
 6, 19. 16, 4^ 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 i65 
 
 Jer. 
 
 9, 1. 
 
 9, 17. 
 
 9, 22. 
 10, 3. 
 10, 7. 
 10, 20. 
 10, 22. 
 10, 25. 
 
 12, 8. 
 
 13, 16. 
 13, 17. 
 
 13, 18. 
 
 14, 15. 
 
 15, 15. 
 17, 11. 
 
 17, 16. 
 
 18, 16. 
 
 19, 5. 
 23, 16. 
 
 22, 29. 
 
 23, 14. 
 23, 17. 
 23, 23. 
 23, 33. 
 25, 13. 
 28, 4. 
 
 30, 14. 
 
 31, 5. 
 33, 20. 
 33, 22. 
 
 35, 7. 
 38, 5. 
 
 40, 8. 
 
 41, 12. 
 44, 7. 8 
 48, 2. 
 48, 32. 
 
 48, 36. 
 
 49, 24. 
 
 50, 9. 
 50, 11. 
 
 41 Rem. 2 
 11, 5 
 17, 4 a 
 27, 6 E /3 
 33 Note 1 
 32, 7 
 19, 4 ^ 
 37, 1 ^ 
 19, 2 
 25, 2Cy 
 38, 1 
 25, 4 
 35, 6 
 37, 1 ^ 
 32, 7 
 21, 2 C 5 
 28, 2/ 
 40 Rem. 1 
 28, 7 6 
 27, 6 C r 
 35, 6 
 19, 2 
 22, 2 
 28, 6 
 25, 3 tf 
 22, 4 
 24, 1 ^ 
 41 Rem. 1 
 32, 14 
 4, 14 
 28 Rem. 
 19, 4 5 
 10. 7 
 23 Rem. 
 28, 48/ 
 23, 2 
 25 Rem. 
 28, 5 A 
 27, 6 D |3 
 , 27, 6E^ 
 27, 6Cr 
 3, 9 
 5, 4 
 36, 4 
 30, 4 
 S 4 Rem. 
 
 10 
 
 Ezech. 2, 9. 1 Rem. 5 
 
 Ezech. 
 
 6, 10. 
 
 10, 15. 
 
 11, 13. 
 13, 3. 
 
 13, 10. 
 
 14, 1. 
 14, 22. 
 
 17, 21. 
 
 18, 7. 
 18, 10. 
 18, 20. 
 18, 32. 
 
 21, 32. 
 
 22, 4. 
 
 23, 28. 
 23, 32. 
 
 23, 49. 
 
 24, 17. 
 
 26, 3. 
 
 27, 24. 
 31, 16. 
 33, 17. 
 37, 11. 
 
 39, 27. 
 
 40, 1. 
 
 41, 22. 
 47, 4. 
 
 37 Rem. 1 
 
 24 Rem. 1 
 
 27, 6Ar 
 
 32, 11 
 
 25, 3<J5 
 
 33, 2 
 
 37, 2 
 
 41 Rem. 1 
 
 41 Rem. 1 
 
 10 Rem. 2 
 
 27 Rem. 5 
 
 27, 6A^ 
 
 28, 2^ 
 
 28, 6 
 
 37 Rem. 1 
 
 12. 4 
 
 37 Rem. 1 
 
 19, 1 
 
 32, 9 
 
 27, 6E 
 4, 2 
 
 5 Rem. 2 
 1 
 
 6Er 
 Rem. 5 
 5C^ 
 4 
 4 
 
 
 
 41, 
 27, 
 3 
 28, 
 30, 
 5, 
 
 Hosea 1, 7. 27, 6 A s 
 
 2, 11. 21, 2C/3> 
 
 3, 2. 27, 6 A e 
 
 4, 2. 22, 5Ba 
 4, 9. 27, 6 F 
 6, 1. 17, 3c 
 6, 2. 27, 6 C 5 
 8, 5. 22 Rem. 3 
 8, 7. 28, bBa 
 
 8, 14. 37, 3 
 
 9, 6. 28, 7 
 9, 9. 21, 2 C J 
 9, 12. 28, 5F 
 
 10, 14. 27, 6 B /3 
 12, 1. 2, 2e 
 
 12, 15. 32, 9 
 
 13, 4. 25 Rem. 10 
 
 13, 8. 1, 2 
 
 14, 1. 37 Rem. 3 
 
i66 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 Hosea 14, 4. 34, 2 
 14, 5. 32, 9 
 14, 7. 37, 1 a. 
 
 Joel 1, 2. 3, 5 
 
 26 Rem. 4 
 
 1, 6. 25, 2 C J 
 
 2, 2. 30 Kern. 4 
 2, 13. 25 Eera. 5 
 2, 16. 39, 6 
 
 2, 22. 19, 1 
 2, 23. 16, 6 
 2, 26. 21 Rem. 2 
 4, 14. 30 Rem. 3 
 
 4, 18. 32, 7 
 
 Amos 1, 1. 27, 6 A<z. 6Cflf. 
 1, 3. 6. 9. 13. 28, 2 c 
 
 1, 5. 8. 36, 2 
 
 5, 14. 25 Rem. 5 
 
 6, 6. 27, 6 A ^ 
 6, 10. 13 Rem. 2 
 6, 33. 25, 2AJ 
 9, ]. 23, 5 
 
 9, 8. 22 Rem. 2 
 9, 13. 32, 7 
 
 Obadja 10. 5, 4 
 
 16. 28, 5H 
 
 Jona 1, 7. 8. 7 Rem. 1 
 26 Rem. 2 
 
 2, 3. 39 Note 1 
 4, 6. 32, 5 
 
 4, 10. 4, 8 
 4, 11. 26, 5 
 
 Micha 1, 13. 18 Rem. 
 
 1, 16. 2 Rem. 2 
 
 2, 3. 32, 9 
 2, 6. 37, 1 a. 
 2, 13. 16, 6 
 
 4, 3. 11. 36 Rem. 1 
 
 4, 14. 27, 6 A 
 
 35, 7 
 
 5, 1. 13, 8 
 
 27, 6C 
 5, 4. 6 Rem. 2 
 
 Micha 
 
 28, 2e 
 
 6, 3. 28, 4 rf 
 
 6, 8. 21, 2 A 
 
 7, 8. 1, 3^ 
 
 Nahum 3, 15. 37 Rem. 2 
 
 Hab. 1, 5. 2. 10. 23 Rem. 3 
 
 2, 19. 25 Rem. 3. 26,5 
 
 3, 9. 22 Rem. 1 
 3, 17. 36, 3 
 
 Zeph. 2, 2. 25, 4. 28, 5 C 5 
 2, 12. 31, 2 
 
 2, 15. 25, 1 
 
 3, 9. 32, 9 
 
 Haggai 1, 4. 10, 1 
 
 1, 6. 10 Rem. 8. 21, 3 
 
 2, 3. 30 Rem. 4 
 
 Zech. 1, 14. 32, 5 
 
 1, 15. 32, 5. 28, 4c 
 
 3, 9. 1 Rem. 5 
 
 7, 5. 10, 2 
 
 8, 6. 26, 5 
 
 9, 11. 24, 3 
 12, 10. 22, 5 A /3 
 14, 10. 3 Note 1 
 
 Mai. 2, 15. 19 Rem. 2 
 
 Psalms 1, 1. 
 1, 3. 
 
 14, 2 c 
 
 27, 6BJ 
 
 19, 5. 28, 2 2 
 2, 10. 24. 15, 5 
 3, 5. 16, 6. 32, 11 
 3, 6. 17, 2 
 
 3, 8. 33, 4 
 
 4, 4. 28, 2 A 
 
 4, 8. 10 Rem. 8 
 
 5, 5. 23, 6. 32, 8c 
 5, 10. 1, 3 25 Rem. 8 
 
 5, 13. 33, 2 
 
 6, 2. 6. 25 Rem. 8 
 6, 2. 40 Rem. 1 
 
 6, 10. 40 Rem. 2 
 
 7, 4. 5. 6. 28, 5 F /3 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 167 
 
 Psalms 7, 10. 28, 2y 
 
 
 Psalms 44, 21. 28, 5 F ^ 
 
 7, 12. 3 Rem. 
 
 3 
 
 45, 7. 10 Rem. 3. 30, 4 
 
 8, 6. 33, 1 
 
 
 45, 8. 33, 2 
 
 9, 7. 41, 2 
 
 
 45, 9. 28, 2 
 
 9, 16. 11, 2 
 
 
 45, 10. 27, 6 E J 
 
 9, 21. 28, 7 c 
 
 
 45, 13. 8, 4 ^ 
 
 11, 5. 40 Rem. 
 
 2 
 
 48, 6. 28, 5 H 
 
 12, 4. 1, 3 
 
 
 49, 8. 22 Rem. 2 
 
 12, 5. 27, 6 E /3 
 
 
 49, 18. 40 Rem. 1 
 
 12, 8. 3 Rem. 
 
 5 
 
 50, 3. 19, 2 
 
 14, 3. 25 Rem. 
 
 8 
 
 50, 8. 40 Rem. 1 
 
 14, 4. 28, 7 5 
 
 
 50, 12. 28, 5 F 
 
 14, 5. 32, 5 
 
 
 51, 4. 21, 2 C5 
 
 16, 3. 4. 41 Rem. 
 
 1 
 
 51, 14. 33, 2 
 
 17, 10. 13. 32, n 
 
 
 54, 2. 26, 3 
 
 18, 17. 32 Rem. 
 
 5 
 
 55, 18. 32, 10 * 
 
 18, 28. 4, 12 
 
 
 55, 19. 27, 6 AJ 
 
 18, 30. 27, 6Ae 
 
 
 58, 9. 5 Rem. 4 
 
 18, 31. 30, 3 
 
 
 60, 7. 32, 11 
 
 18, 33. 33, 1 
 
 
 60, 13. 28, 2^ 
 
 19, 14. 25 Rem. 
 
 1 
 
 63, 3. 27, 6 E ^ 
 
 22, 8. 35, 6 
 
 
 65, 5. 29, 2 
 
 22, 13. 4, 9 
 
 
 65, 14. 32, 8 a 
 
 22, 16. 1 Rem. 
 
 5 
 
 66, 16. 17, 1 
 
 22, 22. 21, 3 
 
 
 66, 17. 32, 11 
 
 22, 32. 23, 2 
 
 
 68, 5. 27, 6 A J 
 
 25, 19. 32, 12 
 
 
 68, 7. 23, 4 
 
 27. 7. 32, 11 
 
 
 69, 5. 10, 7 
 
 29, 4. 4 Rem. 
 
 1 
 
 69, 6. 27, 6 E 
 
 29, 26. 15, 5 
 
 
 69, 11. 2 Rem. 2 
 
 31. 7. 14, 2 
 
 
 73, 15. 28, 5 F /3 
 
 32, 2. 25 Rem. 
 
 8 
 
 73, 20. 27, 6 C J 
 
 32, 6. 24, 3 
 
 
 74, 7, 21 Note 3 
 
 32, 9. 25, 2 E 
 
 
 74, 17. 41, 1 
 
 34, 22. 40, 2^ 
 
 
 75, 4. 38 Rem. 3 
 
 35, 16. 35, 6 
 
 
 76, 7. 28, 2 
 
 35, 19. 10 Rem. 
 
 2 
 
 77, 3. 21 Rem. 3 
 
 37, 20. 27, 6 A r 
 
 
 78, 18. 27, 6 E |3 
 
 37, 23. 34, 2 
 
 
 78, 26. 30. 45. 52. 16 Rem. 
 
 38, 11. 36, 6. 38 Rem. 2 | 
 
 78, 31. 27, 6 A 
 
 39, 7. 27, 6 A 7. 
 
 
 80, 11. 34, la 
 
 40, 6. l,3flf21Rem.3 | 
 
 81, 9. 17, 4d 
 
 41, 9. 13, 4 
 
 
 81, 14. 14, 3. 17, 4d 
 
 42, 2. 1 Rem. 2 28 Rem. 14 | 
 
 83, 2. 25 Rem. 5 
 
 43, 1. 25, 2 A ^ 
 
 
 83, 5. 27, 6 C r 
 
 44, 5. 31, 2 
 
 
 83, 12. 10 Rem. 7 
 
 44, 6. 27, 6 A g 
 
 
 85, 14. 4 Rem. 2 
 
 44, 20. 35, 6 
 
 
 86, 8. 13 Rem. 2 
 
1 68 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 Psalms 87, 
 
 5. 
 
 13, 
 
 1 
 
 88, 
 
 5. 
 
 25, 
 
 2 C^ 
 
 88, 
 
 6. 
 
 23 Rem. 5 
 
 89, 
 
 2. 
 
 35, 
 
 6 
 
 89, 
 
 40. 
 
 21 Note 3 
 
 90, 
 
 4. 
 
 27, 
 
 7 
 
 90, 
 
 16. 
 
 15, 
 
 3 
 
 92, 
 
 7. 
 
 32, 
 
 2 
 
 99, 
 
 6. 
 
 27, 
 
 6 A^ 
 
 101, 
 
 8. 
 
 27, 
 
 6 E^ 
 
 102, 
 
 4. 
 
 27, 
 
 6 Ay 
 
 102, 
 
 19. 
 
 23, 
 
 2 
 
 102, 
 
 28. 
 
 13, 
 
 6 
 
 103, 
 
 9. 
 
 32 Rem. 5 
 
 104, 
 
 2. 
 
 32, 
 
 8a 
 
 104, 
 
 8. 
 
 11. 
 
 2 
 
 104, 
 
 17. 
 
 30, 
 
 3 
 
 104, 
 
 18. 
 
 3 Rem. 4 
 
 104, 
 
 20. 
 
 J7, 
 
 3c 
 
 104, 
 
 25. 
 
 11, 
 
 3 a 
 
 105, 
 
 12. 
 
 27, 
 
 6F7 
 
 105, 
 
 24. 
 
 8> 
 
 1 
 
 106, 
 
 13. 
 
 21, 
 
 2C^ 
 
 107, 
 
 23. 
 
 5, 
 
 4 
 
 108, 
 
 7. 
 
 32, 
 
 11 
 
 109, 
 
 3. 
 
 32, 
 
 14 
 
 109, 
 
 4. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Rem. 2 
 
 109, 
 
 29. 
 
 3^ 
 
 , Sa 
 
 109, 
 
 30. 
 
 35, 
 
 6 
 
 112, 
 
 9. 
 
 5 21, 
 
 2C^ 
 
 115, 
 
 5. 7. ^ 39 Rem. 2 
 
 116, 
 
 16. 
 
 27, 
 
 QEs 
 
 118, 
 
 21. 
 
 15, 
 
 5 
 
 119, 
 
 14. 
 
 35 
 
 Rem. 1 
 
 119, 
 
 41. 
 
 32, 
 
 6 
 
 119, 
 
 86. 
 
 32, 
 
 9 
 
 119, 
 
 137 
 
 155. 37, 1-5 
 
 120, 
 
 5. 
 
 32, 
 
 Se 
 
 120, 
 
 7. 
 
 4, 
 
 7 
 
 125, 
 
 1. 
 
 28 
 
 Rem. 14 
 
 129, 
 
 6. 
 
 28, 
 
 5C5 
 
 130, 
 
 3. 
 
 15, 
 
 6 
 
 132, 
 
 11. 
 
 13, 
 
 8 
 
 136, 
 
 19. 
 
 20. 27, 6E 
 
 137, 
 
 5. 
 
 28, 
 
 5F/3 
 
 137, 8. 9. 29, 
 
 2 
 
 139, 
 
 2. 
 
 19, 
 
 5 
 
 139, 
 
 8. 
 
 28, 
 
 5E 
 
 Psalms 139, 19. 17, 4 5 
 
 142, 2. 32, 11 
 
 144, 1. 3, 13 
 
 144, 3. 16, 7 
 
 144, 14. 1, 2 
 
 145, 13. 30, 3. 39, 3 
 
 145, 14. 27, 6 Eg 
 
 147, 14. 23, 4 ^ 
 
 149, 2. 2, 2 e 
 
 Prov. 1, 28. 24, 3 
 
 2. 4. 4, 5 
 
 2, 21. 6, 2 
 
 2, 22. 19 Rem. 1 
 
 3, 10. 32, 8 -^ 
 
 3, 18. 36, 5 
 
 3, 26. 27, 6 AJ 
 
 6, 6. 18, 3 
 
 6, 16. 28, 2 c 
 
 6, 24. 4, 5 
 
 9, 10. 2, 2 e 
 
 10, 1. 39, 3 
 
 ]0, 4. 32, 11 
 
 10, 22, 41, 1 
 
 10, 24. 41, 1 
 
 12, 21. 25, 2 A /3 
 
 13, 21. 32 Rem. 1 
 
 14, 20. 34, 2 
 
 15, 20. 6 Rem. 2 
 
 16, 2. 38 Rem. 1 
 
 17, 3. 28, 2 ^ 
 
 17, 8. 4, 3 
 
 17, 12. 1, 2. 22 Rem. 5 
 
 18, 5. 30, 5 
 
 18, 22. 28, 7^ 
 
 21, 9. 19. 30, 5 
 
 21, 20. 6 Rem. 2 
 
 21, 27. 36, 5 
 
 22, 17. 15, 3 
 
 22, 19. 10, 1 
 
 22, 23. 33, 2 
 
 23, 24, 41, 3 
 
 24, 27. 28, 2 ^ 
 
 24, 28, 24, 1 5 
 
 24, 31. 32, 7 
 
 25, 3. 25,2CJ28,2(^ 
 
 25,12. 26. 28 Rem. 2 
 
 25, 25. 28, 2 ^ 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 169 
 
 Prov. 27, 7. 30 Rem. 2 
 
 Job. 15, 3. 
 
 27, 8. 3,16 
 
 15, 7. 
 
 27, 9. 38 Rem. 3 
 
 15, 24. 
 
 27, 24. 26 Rem. 4 
 
 16, 3. 
 
 28, 1. 36, 5 
 
 16,4 9 
 
 30, 18. 28, 2 ^ 
 
 16, 6. 
 
 30, 30. 25, 2 A |3 
 
 16, 7. 
 
 
 16, 17. 
 
 Job. 1, 5. 32, 9 
 
 17, 10. 
 
 1, 6. 27, 6 B a 
 
 17, 15. 
 
 1, 14. 27, 6Ba36,2 
 
 18, 21. 
 
 2, 3. 26, 3 
 
 19, 9. 
 
 2. 9- 26, 5 
 
 19, 16. 
 
 3, 4. 4, 7 
 
 19, 23. 
 
 3, 5. 37 Rem. 3 
 
 19, 26. 
 
 3, 8. 21 Rem. 3 
 
 20, 4. 
 
 3, 26. 14, 2 a 
 
 20, 19, 
 
 4, 2. 26, 8 
 
 20, 26. 
 
 4, 5. 19, 2 
 
 20, 33. 
 
 4, 17. 26, 4 
 
 21, 4. 
 
 5, 2. 27, 6 Eg 
 
 21, 9. 
 
 5, 5. 27, 5/5 
 
 21, 12. 
 
 5, 7. 28, 2d 
 
 21, 21. 
 
 5, 19. 28, 2 c 
 
 21, 25. 
 
 6, 5. 26, 4 
 
 21, 34. 
 
 6, 12. 4,2 26 Rem. 3. 8. 
 
 22, 3. 
 
 30, 4. 39, 6 
 
 22, 7. 
 
 6, 28. 21 2C J 
 
 22, 9. 
 
 1, 3. 19Rem.l34,l 
 
 22, 12. 
 
 7, 13. 27, 6 A C- 
 
 22, 20. 
 
 7, 18. 13, 2 
 
 22, 30. 
 
 7, 20. 27, 6B28,7 
 
 23, 2. 
 
 8, 3. 26, 4 
 
 23, 3. 
 
 8, 9, 30 Rem. 4 
 
 23, 6. 
 
 8, 11, 26 Rem. 6 
 
 23, 12. 
 
 9, 15. 28, 5G 
 
 23, 13. 
 
 10, 4. 26, 4 
 
 24, 5. 
 
 10, 7. 28, 5 G ^ 
 
 24, 19. 
 
 10, 17. 28, 2 6 
 
 24, 25. 
 
 11, 2. 7. 26, 4 
 
 26, 2. 
 
 11, 15. 27, 6 C /3 
 
 26, 5. 
 
 12, 11. 28, 2d 
 
 27, 6. 
 
 12, 17. 19. 23, 4/ 
 
 27, 7. 
 
 13, 7. 26 Rem. 6 
 
 28, 17. 
 
 13, 13. 21, 3 
 
 29, 10. 
 
 13, 16. 40 Rem. 1 
 
 29, 23. 
 
 13, 28. 19 Rem. 2 
 
 29, 25. 
 
 14, 14. 26, 3 
 
 31, 15. 
 
 27, 7 
 
 26 Rem. 6 
 
 21 Rem. 1 
 
 26 Rem. 5 
 . 10. 35, 6 
 
 17, Ic 
 
 19 Rem. 2 
 
 28, 5G^ 
 
 18, 4. 21, 2Cr 
 
 26, 7 
 
 5, 4 
 
 35, 3 
 
 35, 6 
 
 17, 4 
 
 27, 6 C f3 
 
 26, 3 
 
 28 Rem. 1 
 
 37 Rem. 1 
 
 35, 6 
 
 26 Rem. 4 
 i25Rem. 2. 27,6C|3 
 
 23, 4 c 
 
 38, 1 
 
 27, 6Ar 
 
 32, 9 
 
 26, 4 
 
 40 Rem. 1 
 
 34 Note 2 
 
 28, 2 ^ 
 
 28, 5 Ff 
 
 25 Rem. 11 
 
 27, 6 B ^ 
 
 17, 4 21,2 0/32 
 
 25, 2Ar 
 
 41, 2 
 
 27, 6A^ 
 
 5, 5 
 
 28, 7 * 
 
 25, 1 
 
 4, 4 
 
 27 Rem. 3 
 
 27, 6Ca 
 
 27, 6 F r 
 
 25, 5 
 
 38, 1 
 
 35 Note 4 
 
 40, 2 a 
 
 23, 6 
 
I/O 
 
 INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 Job. 
 
 Cant. 
 
 Ruth 
 
 31, 18. 
 
 28, 4^ 
 
 32, 7. 
 
 38, 1 
 
 32, 22. 
 
 21 Rem. 5 
 
 33, 13. 
 
 25, 2 A |3 
 
 34, 3. 
 
 28, Id 
 
 34, 10. 
 
 27, 7 
 
 34, 17. 
 
 26 Rem. 4 
 
 34, 23. 
 
 40 Rem. 1 
 
 34, 27. 
 
 28 Rem. 9 
 
 35, 15. 
 
 25 Rem. 10 
 
 36, 26. 
 
 41, 2 
 
 37, 14. 
 
 32, 14 
 
 37,16.18 
 
 26 Rem. 6 
 
 38, 4, 5, 18. 28 Rem. 6 
 
 38, 12. 27, 6 C 
 
 38, 21. 
 
 38, 1 
 
 38, 30. 
 
 35, 4 
 
 38, 32. 
 
 37, 3 
 
 39, 13. 
 
 36, 3 
 
 39, 15. 
 
 36, 4 
 
 39, 17. 
 
 27, 6 A r 
 
 40, 8. 9. 
 
 26 Rem. 4 
 
 40, 23. 
 
 27, 6 D^ 
 
 40, 29. 
 
 35, 4 
 
 41, 7. 
 
 32, 9 
 
 41, 20. 
 
 4, 8 
 
 42, 7. 
 
 28, 5 C^ 
 
 42, 8. 
 
 28 Rem. 15 
 
 42, 15. 
 
 37, \a 
 
 1, 4. 
 
 17, 1^ 
 
 1, 6. 
 
 7 Rem. 1 
 
 1, 15. 
 
 30, 4 
 
 2, 3. 
 
 21, 2 C 
 
 2, 7. 
 
 19, 1 
 
 2, 11. 
 
 28 Rem. 1 
 
 2, 17. 
 
 27, 6 Er 
 
 3,7. 7 Rem. 1 10 Rem. 7 
 
 3, 8. 
 
 23 Rem. 1 
 
 5, 6. 
 
 28 Rem. 1 
 
 6, 1. 
 
 8, 4^ 
 
 6, 8. 
 
 10 Rem. 5 
 
 6, 9. 37 Rem. 3 
 
 7, 12. 
 
 32, 6 
 
 7, 13. 
 
 26, 6 
 
 8, 6. 
 
 35, 4 
 
 1, 8. 
 
 19,1 
 
 Ruth 1, 13. 25, 2 B /3 
 
 Lam. 1, 5. 9. 32, 9 
 
 1, 8. 32, 5 
 
 1, J4. 12, 5 
 
 1, 16. 32, 7 
 
 1, 17. 35, 6 
 
 3, 23. 13, 2 
 
 3, 38. 26, 5 
 
 3, 48. 32, 7 
 
 5, 16. 29, 1 
 
 Eccl. 1, 9. 25 Rem. 3 
 
 1, 16. 19, 5 
 
 2, 7. 37 Rem. 3 
 2, 11. 19, 5 
 
 2, 19. 26 Rem. 5 
 
 3, 11. 25, 4 
 4,1. 7. 21, 2 C^2 
 5, 15. 28, 5 H ^ 
 5, 18. 31, 2 
 
 7, 26. 3, 4 
 
 8, 15. 19, 5 
 
 9, 4. 41 Rem. 1 
 10, 10. 40 Rem. 1 
 12, 9. 36, 3 
 
 Esther 1, 3. 9 Rem. 1 
 1, 5. 4, 14 
 1, 8. 13, 1 
 
 1, 20. 19, 1 
 
 2, 11. 35, 5 
 
 3, 13, 22, 5 Atf 
 
 4, 1. 32, 5 
 
 4, 2. 21 Rem. 1 
 4, 14. 26 Rem. 1 
 4, 16 24 Rem. 1 
 
 7, 
 
 2. 17, 3 
 
 7, 
 
 4. 28, 5 F 
 
 7, 
 
 5. 11, 3 c 
 
 8, 
 
 1. 13, 3 
 
 8, 
 
 8. 22 Rem. ^ 
 
 9, 
 
 1. 13, 5 
 
 0, 
 
 2. 26, 3 
 
 Daniel 1, 3. 28, 2 * 
 
 2, 30. 19 Rem. 1 
 5, 2. 26, 6 A /3 
 
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED. 
 
 171 
 
 Daniel 5. 3. 19 Rem. 1 
 
 8, 13. 28, 2 
 
 9, 17. 5, 2 
 
 9, 23. 4 Eem. 2 
 9, 24. 34 Note 2 
 9, 25. 21, 2 C/31 
 9, 26. 9, 5 
 11, 7. 13, 8. 27,6 ( 
 Ezra 7, 8. 9 Rem. 1 
 8, 16. 27, 6E 
 8, 29. 3, 9 
 8, 35. 9, 5 
 
 Neh. 2, 12. 24, 1 a 
 
 3, 20. 21 Rem. 4 
 
 3, 37. 27, 6 Br 
 
 4, 4. 27, 6 A r 
 
 4, 17. 25 Rem. 9 
 
 5, 2. 3. 4. 13, 8 
 5, 5. 25, 2Ca 
 7, 2. 27, 6Er 
 9, 19. 41 Rem. 1 
 9, 28. 4 Rem. 3 
 9, 35. 3 Rem. 4 
 
 I. Chron. 7, 1. 41 Rem. 1 
 
 9, 13. 5 Rem. 3 
 13, 2. 21 Rem. 4 
 17, 4. 26, 3 
 19, 3. 28, 5Ea 
 27, 24. 34 Rem. 
 29, 9. 32, 5 
 
 II. Chron. 3, 3. 9, 3 ^ 
 
 7, 21. 41 Rem. 1 
 9, 20. 25, 4 
 11, 21. 9, 3 . ^ 
 16, 12. 33, 4 
 
 16, 14. 28, 2 ^ 
 
 17, 7. 27, 6 E g 
 21, 4. 27, 6 C 
 26, 15. 21 Rem. 1 
 
 26, 18. 28, 5 
 
 27, 7. 26, 3 
 31, 2. 27, 6 E g 
 
 31, 10. 34, 1 c 
 82, 15. 25, 2 A /3 
 
 32, 32. 26, 3 
 
Messrs. LUZAC fe Co.'s 
 
 PUBLICATIONS CONCERNING WESTERN ASIA". 
 (Includ. Books on the Old Testament). 
 
 Publishers to the India Office, the Asiatic Society of 
 Bengal, the University of Chicago, etc. 
 
 Assab'iniyya. A Philosophical Poem in Arabic by MusA B. Tubi. 
 Together with the Hebrew Version and Commentary styled Batte 
 Hannefes by Solomon B. Immanuel Dapiera. Edited and Translated 
 bij Hartwig Hirschfeld. 8vo. pp. 6i. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Babylonian (The) and Oriental Record. A Monthly Magazine of the 
 Antiquities of the East. Edited by Prof. Terrien de Lacouperie. 
 Published Monthly. 
 
 Single Numbers, is. 6d. each. Annual Subscription, 12s. 6d. 
 
 Bezold, Ch. Oriental Diplomacy: being the Transliterated Text of the 
 Cuneiform Despatches between the Kings of Egypt and Western 
 Asia in the 15th century before Christ, discovered at Tell-el-Amarna, 
 and now preserved in the British Museum. With full Vocabulary, 
 Grammatical Notes, &c., by Charles Bezold. Post 8vo. Cloth, pp. 
 XLIV, 124. 18^. 
 
 Biblia. A Monthly Magazine devoted to Biblical Archaeology and Oriental 
 Research. Published Monthly. Annual Subscription. 5j. 
 
 Biblical World (The). Continuing the Old and New Testament Stu- 
 dent. Editor, William R. Harper. Published Monthly. Annual 
 Subscription. 9^. 
 
 Blackden, M. W. and Eraser, G. W. Collection of Hieratic Graffiti 
 from the Alabaster, Quarry of Hat-Nub, situated near Tell-el-Amarna, 
 found December 28th 1891 , copied September, 1892. Oblong, 
 pp. 10. los. 
 
 UUZAC & Co., 46, Great Russell Street, London, W.C. 
 
LUZAC & Go's Publications. 
 
 Budge, E. A. Wallis. Oriental with and Wisdom; or The Laughable 
 Stories collected by Bar-Hebraeus. The Syriac Text with an English 
 Translation, by E. A. Wallis Budge, Litt. D., F. S. A., Keeper of 
 the Department of Egyptian and Assyrian Antiquities, British Museum. 
 (Vol. I of Luzac's Semitic Text andTranslation Series). 8vo. Cloth, 
 pp. XXVII, 204, 166. 25 J. 
 
 Harper, Robert Francis. Assyrian and Babylonian Letters, belonging 
 to the K Collection of the British Museum. By Robert Francis 
 Harper, of the University of Chicago. Parts I to IV. Post 8vo. 
 Cloth. I. 5 J. each Part. 
 
 Hebraica. A Quarterly Journal in the interests of Semitic Study. Edited 
 by William R. Harper and the Staff of the Semitic Department of 
 the University of Chicago. Published Quarterly. 
 
 Annual Subscription. 14^-. 
 
 Jastrow's Dictionary of the Targumim, the Talmud Bablii and Yerus- 
 halmi, and the Midrashic Literature. Compiled by M. Jastrow, Ph. D. 
 Parts I to VIII. 4to. pp. 480. 5^. each Part. 
 
 King, Leonard W. Babylonian Magic and Sorcery. Being "The Prayers 
 of the Lifting of the Hand." The Cuneiform Texts of a Group of 
 Babylonian and Assyrian Incantations and Magical Formulae, edited 
 with Transliterations, Translations, and Full Vocabulary from Tablets 
 of the Kuyunjik Collection preserved in the British Museum. By 
 Leonard W. King, M. A., Assistant in the Departement of Egyptian 
 and Assyrian Antiquities, British Museum. Roy. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XXXII, 
 199 and 76 Cuneiform-Plates. iSs. net. 
 
 Luzac's Oriental List. Containing Notes and News on, and a Biblio- 
 graphical List of, all new Publications on Africa and the East. 
 Published Monthly. Annual Subscription, 3^. Vol. I to VII (1890 
 1896) are still to be had (with Index, half-bound). 
 
 Price of Vols. I III 6s. each. IV VII 5^. each. 
 
 Luzac's Semitic text and translation series. Vol. I. Containing Dr. E. A. 
 Wallis Budge's Edition and Translation of Bar-Hebraeus' Laughable 
 Stories. 21^-. 
 
 Margoliouth, D. S. Arabic Papyri of the Bodleian Library, reproduced 
 by the Collotype Process. With Transcription and Translation. Text 
 in 4to. pp. 7 and 2 Facsimiles in large folio. 5-^- 
 
 Margoliouth, D. S. Chrestomathia Baidawiana. The Commentary of 
 El-Baidawi on Sura III. Translated and explained for the use of 
 Students of Arabic. By D. S. Margoliouth, M. A. Laudian Professor 
 of Arabic in the University of Oxford, etc. etc. Post 8vo. Cloth. 
 pp. XVI, 216. I2s. net. 
 
 LUZAC & Co., 46, Great Russell Street, London, W.C. 
 
LUZAC & Go's Publications. 
 
 Muallakat. The Seven Poems suspended in the Temple at Mecca. Trans- 
 lated from the Arabic. By Capt. F. E. Johnson. With an Introduc- 
 tion by Shaikh Taizullabhai. 8vo. pp. XXIV, 238. 'js. 6d. 
 
 Ruben (Paul). Critical Remarks upon some passages of the Old Testa- 
 ment, by Paul Ruben, Ph. D. 4to. Cloth, pp. II, 23, 14. 3^. 6d. 
 
 Sacred Books of the Old Testament. A critical edition of the Hebrew 
 Text. Printed in Colours, with Notes. Prepared by eminent Biblical 
 Scholars of Europe and America. Under the Editorial Direction of 
 Paul Haupt, Professor in the John Hopkins University, Baltimore. 
 Edition de luxe, in 120 numbered copies only. Subscription price 
 for the complete Work (20 parts). 20. 
 
 Prospectuses sent on application. 
 
 Sayce, A. H. Address to the Assyrian Section of the Ninth International 
 Congress of Orientalists. 8vo, pp. 32. is. 
 
 Tiele, C. P. Western Asia, according to the most Recent Discoveries. 
 Rectorial Address on the occasion of the 318th Anniversary of the 
 Leyden University, 8th February, 1893. Translated by Elizabeth J. 
 Taylor. Small 8vo. Bound, pp. 36. 2s. 6d. 
 
 Transactions of the Ninth International Congress of Orientalists. 
 
 (Held in London, 5th to 12th September, 1892), Edited by E. 
 Delmar Morgan. 2 Vols. Roy. 8vo, cloth. 1. 15^. 
 
 Vol. I. contains: Indian and Aryan Sections. 1. \s. 
 
 Vol. II. contains: Semitic, Egypt and Africa, Geographical, Archaic Greece and the 
 East, Per&ia and Turkey, China, Central Asia and the Far East, Australasia, 
 Anthropology and Mythology Sections. 1. \s. 
 
 Wijnkoop, J. D. Manual of Hebrew Syntax. Translated from the Dutch 
 by C. VAN DEN BiESEN. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XXII, 152 and Index. 5^. 
 
 Wildeboer, G. The Origin of the Canon of the Old Testament. An 
 Historico-Critical Enquiry. Translated by Wisner Bacon. Edited, 
 with Preface, by Professor George F. Moore. Roy. 8vo. Cloth, 
 pp. XII, 132. 7J. 6d. 
 
 Winckler, H. The Tell-El-Amarna Letters. Transliteration, English 
 translation.^ Vocabulary, etc. Roy. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XLII, 416, and 
 Registers 50 pages. 1. U". 
 
 The same. In Paper Covers. i- 
 
 LUZAC & Co., 46, Great Russell Street, London, W.C. 
 
A COMPLETE LIST OF 
 
 BOOKS & PERIODICALS, 
 
 PUBLISHED AND SOLD BY 
 
 LUZAC and Co., 
 
 Publishers to the India Office, the Asiatic Society of 
 Bengal, the University of Chicago, etc. 
 
 (With Index) 
 
 1740 
 
 LONDON : 
 
 LUZAC & Co. 
 
 46, GREAT RUSSELL STREET (Opposite the British Museum). 
 
 1898. 
 
MESSRS. LUZAC & Co. having been appointed 
 OFFICIAL AGENTS FOR THE SALE OF IN- 
 DIAN GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS and 
 PUBLISHERS TO THE SECRETARY OF STATE 
 FOR INDIA IN COUNCIL, are able to supply at 
 the shortest notice all Works published by the GO- 
 VERNMENT OF INDIA. 
 
 They have also been appointed OFFICIAL EN- 
 GLISH AGENTS AND PUBLISHERS to the 
 ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL, and THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, and keep all Works 
 published by the above Society and University in stock. 
 
 ORIENTAL STUDENTS are invited to submit to 
 Messrs, LUZAC & Co, their MANUSCRIPTS for 
 
 publication before sending them elsewhere. 
 
 Messrs. LUZAC and Co, are able to Supply, at 
 the Shortest Notice and most favourable Terms , all 
 English, Foreign, and Oriental Books and Perio- 
 dicals. Monthly Lists Issued Regularly and Sent 
 Gratis on Application. 
 
 Messrs. LUZAC and Co. have a Large Stock of New 
 and Second-hand Oriental Works, of which they issue 
 regularly Lists and Catalogues, which are to be had on 
 application. 
 
COMPLETE LIST OF 
 BOOKS AND PERIODICALS, 
 
 PUBLISHED AND SOLD BY 
 
 LUZAC and Co. 
 
 American Journal of Theology. Edited by Mem- 
 bers of the Divinity Faculty of the University of 
 Chicago. Vol. I. (Vol. II in progress). Quarterly. An- 
 nual Subscription. 14^. 6d. 
 
 "The theologians of America are attempting to supply a real need... 
 it aims at a complete presentation of all recent theological work ... we 
 give it a hearty welcome, as a scheme likely to prove of real utility to 
 theological students and to the cause of truth." Guai-dian. 
 
 American Journal of Semitic Languages and Lite- 
 ratures (continuing Hebraica). Edited by WILLIAM R. 
 Harper and the Staff of the Semitic Department of 
 the University of Chicago. Vol. I XIII. (Vol. XIV in 
 progress). Published quarterly. Annual subscription. 14^-. 
 
 American Journal of Sociology. Vol. I III. (Vol. 
 
 IV in progress). Published quarterly. Annual subscrip- 
 tion. 10^. 6d. 
 
 Anandas'rama Sanskrit Series. Edited by Pan- 
 
 dits of the Anandas'rama. Published by Mahadeva 
 
 Chimnaji Apte, B.A., LL.B., Pleader High Court, and 
 Fellow of the University of Bombay. Nos. i to 35. 
 In 42 Vols. Royal 8vo. Price of the set 16. Single 
 Vols, at different prices. 
 
Luzac & Go's Publications. 
 
 Asiatic Society of Bengal, Journal of. Messrs Luzac 
 
 and Co are the sole agents for Great Britain and 
 America of the Asiatic Society of Bengal and can 
 supply the continuation of the Journal at 35. each 
 No., of the Proceedings at i^. each No. As they 
 keep a large stock of the Journal and Proceedings, 
 they can also supply any single No. at the published 
 price. 
 
 Assab'iniyya. A philosophical Poem in Arabic by 
 Musa B. Tubi. Together with the Hebrew Version 
 and Commentary styled Batte Hannefes by Solomon 
 Immanuel Dapiera. Edited and translated by Hartwig 
 HiRSCHFELD. 8vo. pp. 61. 2s. 6d. net. 
 
 Assyrian and Babylonian Letters. 4 vols. See: 
 Harper. 
 
 Aston (W. G.) A Grammar of the Japanese Writ- 
 ten Language. Second Edition, enlarged and improved. 
 Roy. 8vo. Cloth, pp. 306. (Published 28.^.) Reduced- 
 Price, 18^. 
 
 Aston (W^. G.) A Short Grammar of the Japanese 
 Spoken Language. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo. Cloth, 
 pp. 212. (Published 12s.) Reduced-Price, js. 6d. 
 
 Babylonian and Oriental Record. (The) A 
 
 Monthly Magazine of the Antiquities of the East. 
 Edited by Prof. Terrien DE Lacouperie. Vol. I 
 VL (Vol. VII in progress). Published monthly. Single 
 Numbers, i*. 6d. each. 
 
 Babylonian Magic and Sorcery. See: King. 
 
 Bana's Kadambari. Translated, with Occasional Omis- 
 sions, with a full Abstract of the Continuation of the 
 Romance by the Author's Son Bhushanabhatta, by 
 C. M. Ridding. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XXIV, 232. los. 
 
 Bana's Harsa Carita. An Historical Work, translated 
 from the Sanskrit, by E. B. Cowell and F. W. Thomas. 
 8vo. Cloth, pp. XIV, 284. los. 
 
Liizac and Go's Publications 
 
 Bezold (Ch.) Oriental Diplomacy: being the 
 transliterated Text of the Cuneiform Despatches 
 between the King of Egypt and Western Asia in the 
 XVth. century before Christ, discovered at Tell el 
 Amarna, and now preserved in the British Museum. 
 With full Vocabulary, grammatical Notes, &c., by 
 Charles Bezold. Post 8vo. Cloth, pp. XLIV, 124. 
 i8i-. net. 
 
 "For the Assyriologist the book is a servicable and handy supplement to 
 the British Museum volume on the Tell El-Amarna tablets. The author 
 is specially skilled in the art of cataloguing and dictionary making and 
 it is needless to say that he has done his work well". The Academy. 
 
 "Die in dem Hauptwerke (The Tell el Amarna Tablets in the British 
 Museum with autotype Facsimiles, etc.) vermisstte Transcription des 
 Keilschrifttextes der Tafeln, sowie ein sehr ausfiihrliches, mituntur die 
 VoUstandigkeit einer Concordanz erreichendes Vocabulary bietet die 
 Oriental Diplomacy von C. Bezold, das eben deshalb gewissermassen 
 als Schlussel zu dem Publicationswerke betrachtet werden kann." 
 
 Liter. Centralblatt. 
 
 Wichtig und sehr niitzlich vor allem wegen der Einleitung und des 
 Worterverzeichnisses . . . Transkription und kurze Inhaltsangabe der Briefe 
 sehr zweckmassig .... eine anerkennenswerthe Leistung." 
 
 Deutsche Litterattirzeitiing. 
 
 Biblia. A Monthly Magazine, devoted to Bi- 
 blical Archaeology and Oriental Research. Vol. 1 X. 
 (Vol. XI in progress). Published monthly. Annual Sub- 
 scription, 5.$-. 
 
 Biblical World (The) Continuing the Old and New 
 Testament Student. Edited by WILLIAM R. HARPER. 
 New Series. Vol. I X. (Vol. XI and XII in progress). 
 Published monthly. Annual Subscription, \os. 6d. 
 
 "The Biblical World makes a faithful record and helpful critic of 
 present Biblical Work, as well as an efficient practical and positive 
 independent force in stimulating and instructing the student, preacher 
 and teacher" 
 
 Bibliographical List of Books on Africa and 
 the Kast. Published in England. 2 Vols. Vol. I. Con- 
 taining the Books published between the Meetings 
 of the Eighth Oriental Congress at Stockholm, in 1889, 
 and the Ninth Congress in London in 1892. Vol. II. 
 Containing the Books published between the Meetings 
 
Luzac & Go's Ptiblications. 
 
 of the Ninth Oriental Congress in London, in 1892, 
 and the Tenth Oriental Congress at Geneva, in 1894. 
 Systematically arranged, with Preface and Author's 
 Index, by C. G. Luzac. i2mo. each Vol. is. 
 
 Bibliotheca Indica. Messrs Luzac & Co. are 
 agents for the sale of this important series and keep 
 most of the numbers in stock. 
 
 Blackden (M. W.) and G. W. Frazer. Col- 
 lection of Hieratic Graffiti, from the Alabaster 
 Quarry of Hat-Nub, situated near Tell El Amarna. 
 Found December 28th. 1891, copied September, 1892. 
 Obi. pp. 10. \os. 
 
 Buddhaghosuppatti ; or, Historical Romance of 
 the Rise and Career of Buddaghosa. Edited 
 and translated by jAMES GRAY, Professor of Pali. 
 Rangoon College. Two Parts in one. Demy 8vo. Cloth, 
 pp. VIII, 75 and 36. 6s. 
 
 Budge (E. A. Wallis) The Laughable Stories 
 collected by Bar-Hebraeus. The Syriac Text 
 
 with an English Translation, by E. A. Wallis Budge, 
 Litt. D., F. S. A., Keeper of the Department of 
 Egyptian and Assyrian Antiquities, British Museum. 
 8vo. Cloth. 2\s. net. [Luzac's Semitic Texts and Trans- 
 lation Series, Vol. I]. 
 
 "Dr. Budge's book will be welcome as a handy reading book for 
 advanced students of Syriac, but in the mean time the stories will be an 
 addition to the literature of gnomes and proverbs, of which so many are 
 found in India, and in Persian, Hebrew and Arabic, although not yet 
 published. We are happy to say that Dr. Budge's new book is well 
 edited and translated as far as we can judge". Athenceuni. 
 
 "The worthy Syrian Bishops idea of humour may excite admiration 
 when we hear that he collected his quips in the grey dawn of the 
 middle ages". Pall Mall Gazette. 
 
 "Man sieht, das Buch ist in mehr als einer Hinsicht interessant, und 
 wir sind Budge fiir die Herausgabe aufrichtig dankbar. Lit. Ce7ttralb. 
 
 "Sous le titre de Recits amusants.^ le celebre polygraphe syrien Bar- 
 hebraeus a reuni une collection de sept cent vingt-sept contes, divises 
 en vingt chapitres et renfermant des aphorismes, des anecdotes et des 
 fables d'animaux ayant un caractere soit moral, soit simplement recre- 
 atif. Le livre nous etait connu par quelques specimens publics prece- 
 
Luzac & Go's Publications. 5 
 
 dement. M. Budge, qui a deja rendu tant de services aux lettres syria- 
 
 ques, vient d'editer I'ouvrage entier avec une traduction anglaise 
 
 En tous cas, M. B. a eu raison de ne pas faire un choix et de donner 
 Touvrage en son entier .... Les aphorismes, ecrits dans un style concis 
 et avec, une pointe dont la finesse n'est pas toujours sensible, presen- 
 tent des difficultes de traduction dont M. B. a generalement triomphe." 
 
 Revue Critique. 
 
 "E questo un libro singolare, appartemente ad un genere assai scarso 
 nella letteratura siriaca, quantunque cosi ricca, cioe a quello dell'amena 
 letteratura. Bar Ebreo scrisse questo libro nella vecchiaia, o furse allora 
 mise insieme e ordino estr atti che avea prese nelle lunghe letture da 
 lui fatte, di tanto opere e cosi svariate .... I cultori degli studi siriaci 
 saranno assai grati al Dr. Budge per questo suo novello contribute; 
 I'edizione per carte e per tipi e veramente bellissima." La Culiura, 
 
 Budge, see Luzac's Semitic Text and Trans- 
 lation Series. Vols. I, III, V and VII. 
 
 Cappeller (Carl) A Sanskrit-English Dictio- 
 nary. Based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Royal 
 8vo. Cloth, pp. VIII, 672 [Published i. is\ Reduced 
 to los. 6d. 
 
 "Linguistic and other students should hail with satisfaction the pu- 
 blication of a cheap and handy Sanskrit-English Dictionary, such as is 
 now to be found in the new English edition of Prof. Cappeller's San- 
 skrit-German 'Worterbuch,' recently published by Messrs. Luzac. The 
 book is well adapted to the use of beginners, as it specially deals with 
 the text usually read in commencing Sanskrit ", but it will be of use also 
 to philological students or such as have mastered the Nagari character 
 as it includes most Vedic words, a great desideratum in many earlier 
 dictionaries, especially such as were founded on native sources. The basis 
 of the present work is, on the contrary, the great lexicon of Boethlingk 
 and Roth with the addition of compound forms likely to be of service 
 to beginners." Athenceum. 
 
 "The English edition of Prof. Cappeller's Sanskrit Dictionary is some 
 thing more than a mere translation of the German edition. It includes 
 the vocabulary of several additional texts ; many compounds have been 
 inserted which are not given in the Petersburg lexicons; and some im- 
 provements have been made in the arrangement. The errors enumerated 
 by the reviewer of the Academy have for the most part been corrected, 
 
 though a few still remain The book is certainly the cheapest, and, 
 
 for a beginner, in some respects the best, of existing Sanskrit-English 
 dictionaries." Academy. 
 
 "Professor Cappeller furnishes the Student of Sanskrit, if not with a 
 complete Lexicon, for that he tells us, was not his object, still 
 with a handy and yet very full vocabulary of all the words occurring in 
 the texts which are generally studied in that language. His plan is to 
 avoid all unnecessary complications, to give each word in such a manner 
 
Luzac & Go's Publications. 
 
 as to show its formation, if it is not itself a stem. It is not merely an 
 English version of the author's Sanskrit-German Dictionary, nor merely 
 an enlarged edition of the same; it is a new work, with a distinct plan 
 and object of its own. We can recommend it to the Sanskrit student as 
 a sufficient dictionary for all practical purposes, which will enable him 
 to dispense with larger and more costly and complicated Lexicons till 
 he has acquired a considerable proficiency in this difficult and scientific 
 language." Asiatic Quarterly Review. 
 
 Ceylon. A Tale of Old See: Sinnatamby. 
 
 Chakrabarti (J. Ch.) The Native States of India. 
 8vo. Cloth, pp. XIV, 274. With Map. ^s. net. 
 
 Cool (W.) With the Dutch in the East. An 
 
 Outline of the Military Operations in Lombock, 1894, 
 Giving also a Popular Account of the Native Charac- 
 teristics, Architecture, Methods of Irrigations, Agri- 
 cultural Pursuits, Folklore, Religious Customs and a 
 History of the Introduction of Islamism and Hinduism 
 into the Island. By Capt. W. CoOL (Dutch Engineer), 
 Knight of the Order of Orange Nassau; decorated 
 for important War Services in the Dutch Indies ; 
 Professor at the High School of War, the Hague. 
 Translated from the Dutch by E. J. Taylor. Illustrated 
 by G. B. HOOYER. Late Lieut. Col. of the Dutch 
 Indian Army; Knight of the Military Order of Wil- 
 liam ; decorated for important War Services in the 
 Dutch Indies. Roy. Svo. Cloth. 21s. 
 
 "There are, it is to be feared, but few books published in this country 
 from which English readers can obtain information as to the doings of 
 the Dutch in their Eastern colonies. For this reason we are glad that 
 Capt. Cool's account of the Lombock expedition has been translated." 
 
 Athencetim. 
 
 "The book contains an interesting account of the Balinese and Sassak 
 customs, and throws some light on the introduction of the Mahomedan 
 and Hindu religions into Lombock . . . The translation by Miss E. J. Taylor 
 is satisfactory, and some of the illustrations are excellent." The Times. 
 
 "Lombock forms a small link in the long chain of volcanic lands . . . 
 To folklorists and students of primitive religions it has always presented 
 many attractive features . . . They will be much interested in the local 
 traditions recorded in the volume before us. Miss Taylor's version deserves 
 a word of recognition, and the general equipment of the book is credi- 
 table to the Amsterdam press. There is a good index." Academy. 
 
Liizac & Go's Publications. 
 
 "The author not only describes the military operations, but gives a full 
 history of Lombock and its people. Much curious information as to a land 
 very much out of the way and little known to English readers is given. 
 In addition the account of the actual warfare is full of incident. The 
 book is freely illustrated." Yorkshire Daily Post. 
 
 "This is a work which will no doubt attract considerable attention, 
 both in the West and throughout the East. Miss Taylor has acquitted 
 herself as a translator with rare ability and taste, and the comprehensive 
 and excellent way in which the work is illustrated adds an additional 
 charm to what is at once the most entertaining and most attractive chapter 
 of Netherlands Indian history." European Mail. 
 
 "Besides containing a great deal of information concerning this hitherto 
 very slightly known island and its inhabitants. Captain Cool's volume is 
 profusely and excellently illustrated . . . Miss Taylor's translation of it is 
 fluent and thoroughly readable." Glasgow Herald. 
 
 Cowell, E. B., See: Sana's Harsa Carita. 
 
 Cowper (B. H.) Principles of Syriac Grammar. Trans- 
 lated and abridged from the work of Dr. HoFFMANN. 
 8vo. Cloth, pp. 184. ys. 6d. 
 
 Oust (R. N.) The Gospel Message or Essays, Ad- 
 y dresses, Suggestions and Warnings of the different 
 aspects of Christian Missions to Non Christian Races and 
 peoples. 8vo. pp. 494. Paper 6s. 6d. Cloth, ys. 6d. 
 
 ". . . . There are few objects of controversy in missionary matters which 
 are not very fully discussed by Dr. CuST, and if we not infrequently 
 differ from him we gladly thank him for copious information and the 
 benefits of his long experience". Guardia?z. 
 
 "It is a big book, it ranges over a very wide field, and it is never 
 dull or dry". Expository Times. 
 
 "The scheme is so comprehensive as to include almost every detail 
 of the missionary enterprise. Every essay is stamped, of course with the 
 personality of its author, whose views are expressed with characteristic 
 force and clearness". The Record. 
 
 Cust (R. N.) Essay on the Common Features 
 which appear in all Forms of Religious belief. 
 
 Post 8vo. Cloth, pp. XXIV, 194. S^' 
 
 "Dr. CusT has put his very considerable knowledge to excellent purposes 
 in this modest little publication. He seems most at home with the faiths 
 of the East, but even the most elementary of savage creeds have not 
 escaped him". Fall Mall Gazette. 
 
 Oust (R. N.) Essay on Religious Conceptions. Post 
 8vo. Cloth, pp. V, 148. c^s. 
 
Liizac & Go's Pitblications. 
 
 Cust (R. N.) Linguistic and Oriental Essays. 
 
 Fourth Series. From 1861 to 1895. 8vo. pp. XXV^ 
 634. Paper Covers. 16.9., Cloth. \js. 6d. 
 
 Dawlatshah's Lives of the Persian Poets. Edited 
 
 by Edward G. Browne, Lecturer in Persian in the 
 University of Cambridge. Vol. i. Tadhkir'atu'sh Sh'ara. 
 8vo. Cloth. iZs. net. 
 
 Edkins (Joseph) China's Place in Philology. 
 
 An Attempt to show that the Languages of Europe 
 and Asia have a common Origin. Demy 8vo. Cloth, 
 pp. XXIII, 403. (Published 10^. 6d.) ys. 6d. 
 
 Edkins (Joseph) Introduction to the Study 
 of the Chinese Characters. Royal 8vo. Boards. 
 
 pp. XIX, 211, 10 1. (Published i%s.) 12s. 6d. 
 
 Edkins (Joseph) Nirvana of the Northern 
 
 Buddhists. 8vo. pp. 21. Reprint. 6d. 
 
 Edkins (Joseph) Chinese Architecture. Con- 
 tents. I. Classical Style. 2. Post-Confucian 
 Style. 3. Buddhist Style. 4. Modern Style. 8vo. 
 pp. 36. i^. 
 
 Edkins (Joseph) Chinese Currency. Roy. 8vo. 
 pp. 29. i^. 
 
 Edkins (Joseph) Ancient Symbolism among 
 the Chinese. Cr. 8vo. pp. 26. 6d. 
 
 Efes Damim. A Series of Conversations at Jeru- 
 salem between a Patriarch of the Greek Church and 
 a Chief Rabbi of the Jews, concerning the Malicious 
 Charge against the Jews of using Christian Blood. By 
 J. B. LevinsOHN. Translated from the Hebrew by 
 Dr. L. LOEWE. Roy. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XVI, 208. (Pu- 
 blished 8.S-.) Reduced Price 2s. 6d. 
 
 Eitel (E. J.) Europe in China. The History 
 
 of Hongkong. From the Beginning to the year 1882.. 
 8vo. Cloth, pp. VII, 575. With Index. 15^-. net. 
 
 "His work rises considerably above the level commonly attained by 
 colonial histories written from a colonial point of view". Times. 
 
Liizac & Cos Publications. 
 
 "His painstaking volume is really a detailed history of the colony 
 and of the adminstration of successive governors from 1841 down to the 
 present day". Daily Telegraph. 
 
 "This is an interesting book. The subject is full of matter, and Dr. 
 EiTEL has, as a rule, treated it successfully. Athenmun. 
 
 ". . . . The student will find Dr. Eitel's book a very storehouse of 
 information .... has told it with a mastery of fact that vouches for his 
 industry and perseverance". Sattirday Review. 
 
 Gladstone (Right Hon. W. E.) Archaic Greece 
 and the East. 8vo. pp. 32. \s. 
 
 Gribble (J. D. B.) A History of the Deccan. 
 
 With numerous Illustrations, Plates, Portraits, Maps 
 and Plans. Vol. I. Roy. 8vo. Cloth. 2\s, 
 
 In a style easy and pleasant the author tells the story of the Moham- 
 medan occupation of the Deccan the general style of the book and 
 
 the admirable photographs and drawings with which it is enriched 
 leave nothing to be desired". Athencetitn. 
 
 "Mr. J. D. B. Gribble has accomplished a difficult task. He has 
 constructed from original materials a continuous narrative of one of the 
 most confused periods of Indian history. He has also presented it with 
 a lucidity of style which will go far to render it acceptable to the reading 
 public .... The book is illustrated by a number of interesting reproduc- 
 tions of scenery and architecture in Southern India. These and the 
 maps, plans, and clear genealogical tables reflect credit both upon the 
 author and the publisher". Times. 
 
 "Mr. Gribble has brought great industry and knowledge of the country 
 to this compilation .... The work is of some historical importance". 
 
 Saturday Review. 
 
 Gray (James). See Buddhaghosuppatti. 
 Gray (James). See Jinalankara. 
 
 Guide to the Dutch East Indies. By Dr. J. F. van 
 
 Bemmelen and G. B. Hooyer. Trans, from the Dutch 
 by the Rev. B. J. Berrington B.A., with 16 Plates, 
 13 Maps and Plans, and a copious index. Sm. 8vo. 
 pp. 202. IS. 6cL 
 
 "For any one going in that direction this remarkably complete little 
 work is indispensable". Pall Mall Gazelle. 
 
 "The guide book omits nothing needed by the traveller. It describes 
 the necessary outfit, customs afloat and ashore, mode of living, how to dress, 
 how often to bathe, who to tip, and how much". The Shipping World. 
 
lo Luzac & Go's Publications. 
 
 Guirandon (F. G. de) Manuel de la langue foule, 
 parlee dans la Senegambie et le Soudan. Grammaire 
 textes, vocabulaire. 8vo. Cloth, pp. 144. 6s. 
 
 Halcombe (Charles J, H.) The Mystic Flowery 
 
 Land. A Personal Narrative. By CHARLES J. H. 
 Halcombe. Late of Imperial Customs. China, 8vo. 
 Cloth, gilt. pp. 226. \6s. 
 
 "This valuable and handsome volume contains thirty long chapters, 
 a frontispiece of the Author and his wife the latter in her Oriental 
 costume numerous fine reproductions from photographs, and several 
 beautiful coloured pictures representing many scenes and phases of 
 Chinese life, etchings and comprehensive notes by the Author. 
 
 "His pages are full of incident and his narrative often vivid and 
 vigorous". Times. 
 
 "The illustrations are good and numerous. Many are facsimiles of 
 coloured Chinese drawings showing various industrial occupations: others 
 are photogravures representing buildings and scenery". Morning Post. 
 
 "Handsomely attired in red, yellow and gold, with Chinese characters 
 to give further appropriateness to the outer garb, is this volume of 
 freely illustrated personal experience in China .... Mr. Halcombe gives 
 a graphic description of places and peoples, with their manners and 
 customs". Liverpool Courier. 
 
 "The illustrations are all good, and the Chinese pictures reproduced 
 in colours interesting. We have not seen any of them before". 
 
 Westminster Revieiv. 
 
 Hansei Zasshi. Monthly. Vol. I XII. (Vol. XIII in 
 progress). Annual subscription. 6s. 
 
 Hardy (R. Spence) The Legends and theories 
 
 of the Buddhists. Compared with History and 
 Science. 8vo. Cloth, pp. 244. js. 6d. 
 
 Hariri. The Assemblies of al Hariri. Translated from 
 the Arabic with an Introduction and notes, Historical 
 and Grammatical, by Th. Chenery and F. Stein- 
 GASS. With Preface and Index, by F. F. Arbuthnot, 
 2 Vols. 8vo. Cloth, pp. X, 540 and XI, 395. > \.\os. 
 
 Harper (Robert Francis) Assyrian and Ba- 
 bylonian Letters, belonging to the K. Collection 
 of the British Museum. By ROBERT FRANCIS HARPER, 
 of the University of Chicago. Vols. I to IV. Post 8vo. 
 Cloth. Price of each Vol. i. 5^-. net. 
 
 "The Assyriologist, will welcome them with gratitude, for they offer 
 
Liizac & Go's Publications. 
 
 him a mass of new material which has been carefully copied and well 
 printed, and which cannot fail to yield important results." Athenceum. 
 
 "The book is well printed, and it is a pleasure to read the texts 
 given in it, with their large type and ample margin." Academy. 
 
 Hebraica. A Quarterly Journal in the Interests 
 of Semitic Study. Edited by William R. Harper 
 and the Staff of the Semitic Department of the Uni- 
 versity of Chicago. Vol. I XL PubHshed quarterly. 
 Annual Subscription. 14^. 
 
 See American Journal of Semitic Languages, etc. 
 
 India. (The Native States of). See : Chakrabarti. 
 India. (The Armenians in). See : Seth. 
 
 Indian Antiquary (The) A Journal of Oriental 
 Research in Archaeology, Epigraphy, etc. etc. Edited 
 by R. C. Temple. Vol. I XXVI. (Vol. XXVII in 
 progress). Annual Subscription, i. \6s. 
 
 Indian Terms. (A Glossary of). See: Temple. 
 
 Indian Wisdom. See: Monier- Williams. 
 
 Jastrow's Dictionary of the Targumim, the Tal- 
 mud Babli and Yerushalmi, and the Midrashic Lite- 
 rature. Compiled by M. Jastrow, Ph. D. Parts I to 
 IX. 4to. pp. 480. 5^. each Part. 
 
 "This is the only Talmudic dictionary in English, and all students 
 should subscribe to it. The merits of this work are now too well known 
 to need repetition." yetvish Chronicle. 
 
 Jinalankara or "Embellishments of Buddha", by 
 
 Buddharakkhita. Edited with Introduction, Notes and 
 Translation, by James Gray. Two Parts in one. Demy 
 8vo. Cloth. 6s. 
 
 "The commendable care with which the volume has been prepared 
 for the use of students is evident throughout its pages. Athenaum. 
 
 Johnson (Capt. F. N). The Seven Poems etc. 
 See: Muallakat. 
 
 Johnston (C.) Useful Sanskrit Nouns and Verbs. 
 
 In English Letters. Compiled by CHARLES JOHNSTON, 
 
12 Liizac & Go's Publications. 
 
 Bengal Civil Service, Dublin University Sanskrit Pri- 
 zeman, India Civil Service Sanskrit Prizeman. Small 
 4to. Boards, pp. 30. 2s, 6d. 
 
 Johnston (C.) The Awakening to the Self. 
 
 Translated from the Sanskrit of Shankara the Master. 
 Oblong 8vo. Paper covers. 2s. 
 
 Journal of the Buddhist Text Society of India. 
 
 Edited by Sarat Candra Das, C. J. E. Vols. I to IV. 
 8vo. Calcutta, 1893 1897. i. los. 
 
 Messrs. Luzac & Co. are the English agents for the above and can 
 supply the Continuation. Snhscription. lo.v. each Vol. 
 
 Judson (A.) English-Burmese Dictionary. 
 
 Fourth Edition. Royal 8vo. Half bound, pp. 1752. 
 
 I. 12S. 
 
 Judson (A.) Burmese-English Dictionary. Re- 
 vised and enlarged by ROBERT C. STEVENSON. Royal 
 8vo. Paper covers, pp. 1192. 
 
 Kathakoga. See Tawney. 
 
 King (Leonard W.) Babylonian Magic and 
 
 Sorcery. Being "The Prayers of the Lifting of the 
 Hand". The Cuneiform Texts of a Group of Baby- 
 lonian and Assyrian Incantations and magical For- 
 mulae, edited with Transliterations, Translations, and 
 full Vocabulary from Tablets of the Kuyunjik Collec- 
 tion preserved in the British Museum. By LEONARD 
 W. King, M. A., Assistant in the Department of 
 Egyptian and Assyrian Antiquities, British Museum. 
 Roy. 8vo. Cloth. i8i-. net. 
 
 "We cannot pretend to form an adequate judgment of the merits of 
 Mr. King's work, but it is manifestly conceived and executed in a very 
 scholarly spirit." Times. 
 
 "Mr. King's book, will, we believe be of great use to all students of 
 Mesopotamian religions, and it marks an era in Assyriological studies in 
 England. ... A word of special praise is due to Mr. King for the ex- 
 cellence of his autograph plates of text." AthencBum. 
 
 "The work will be found a valuable addition to our knowledge of 
 Babylonian history, and to the study of compai^ative philology." 
 
 Mo7-mne Post. 
 
LiLzac & Go's Publications. 13 
 
 King, L. W. See: Luzac's Semitic Text and 
 Translation Series, Vols. II, iv and VI. 
 
 Kittel (Rev. F.) A Kannada-English Dictio- 
 nary. By Rev. F. KiTTEL, B. G. E. M. Royal 8vo. 
 Half-Bound, pp. L. 1725. i. \2s. 
 
 Korean Repository. Vols. I to III. Annual Subscrip- 
 tion 15^. Post free. 
 
 Land (J. P. N.) The Principles of Hebrew 
 
 Grammar. By J. P. N. Land, Professor of Logic 
 and Metaphysics in the University of Leyden. Trans- 
 lated from the Dutch by Reginald Lane Poole, 
 Balliol College, Oxford. Demy 8vo. Cloth, pp. XX, 
 219 (Published 'js. 6d.) Reduced price 5^. 
 
 Lives of the Persian Poets Series. See Daw- 
 latshah. 
 
 Loewe (L.) A Dictionary of the Circassian 
 
 Language. In two Parts. English Circassian Tur- 
 kish, and Circassian English Turkish. 8vo. Cloth. 
 (Published 21^.) Reduced price 6s. 
 
 Loewe (L.) Efes Damim. See: Efes. 
 
 Luzac's Oriental List. Containing Notes and News 
 on, and a Bibliographical List of all new Publications 
 on Africa and the East. Published Monthly. Annual 
 Subscription, 3^-. Vols. I to VIII (1890 1897) are still 
 to be had (with Index, half-bound), at 2. 15^-. 
 
 Vols. I to IV are nearly out of print and can only be sold in the set. 
 Vols V to VIII are still to be had at 5j. each vol. 
 
 "It deserves the support of Oriental students. Besides the catalogue 
 of new books published in England, on the Continent, in the, East, and 
 in America, it gives, under the heading of "Notes and News" details 
 about important Oriental works, which are both more full and more 
 cai-eful than anything of the sort to be found elsewhere." Academy. 
 
 "A bibliographical monthly publication which should be better known." 
 
 The Record. 
 
 Luzac's Semitic Text and Translation Series. 
 Vol. I: See: Budge. 
 
 Vol. II. The Letters and Despatches of Hammurabi king of Babylon 
 about B. C. 2250, to Sin-idinnam, King of Larsa, together with other 
 
14 Luzac & Go's Publications. 
 
 royal and ofificial correspondence of the same period: the Cuneiform 
 texts edited with an Introduction and short descriptions by L. W. King, 
 M. A. 
 
 This volume will contain about lOO letters relating to a variety of 
 official subjects, and their contents are of great importance for the study 
 of the history of Babylonia, Elam and the neighbouring districts about 
 the time of the patriarch Abraham. These letters reveal the system by 
 which Hammurabi maintained his rule in the remote provinces of his 
 newly acquired empire, and contain some of the orders and directions^, 
 which he issued for the movements of troops, for the building of 
 canals and waterways, for the food-supply of his capital, and for the 
 regulation of legal tribunals. The letters of Hammurabi are the oldest 
 Babylonian despatches extant. Ready in Jtitie. 
 
 Vol. III. The History of the Blessed Lady Mary the Virgin, and the 
 History of the Image of Christ, which the men of Tiberias mr.de to 
 mock at; the Syriac text edited, with an English translation, by E. A. 
 Wallis Budge, Litt. D., D. Lit., etc. Ready in October. 
 
 This Life of the Virgin is the fullest known to exist in Syriac, and 
 varies in many important particulars from the versions of which frag- 
 ments have already been published. The Life has been copied from an 
 ancient Nestorian MS., to the text of which have been added all the va- 
 riants found in the XVIth century MS. in the possession of the Royal 
 Asiatic Society of Great Britain. 
 
 VoL IV. The Letters and Despatches of Hammurabi together with 
 other official and private correspondence of the same period, by L. W. 
 King, M. A. 
 
 This volume will contain a number of transliterations and translations 
 of the texts of the lOO letters and despatches which are printed in vo- 
 lume 2; to these will be added indexes of proper names etc. and a 
 List of Characters. An attempt will be made to give a description of 
 the circumstances under which these letters were written, and short 
 notes on points of grammar, history, etc. will be added. In the Press. 
 
 Vol. V. The History of Rabban Hormizd by Mar Simon, the disciple 
 of Mar Yozadhak; the Syriac text edited, with an English translation 
 by E. A. Wallis Budge, Litt. D., D. Lit., etc. 
 
 The text describes the life of this famous Nestorian anchorite, the 
 building of his monastery, and the struggle which went on in the Vllth 
 century between the rival sects of Jacobites and Nestorians in Mesopotamia. 
 This prose version of the life of Rabban Hormizd is, probably, the 
 source from which the metrical versions were drawn 5 and it is of great 
 importance for the study of the second great development of monasti- 
 cism in Mesopotamia. /// the Press. 
 
 VoL VI. Babylonian Private Letters written during the period of the 
 First Dynasty of Babylon the Cuneiform texts edited with Introduction 
 and short descriptions by L. W. King, M. A. 
 
 This volume will contain about 200 letters of a private nature which 
 reveal the social condition of the country and incidentally throw much 
 light upon the civilization of the period. From grammatical and lexi- 
 
Luzac & Go's Publications. 15 
 
 cographical points of view these texts are of considerable importance, 
 for they afford numerous examples of unusual words and forms of ex- 
 pression. In the Press. 
 
 Vol. VII. The Life of Rabban Bar-Idta by John his disciple; The 
 Syrac text edited, with an English translation, by E. A. Wallis Budge, 
 Litt. D., D. Lit., etc. 
 
 Bar-Idta was the founder of a famous rule and monastery in Meso- 
 potamia in the Vllth centuiy, and the author of a verv valuable work 
 on monastic history which is quoted with respect by Thomas, Bishop 
 of Marga. He was a contemporary of Babhai of Mount Izla, and of 
 Jacob of Beth Abbe. 
 
 Volumes 5, 6, and 7 will, it is hoped be ready early next year. 
 
 Macnaghten (Sir W. Hay) Principle of Hindu 
 and Mohammedan Law. Republished from the 
 
 Principles and Precedences of the same. Edited by 
 the late H. H. WlLSON. 8vo. Cloth, pp. 240. 6s. 
 
 Margoliouth (D. S.) Arabic Papyri of the 
 
 Bodleian Library reproduced by the Collotype 
 Process. With Transcription and Translation. Text in 
 4to. pp. 7 and 2 Facsimiles in large folio. 5.$-. 
 
 Margoliouth (D. S.) Chrestomathia Baida- 
 
 wiana. The Commentary of El-Baidawi on Sura III. 
 Translated and explained for the Use of Students of 
 Arabic. By D. S. MARGOLIOUTH, M. A., Laudian 
 Professor of Arabic in the University of Oxford, etc. 
 etc. Post 8vo. Cloth. 12^. 
 
 "The book is as scholarly as it is useful. Of particular importance are 
 the numerous grammatical annotations which give the beginner an in- 
 sight into the method of the Arabic national grammarians, and which 
 form an excellent preparatory study for the perusal of these works in 
 
 the original The introduction and the remarks in particular show 
 
 how well Mr. Margoliouth has mastered the immense literatures of 
 Moslim Tradition, Grammar and Kalaim. . . . The perusal of the book 
 affords pleasure from beginning to end." Journal Royal Asiatic Society. 
 
 Mirkhond. The Rauzat-us-Safa ; or, Garden 
 
 of Purity. Translated from the Original Persian by 
 E. RehatseK; edited by F. F. Arbuthnot. Vols. I 
 to V. los. each Vol. 
 
 Vols. I and 2 contain : The Histories of Prophets, Kings and Khalifs. 
 Vols. 3 and 4 contain: The life of Muhammad the Apostle of Allah. 
 Vol. 5 contains: The Lives of Abit Bakr, O'mar, O'thman, and Ali', 
 the four immediate successors of Muhammad the Apostle. 
 
1 6 Luzac & Go's Publications. 
 
 Monier- Williams (Sir Monier) Indian Wisdom; 
 
 or Examples of the religious, philosophical, and ethi- 
 cal Doctrines of the Hindus, with a brief History of 
 the chief Departments of Sanskrit Literature, and 
 some account of the past and present Condition of 
 India, moral and intellectual. By Sir MONIER MONIER- 
 WlLLlAMS, K. C. I. E., M. A., Hon. D. C. L., Oxford. 
 Fourth Edition, enlarged and improved. Post 8vo. 
 Cloth, pp. 575. I. IS. 
 
 "His book .... still remains indispensable for the growing public, which 
 seeks to learn the outline of Indian literature and thought' in a simple and 
 readable form. We are glad to welcome the fourth edition of this eminently 
 readable book." Daily Chronicle. 
 
 "The learned professor's thorough mastery of his subject enables him 
 
 to deal effectively with his difficult task He omits nothing that 
 
 enters the scope of his work : he is choice in his selections and accurate 
 in his comments, and the result is a work as instructive and sound as 
 it is pleasant to read." Asiatic Qtiartcrly Revieiv. 
 
 "For all students of the philosophy of religion, as well as for all 
 especially interested in Indian literature and thought, the work is one 
 of very great value." Glasgow Herald. 
 
 "It is a fine volume and contains valuable additions by the author.... 
 this edition will be more than ever prized by students of Indian lore." 
 
 Scotsman. 
 
 Muallakat. The Seven Poems suspended in 
 
 the Temple at Mecca. Translated from the Arabic. 
 By Capt. F. E. Johnson. With an Introduction by 
 Shaikh Taizullabhai. 8vo. pp. XXIV, 238. ^s. 6d. 
 
 "This handy volume decidedly supplies a great want for those who 
 make a serious study of Arabic .... The grammatical, historical, geogra- 
 phical and other notes comments and explanations are ample and 
 thorough". Imperial and Asiatic Quarterly Reviezv. 
 
 Miiller (F. Max) Address delivered at the Ope- 
 ning of the Ninth International Congress of Orien- 
 talists, held in London, Sept. 5, 1892, 8vo. pp. 66. 
 IS. 6d. 
 
 Mystic Flowery Land. See: Halcombe. 
 
 Oriental Translation Fund (New), See : Mirkhond, 
 Tawney, Bana, and Hariri. 
 
Ltizac & Go's Publications. ly 
 
 Oudemans Jzn. (A. C.) The Great Sea-Ser- 
 
 pent. An historical and critical Treatise. With the 
 Reports of 187 Appearances (including those of the 
 Appendix), the Suppositions and Suggestions of scien- 
 tific and non-scientific Persons, and the Author's Con- 
 clusions. With 82 Illustrations. Royal 8vo. Cloth, pp. 
 XV, 592. I. 5^-. net. 
 
 "The volume is extremely interesting". Athenaeum. 
 
 Reis Sidi Ali. The Travels and Adventures of the 
 Turkish Admiral. In India, Afghanistan, Central Asia 
 and Persia 1553 1556. Translated from the Turkish 
 into English with notes. By H. Vambery. In 
 the Press. 
 
 Ridding (C. M.) See: Bana's Kadambari. 
 
 Rosen (F.) A Modern Persian Colloquial 
 
 Grammar, containing a short Grammar, Dialogues 
 and Extracts from Nasir Eddin Shah's Diaries, Tales, 
 etc. and a Vocabulary. Cr. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XIV, 400. 
 10^. 6d, 
 
 "Dr. Rosen's learned work will be useful to all who have occasion to 
 go to Persia, Baluchistan, and Afghanistan. The Vocabulary will be a 
 boon to students, especially as it is in the same volume with the 
 grammar and the dialogues." Publ. Circular. 
 
 "Very useful to students." WestiJiinster Reviezv. 
 
 "Excellent Guide to the acquisition of Pei'sian." Asiatic Quarterly 
 
 Review. 
 
 Rosthorn (A. de) On the Tea Cultivation in 
 Western Ssiich'uan and the Tea Trade with 
 Tibet via Tachienlu. 8vo. pp. 40. With Sketch 
 Map. 2s. net. 
 
 Ruben (Paul) Critical Remarks upon some 
 Passages of the Old Testament, by Paul Ruben, 
 Ph. D. 4to. Cloth, pp. II. 24, 14. ^s. 6d. 
 
 "It may suffice to congratulate ourselves that a scholar of vigorous 
 mind and accurate philological training is devoting his leisure to a sub- 
 ject worthy of attention .... Very many of the notes are in a high 
 degree stimulating and suggestive. The get up of the book is excellent". 
 
 Acadefny. 
 
 "Dr. Ruben shows much originality, a wide knowledge of authorities, 
 and a true grasp of critical principles". Jewish Chronicle. 
 
Part 
 
 I 
 
 Part 
 
 ^ 
 
 Part 
 
 6 
 
 Part 
 
 8 
 
 Part 
 
 II 
 
 Part 
 
 14 
 
 Part 
 
 18 
 
 Part 
 
 20 
 
 18 Liizac & Go's Publicatiotis. 
 
 Sacred Books of the Old Testament. A cri- 
 tical Edition of the Hebrew Text, Printed in Colours, 
 with Notes. Prepared by eminent Biblical Scholars 
 of Europe and America. Under the editorial direction 
 of Paul Haupt, Professor in the John Hopkins Univ. 
 Baltimore. Kdition de Luxe, in 120 numbered Co- 
 pies only. 4to. Subscription price for the complete 
 Work (20 Parts), ^ 20. 
 
 Prospectuses sent on application. The following Parts have already 
 been issued : 
 
 Book of Genesis, by C. J. Ball. pp. 120. London. 1896. 2. 
 Leviticus, by Prof. S. R. Driver, pp. 32. 1894. i6j-. 
 Joshua, by Prof. W. H. Bennet. pp. 32. 1895. i. 
 Samuel, by Prof. K. Budde. pp. loo. 1894. 1. \os. 
 Jeremiah, by Prof. C. H. Cornill. pp. 80. 1895. i. 
 Psalms, by J. Wellhausen, pp. 96. 1895. i. \os. 
 Book of Daniel, by A. Kamphausen, 4to. pp. 44. 1896. i. 
 Chronicles, by R. Kittel. pp. 82. 1895. i. \os. 
 
 A valuable "Edition de Luxe" in 120 numbered copies only, and 
 which may be described as the most splendidly got up Hebrew work 
 in existence. 
 
 Each single part is numbered and signed by the editor with his own 
 hand. The single parts will be issued in highly elegant covers. After 
 the conclusion of the work a handsome binding cover will be supplied. 
 
 Sankaranarayana (P.) English-Telugu Dicti- 
 onary, by P. Sankaranarayna M.A., M. R. A.S., 
 Tutor to their Highnesses the Princes of Cochin. 8vo. 
 Cloth, pp. 61, 756, \os. 6d. 
 
 Sanskrit Phonetics. A Manual of. See: Uhlen- 
 beck. 
 
 Sanskrit Nouns and Verbs. See : Johnston. 
 
 Sayce (A. H.) Address to the Assyrian Section 
 of the Ninth International Congress of Orientalists. 
 8vo. pp. 32. IS. 
 
 Sauerwein (G.) A Pocket Dictionary of the 
 
 English and Turkish Languages. Small 8vo. Cloth, 
 limp. pp. 298. 3^-. 6d. 
 
 Scholia on passages of the Old Testament. By 
 
 Max Jacob Bishop of ELdessa. Now first edited in the 
 
Luzac & Go's Publications. 19 
 
 original Syriac with an English translation and notes 
 by G. Phillip. DD. 8vo. Paper Covers. 5.^. 
 
 Seth (Mesrovb J.) History of the Armenians 
 in India. From the earliest Times to the present 
 Day. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XXIV, 199. 7^. 6d. net. 
 
 "The subject is invested with peculiar interest at the present time by 
 recent events in Asia Minor .... his unpretending little work is a valuable 
 i-eportory of original information never before accessible in print and 
 scarcely even known to exist." Times. 
 
 "The book is happily distinguished among the number of books recently 
 
 issued concerning Armenia in that it deals strictly with fact The 
 
 volume deserves the attention of every one interested in the history of 
 India and of the hardly treated race which seems to flourish better there 
 than in its own country." Scotsman. 
 
 "Sinnatamby". Letchimey. A Tale of Old Ceylon. 
 8vo. pp. Ill, 54. With Photogr. Plates and Illustra- 
 tions. In the Press. 
 
 Stein (M. A.) Catalogue of the Sanskrit MSS. 
 
 in the Raghunata Temple Library of His Highness 
 the Maharaja of Jammu and Kashmir. 4to. Cloth, pp. 
 423. \2S. 
 
 Steele's (R.) The Discovery of Secrets, attributed 
 to Geber from the MS Arabic text. 8vo. \s. 
 
 Stoffel (C.) Studies in English, Written and Spoken. 
 For the Use of continental Students. With Index. First 
 Series. Roy. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XII, 332. js. 6d. 
 
 Suhrillekha (The); or "Friendly Letter;" written 
 
 by Lung Shu (Nagarjuna), and addressed to King 
 Sadvaha. Translated from the Chinese Edition of 
 I-Tsing, by the late Rev. SAMUEL Beal, with the 
 Chinese Text. 8vo. pp. XIII, 51. 5^-. 
 
 Swami Vivekananda's Addresses. See: Vive- 
 kananda. 
 
 Tawney (C. H.) The Kathakoga; or Treasury 
 
 of Stories. Translated from Sanskrit Manuscripts. 
 With Appendix, containing Notes, by Prof. ERNST 
 Leumann. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XXIII, 260. los. 
 
20 Luzac & Go's Publications. 
 
 Temple (G.) A Glossary of Indian Terms relating 
 to Religion, Customs, Government, Land, and other 
 Terms and Words in Common Use. To which is added 
 a Glossary of Terms used in District Work in the N. 
 W. Provinces and Oudh., and also of those applied 
 to Labourers. With an Appendix giving Computation 
 of Time and Money, and Weights and Measures, in 
 British India, and Forms of Address. Roy. 8vo. Cloth, 
 pp. IV, 332. "js. 6d. 
 
 "The book is moderate in price and clear in print." Athcnceiuii. 
 
 "The book is handy, well printed and well got up and no student of 
 Indian subjects should be without it." Asiatic Quarterly Review. 
 
 "Students of Oriental travel may find something servicable in its 
 pages 5 and those who are engaged in trade in the East Indies might 
 occasionally turn to the volume, with profit, if it were on the office 
 shelf." The Nation. 
 
 Temple (Major R. C.) Notes on Antiquities 
 
 in Ramannadesa. (The Talaing Country of Burma.) 
 4to. pp. 40. With 24 Plates and a Map. 18^-. 
 
 Thomas, F. ^V., See: Bana, Harsa Carita. 
 Tiele (C. P.) Western Asia, according to the 
 
 Most Recent Discoveries. Rectorial Address on the 
 Occasion of the 318th Anniversary of the Leyden 
 University, 8th February, 1893. Translated by Eliza- 
 beth J. Taylor. Small 8vo. Bound, pp. 36. 2s. 6d. 
 
 "An authoritative summary of the results of recent Oriental research 
 and discovery." The Times. 
 
 "The address presents a graphic picture of the political situation in 
 Western Asia in the fifteenth and fourteenth centuries B. C." 
 
 Morning Post. 
 
 "The professor's grasp of his subject is very evident, and his deductions 
 from the materials commented on worthy of all attention." 
 
 Imperial afid Asiatic Quarterly Review. 
 
 T'oung Pao. Archives pour servir a I'etude 
 
 de I'histoire, des langues, de la geographic et de 
 I'ethnographie de I'Asie orientale. (Chine, Japon, Coree, 
 Indo-Chine, Asie Centrale et Malaise.) Redigees par 
 MM. G. SCHLEGEL et H. CORDIER. Vol. I VIII. 
 Vol. IX in progress). Annual Subscription. i , 
 
Liizac df Go's Publications, 21 
 
 Transactions of the Ninth International Con- 
 gress of Orientalists. London, 5th to 1 2th Sep- 
 tember, 1892.) Edited by E. Delmar MORGAN. 2 
 Vols. Roy. 8vo. Cloth. 1. 15 j-. 
 
 Vol. I. contains: Indian and Aryan Sections. i. ij-. 
 
 Vol. 11. contains : Semitic, Egypt and Africa, Geographical, Archaic 
 Greece and the East, Persia and Turkey, China, Central Asia and the 
 Far East, Australasia, Anthropology and Mythology Sections. i. \s. 
 
 Uhlenbeck. (C. C). A Manual of Sanskrit Pho- 
 netics. In comparison with the Indogermanic mo- 
 ther-language, for students of Germanic and classical 
 philology. 8vo. pp. 115. 6s. 
 
 Ummagga Yataka. See: Yatawara. 
 
 Usha. The Dawn. A Vedic Periodical, edited by 
 Pandit Satya Vrata Samasrami. 8vo. Published monthly. 
 Annual subscription. i. i.s-. 
 
 Valmiki. The Ramayan of Valmiki. Translated 
 into English Verse, by R. T. H. Griffith, M. A., 
 C. I. E. Complete in one Volume. 8vo. Cloth, pp. IX, 
 
 576. js. 6d. 
 
 Vambery, see: Reis Sidi Ali. 
 
 Vivekananda (Swami). Lectures delivered in 
 London. Nos. i 12. 6d. each. 
 
 Vivekananda (Swami). Madras Lectures. 8vo. 
 IS. 6d. 
 
 Vizianagram Sanskrit Series. Under the Super- 
 intendence of Arthur Venis, M.A., Oxon, Principal, 
 Sanskrit College, Benares. Different Prices. 
 
 West (Sir Raymond) Higher Education in 
 India: Its Position and Claims. 8vo. pp. 61. 1892. is. 
 
 Wildeboer (G.) The Origin of the Canon of 
 
 of the Old Testament An historico-critical En- 
 quiry. Translated by WiSNER BAgON. Edited with 
 
Luzac & Go's Publications. 
 
 Preface by Prof. GEORGE F. MoORE. Royal 8vo. 
 Cloth, pp. XII, 182. js. 6d. 
 
 "We will only add that we cordially echo the professor's hope that 
 his book may not only be read by professed students but that it may 
 come also into the hands of such as have already left the University." 
 
 Gt{ai'dia?t. 
 
 "The method adopted is that of historical investigation: the student 
 is thus enabled to see how the results of critical inquiry have been 
 obtained .... he accompanies a guide who is familiar with the way 
 which leads to them." Academy. 
 
 "The first thing to notice is the translation. This is how a book ought 
 to be translated .... The book must be used, not read merely ... it is 
 independent, painstaking, farseeing." Expository Times. 
 
 Winckler (H.) The Tell-El-Amarna Letters. 
 
 Transliteration, English Translation, Vocabulary, etc. 
 Roy. 8vo. Cloth, pp. XLII, 416, and Registers 50 
 pages. I. IS. net. 
 
 The same. In Paper Covers. i. 
 
 With the Dutch in the East. See: Cool. 
 
 Wright (W.) The Book of Jonah in four Se- 
 mitic versions. Chaldee, Syriac, Aethiopic and Arabic. 
 With corresponding glossaries. 8vo. Cloth, pp. 148. 4^-. 
 
 Wynkoop (J. D.) Manual of Hebrew Syntax. 
 
 Translated from the Dutch by C. VAN DEN BlESEN. 
 Bvo. Cloth, pp. XXII, 152 and Index. 2s: 6d. net. 
 
 "It is a book, which every Hebrew student should possess, .... we 
 recommend it for general usefulness, and thank Dr. van den Biesen for 
 giving it to the English reader." yewish World. 
 
 "It is one of those books which will become indispensable to the English 
 student who will desire to become acquainted with the construction of 
 Hebrew syntax .... this takes a high rank and will undoubtedly become 
 a general text book on the subject in many colleges and universities."" 
 
 American Hebrezv News. 
 
 Wynkoop (J. D.) Hebrew Grammar. Trans- 
 lated from the Dutch by C. VAN DEN BlESEN. 8vo. 
 Cloth. 2s. 6d. net. 
 
 Yatawara (J. B.) The Ummaga Yataka, trans- 
 lated into English. /// the Press. 
 
FOREIGN AND ORIENTAL BOOKS. 
 
 Messrs. LUZAC & Co. having Agents in all the prin- 
 cipal Towns of the Continent, America and the East, 
 are able to supply any Books not in stock at the shor- 
 test notice and at the most reasonable terms. 
 
 Subscriptions taken for all Foreign, American and 
 Oriental Periodicals. 
 
 LIST OF 
 INDIAN GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 Messrs. LuzAC & Co. are Official Agents for the sale ot 
 the Indian Government Publications. 
 
 Acts of the several Governments in India. Different dates and prices. 
 
 Aden Gazetteer. By Captain F. M. Hunter. 1877. 5^-. 
 
 Adi Granth. By E. Trumpp. 1877. 1. 
 
 Agriculture, Report on Indian. By J. A. Voelcker, Ph. D. 1893. ^s. 6d. 
 
 Annals of the Calcutta Botanic Gardens : 
 
 I. Monograph on Ficus. Part i. 1887. 1 5^. 
 Part 2. 1888. 2. 
 
 Appendix. 1889. los. 6d. 
 
 II. Species of Artocarpus, &c. 1889. i I2j- 6^. 
 
 III. Species of Pedicularis, &c. 1891. 3 \os. 
 
 IV. Anonacese of British India. 1893. 3 loj. 
 
 v., Part I. A Century of Orchids. Memoir of W. Roxburgh. 1895. 
 
 3 3 J. coloured, i I2j. dd. uncoloured. 
 v., Part 2. A Century of New and Rare Indian Plants. 1896. i I2j. dd. 
 VI., Part I. Turgescence of Motor Organs of Leaves. Parasitic species 
 
 of Choanephora. 1895. 1 \os. 
 VII. Bambusese of British India. 1896. 2. 
 Anwar-i-Soheli. By Colonel H. S. Jarrett. 1880. 15J. 
 Archaeological Survey of India. (New Series) : 
 
 IX. South Indian Inscriptions. By E. Hultzsch, Ph.D. Vol. I. 1890. 4J. 
 X. Vol. II, Part. I. 
 
 1891. 3J. dd. 
 
24 Ltizac &^ Go's Lht of Indian Government Publications. 
 
 South Indian Inscriptions. By E. Hultzsch, Ph.D. Vol. II, Part 2. 
 
 1892. 3 J. (id. 
 South Indian Inscriptions. By E. Hultzsch, Ph.D. Vol. II, Part 3. 
 1895. 5j. dd. 
 XI. Sharqi Architecture of Jaunpur. By A. Fiihrer, Ph.D. 1889. 
 I \s. 6d. 
 XII. Monumental Antiquities in the North-West Provinces. By 
 
 A. Fiihrer, Ph.D. 1891. 13J. 6d. 
 XV. South Indian Buddhist Antiquities. By A. Rea. 1894. I2j. 6r/. 
 XVII. Architectural, &c. Remains in Coorg. By A. Rea. 1894. 2s. 
 XVIII. The Moghul Architecture of Fatehpur Sikri. By E. W. Smith. 
 Part I. 1894. I 5J-. 
 The Moghul Architecture of Fatehpur Sikri By E. W. Smith. 
 Part 2. 1896. i']s. 6d. 
 XXI. Chalukyan Architecture. By A. Rea. 1896. i 2s. 
 XXIII. Muhammadan Architecture in Gujarat. By J. Burgess, CLE., 
 LL.D. 1896. I. 
 Army List, The Indian. Quarterly, ^s. 
 
 Art Ware, Photographs of Madras and Burmese. 1886. 1 15^. 
 Arzis : Bengali, Canarese, Hindi, Mahratta, Malayalam, Tamil, Telugu, 
 and Urdu. 'js. 6d. each. 
 
 Translations of the above (except Hindi). 7^. 6d. each. 
 
 Beer Casks, Destruction of, by a Boring Beetle. By W. F. H. Blandford. 
 
 1893. 6d. 
 Bibliographical Index of Indian Philosophical Systems. By F. Hall. 1859. 9J-. 
 Bihar Peasant Life. By G. A. Grierson, Ph.D., CLE. 1885. 65. 6d. 
 Bihari Language, Seven Grammars of. By G. A. Grierson, Ph.D. CLE. 
 
 (8 parts). 188387. i. 
 Bihari, The Satsaiya of. Edited by G. A. Grierson, Ph.D., CLE. 1896. 7^. 6d. 
 Bombay Gazetteer, Edited by J. M. Campbell, LL.D., CLE. : 
 
 I. (Not yet published). II. Surat and Broach. 1877. 5^-. 6d. 
 III. Kaira and Panch Mahals. 1879. 2s. 6d. IV. Ahmedabad. 
 1879. 3^. V. Cutch, Palanpur, and Mahi Kantha. 1880. 4^-. 
 
 VI. Rewa Kantha, Narukot, Cambay, and Surat States. 1880. 3^-. 
 
 VII. Baroda. 1883. 5^. VIII. Kathiawar. 1884. 6s. 6d. 
 IX. (Not yet published). X. Ratnagiri and Savantvadi. 1880. 
 5j. XL Kolaba and Janjira. 1883. 5^. XII. Khandesh. 1880. 
 6s. XIII. Thana. (2 parts). 1882. 8^. XIV. Thana: places 
 of interest. 1882. ^s. XV. Kanara. (2 parts). 1883. 'js. 6d. 
 XVI. Nasik. 1883. 6^. 6d. XVII. Ahmadnagar. 1884. ^s. 
 XVIIL Poona. (3 parts). 1885. 15 j. 6d. XIX. Satara. 1885. 
 6s. 6d. XX. Sholapur. 1884. 5^-. XXI. Belgaum. 1884. 6j-. 
 XXII. Dharwar. 1884. 7^. 6d. XXIII. Bijapur. 1884. 6^.6^. 
 XXIV. Kolhapur. 1886. 5^-. XXV. Botany of the Presidency. 
 1886. 4J. 6d. XXVI. Materials for a Statistical of Bombay Town 
 and Island, Parts I., II., and III. 1893 94. 5^-. each. 
 
 British Burma Gazetteer. Edited by H. R. Spearman. (2 vols.) 1879 80. 
 
 I 13^-. 6d. 
 Buddha Gaya; the Hermitage of Sakya Muni. By Rajendralal Mitra. 
 
 1878. 3. 
 Burmese, Tables for the Transliteration of, into English. 1896. i.^. 
 
Liizac &> Go's List of India?i Government Publications. 25 
 
 Catalogue of the India Office Library, Vol. I (with Index). 1888. ioj. 6^'. 
 (Supplement). 1895. 5^. 
 
 of the Arabic MSS. in the India Office Library. By O. Loth. 
 
 1877. 15J. 
 of the Mandalay MSS. in the India Office Library. By V .Fausboll. 
 
 1897. 2.S. 
 
 of the Pali MSS. in the India Office Library. By H. Olden- 
 
 berg. 1882. 5J-. 
 of the Sanskrit MSS. in the India Office Library. By Dr. J. 
 
 Eggeling. (Parts I to V). 1887 96. 10^. dd. each. 
 of Sanskrit MSS., Bikanir. By Rajendralal Mitra. 1880. 3^. 
 
 Tanjore. By A. C. Burnell. 1880. 1 \\s. 6d. 
 
 of MSS. in Oudh. By A. Sprenger 1854. 15^. 
 
 Chestnuts, Papers on Spanish. With Introduction by Sir George Bird- 
 wood, K. C. I., C.S.I. 1892. IS. 
 Cholera, What can the State do to prevent is? By Dr. J. M. Cun- 
 ningham. 1884. 2>^. 
 Coorg Gazetteer. 1884. 5^-. 
 Corpus Inscriptionum Indicarum: 
 
 I. Inscriptions of Asoka. By Major-General Sir A. Cunningham, 
 K. C. I. E., C.S.I. 1877. 9i-. 6d. 
 II. (Not yet published.) 
 III. Inscriptions of the early Gupta King. By J. F. Fleet, C. I. E. 
 1889. I 1 3 J. 6d. with plates. i without plates. 
 Covenanted Civil Servants, Manual of Rules applicable to. Second 
 edition. 1891. is. 6d. 
 
 Dictionary of Indian Economic Products. By Dr. Geo Watt, C. I. E. 
 
 (6 vols, in 9). 1889 93. 3 3^. 
 Ditto, Index to. 1896. 3^. 
 Durga puja. By Pratapa Chandra Ghosha. 1871. 6s. 
 
 English-Sanskrit Dictionary. By Sir M. Monier-Williams, K. C. I. E. 
 1851. 1 10s. 
 
 Fibres. Report on Indian. By C. F. Cross, E. J. Bevan, &c. 1887. 5^. 
 Finance and Revenue Accounts of the Government of India. Annual 
 
 volumes. 2s. 6d. each. 
 Forest Working Plans. By W. E. D'Arcy. (Second edition). 1892. is.6d. 
 Fort St. George Diary and Consultation Books: 1681 (Selection) 1893. 
 
 3^. 6d. 1682. 1894. 4J-. 1683. 1894. 5^. 6d. 1684. 1895. 
 
 5J-. 6d. 1685. 1895. 7J. 
 
 Geological Survey Department Publications. 
 
 Glossary of Indian Terms. By H. H. Wilson. 1855. 1 \os. 
 
 Hastings, Warren, Selections from the Records of the Foreign Depart- 
 ment relating to the Administration of. Edited by 
 G. W. Forrest, B. A. (3 vols.) 1890. i6.f. 
 The Administration of. (A reprint of the Introduction 
 
 to the foregoing.) By G. W. Forrest, B. A. 1892. 
 5^. 6d. 
 
 India Office Marine Records, List of. 1896. 5^. 
 
 Kachin Language, Handbook of the. By H. F. Hertz. 1895. is. 
 
26 Liizac dr' Go's List of Indian Government Publications. 
 
 Lansdowne, Lord, The Administration of. By G. W. Forrest, B. A. 
 
 1894. IS. 6d. 
 
 Lepcha Grammar. By Colonel G. P. Mainwaring. 1876. 3^. 
 Lighthouse Construction and Illumination, Report on. By F. W. Ashpitel. 
 
 1895. I 9J-. 6d. 
 
 Madras District Manuals (revised issues:) 
 South Canara (2 vols.) 1894. 4^-. 
 North Arcot (2 vols.) 1895. 6j-. 
 
 Malabar Manual. By W. Logan. (3 vols.) 1891. 1 2s. 6d. 
 
 Manava-Kalpa-Sutra. By Th. Goldstiicker. 1861. 3. 
 
 Manual of Hydraulics. By Captain H. D. Love, R. E. 1890. 5^-. 
 
 Marathi Dictionary. By J. T. Molesworth. 1857. i6s. 
 
 Marathi Grammar. By the Rev. Ganpatrao R. Navalkar. (Third edition.) 
 1894. los. 6d. 
 
 Meteorological Department Publications. 
 
 Muntakhabat-i-Urdu. (Second edition.) 1887. is. lod. 
 
 Mutiny, the Indian, Selections from the Records of the Military De- 
 partment relating to. Edited by G. W. Forrest, B. A. Vol. I. 1893. 
 I2S. 6d. 
 
 North-East Frontier of Bengal, Relations of the Government with the 
 Hill Tribes of the. By Sir Alexander Mackenzie, K. C. S. I. 1884. 
 6s. 6d. 
 North-West Provinces Gazetteer: 
 
 I. Bundelkhand, 1874. 8j. 6d. IL Meerut Part. I. 1875.6^.6^/. 
 III. Meerut, Part. II. 1876. Ss. 6d. IV. Agra, Part. I. 1876. 
 8j. 6d. V. Rohilkhand. 1879. %s. 6d. VI. Cawnpore, Go- 
 rakhpur and Basti. 1881. 9^-. VII. Farukhabad and Agra. 1884. 
 8j. VIII. Muttra, Allahabad and Fatehpur. 1884. los. IX. 
 Shahjahanpur, Moradabad aud Rampur Native State. 1883. 8j. 
 X. Himalayan Districts, Part. I. 1882. 13^-. XL Himalayan 
 Districts, Part. II. 1884. I2^.| 6d. XII. Himalayan Districts 
 Part. III. 1886. I2s. XIII. Azamgarh, Ghazipur and Ballia' 
 1883. 8j-. XIV. Benares, Mirzapur and jaunpur. 1884. los. 
 
 Oudh Gazetteer. (3 vols.) 187778. i. 
 
 Paintings, &c. in the India Office, Descriptive Catalogue of. By W. 
 
 Forster. 1893. is. 
 Prakrita Prakasa. By E. B. Cowell. 1854. 9^. 
 Prem Sagar. By E. B. Eastwick. 1851. 15^. 
 
 Rajputana Gazetteer. (3 vols.) 1879 ^o- i5-^- 
 
 Rigveda Sanhita. Vols. IV to VI. By Professor Max Miiller. 1862 74. 
 
 2 I2s. 6d. per volume. 
 
 Index to ditto. 2 5^-. 
 Rigveda Translations. By H. PL Wilson. Vols I, III and IV. 1850 
 
 66. 13J. 6d. per volume. 
 
 Vols. V and VL 1888. i8j. per volume. 
 
 Sanskritt MSS. in S. India, First and Second Reports on. By Dr. 
 
 Hultzsch. 1895 96. Is. Sd. each. 
 Scientific Memoirs by Medical Officers of the Indian Army : 
 
 Part I. 1885. 2s. 6d. Part IL 1887. 2s. 6d. Part III. 1888. 
 
Luzac &^ Go's List of Indiafi Government Publications. 11 
 
 4J. Part IV. 1889. 2 J. dd. Part V. 1890. 4^. Part VI. 
 
 1 89 1. \s. Part VII. 1892. 4^. Part VIII. 1893. 4J. 
 
 Part IX. 1895. \s. 
 
 Selections from the Records of the Burmese Hluttaw. 1889. 6.f. 
 
 Sikkim Gazetteer. By H. H. Risley, C. I. E., and others. 1894. I2J. 6^. 
 
 Specimens of Languages in India. By Sir G. Campbell, K. C. S. I. 
 
 1874. I. ids. 
 Survey Department Publications. 
 
 Surveys 1875 90, Memoir on the Indian. By C. E. D. Black. 1891. 
 7^'. dd. 
 
 Tamil Papers. By Andrew Robertson. 1890. 4^. 
 
 Technical Art Series of Illustrations of Indian Architectural Decorative 
 Work for the use of Art Schools and Craftsmen : 
 
 188687. (6 plates.) IS. 188889. (18 plates.) ds. 1890. 
 
 (2 plates.) 4J-. 1891. (18 plates.) 6s. 1892. (13 plates.) 
 
 4J-. 6d. 1893. (12 plates) a^s. 1894. (14 plates.) 5^. 
 
 1895. (12 plates.) 4J-. 1896. (15 plates.) 4^. 
 
 Telegu Reader. By C. P. Brown. (2 vols.) 1852. 14^. 
 
 Textile Manufactures and Costumes of the People of India. By Dr. Forbes. 
 
 Watson. 1866. I. I J. 
 Tibetan-English Dictionary. By H. A. Jaeschke. 1881. 1. 
 Timber, Mensuration of. By P. J. Carter. 1893. \s. 
 Tobacco. Cultivation and Preparation of, in India. By Dr. Forbes 
 
 Watson. 1 87 1. 5 J. 
 Tombs or Monuments in Bengal, Inscriptions on. Edited by C. R. 
 Wilson, M.A. 1896. 3^. 6d. 
 
 Vikramarka, Tales of. By Ravipati Gurumurti. 1850. is. 
 
 Yield tables of the Scotch Pine. By W. Schlich, Ph. D. 1889. \s. 
 
 N.B. In addition to the above, a large number of departmental re- 
 ports, &c., are on sale at the various Government presses in India. 
 These publications are not kept in stock at the India Office ; but should 
 copies of them be required, they will be furnished (on payment), as 
 far as possible, from the supply received for official purposes. 
 
 In all cases applications for publications must be made through the 
 official agents. 
 
INDEX OF PRIVATE NAMES. 
 
 Apte, M. C, I 
 Arbuthnot, F. F., lo, 15 
 D'Aicy, W. E. D., 25 
 Ashpitel, F. W.; 26 
 
 Bacon, Wisner, 21 
 
 Ball, C. J., 18 
 
 Beal, S., 19 
 
 Bemmelen, J. F. van, 9 
 
 Bennet, W. H., 18 
 
 Berrington, B. J., 9 
 
 Bevan, E. J., 25 
 
 Bezold, C, 3 
 
 Biesen, C. van den, 22 
 
 Birdwood, Sir G., 25 
 
 Black, C. E. D., 27 
 
 Blackden, M. W., 4 
 
 Blandford, W. F. H., 24 
 
 Brown, C. P., 27 
 
 Browne, Edward G., 9 
 
 Budde, K., 18 
 
 Budge, E. A. Wallis 4, 14, 15 
 
 Burgess, J., 24 
 
 Burnell, A. C., 25 
 
 Campbell, J. M., 24 
 Campbell, Sir G., 27 
 Cappeller, Carl, 5 
 Carter, P. J., 27 
 Chakrabarti J- C., 6 
 Chenery, J., 10 
 Cool, W., 6 
 Cordier, H., 20 
 Cornill, C. H., 18 
 Cowell, E. B., 2, 26 
 Cowper, B. H., 7 
 Cross, C. J., 25 
 Cunningham, J. M., 25 
 
 Cunningham, Sir A., 25 
 Cust, R. N., 7, 8 
 
 Das, Sarat Candra, 13 
 Driver, S. R., 18 
 
 Eastwick, E. B., 26 
 Edkins, J., 8 
 Eggeling, J., 25 
 Eitel, E. J., 8 
 
 Fausboll, v., 25 
 Fleet, J. F., 25 
 Forrest, G. W., 25, 26 
 Forster, W., 26 
 Frazer, G. W., 4 
 Fiihrer, A., 24 
 
 Ghosha, P. C, 25 
 Gladstone (VV. E.), 9 
 Goldstlicker, J., 26 
 Gray, J., 4, 1 1 
 Gribble, J. D. B., 9 
 Grierson, G. A., 24 
 Griffith, R. J. H., 21 
 Guirandon, F. G. de, 10 
 Gurumurti, R., 27 
 
 Halcombe C. J. H., 10 
 Hall, F. 24 
 Hardy, R. S., 10 
 Harper, W. R., i, 3, 11 
 Harper, R. F., 10 
 Haupt, P., 17. 
 Hertz, PI. F., 25 
 Hirschfeld, H., 2 
 Hooyer, G. B., 6, 9 
 Hultzsch, E., 23, 26 
 Hunter, F. M., 23 
 
Index of Private Names. 
 
 29 
 
 Jacob, Max, 18 
 Jaeschke, H. A., 27 
 Jarrett, H. S., 23 
 Jastrow, M., ii 
 Johnson, F. E., 16 
 Johnston, C, ii, 12 
 Judson, A., 13 
 
 Kamphausen, A., i8 
 King, L. W., 12, 14 
 Kittel, F., 13 
 Kittel, R., 18 
 
 Lacouperie, T. de, 2 
 Land, J. P. N., 13 
 Leumann, E., 19 
 Levinsohn, J. B., 8 
 Loewe, L., 8, 13 
 Logan, W., 26 
 Loth, O., 25 
 Love, H. D., 26 
 Luzac, C. G., 3 
 
 Mackenzie, Sir A., 26 
 Macnaghten, (Sir W. Hay), 15 
 Mainwaring, G. P., 26 
 Margoliouth, D. S., 15 
 Mitra, R., 24, 25 
 Molesworth, J. T. 26 
 Monier-Williams, Sir M., 16, 25 
 Moore, G.'F., 22 
 Morgan, E.-Dehnar, 21 
 
 Navalkar, G. R., 26 
 
 Oldenberg, H., 25 
 Oudemans, A. C, 17 
 
 Poole, R. Lane, 13 
 
 Rea, A., 24. 
 Rehatsek, E., 15 
 Ridding, C. M., 2 
 Risley, H. H., 27 
 Robertson, A., 27 
 
 Rosen, F., 17 
 Rosthorn, A. de, 17 
 Ruben, P., 17 
 
 Samasrami, S. V., 21 
 Sankaranarayna, P., 18 
 Sauerwein, G., 18. 
 Sayce, A. H. 18 
 Schlegel, G., 20. 
 Schlich, W. , 27. 
 Seth, Mesrovb J., 19 
 Smith, E. W., 24 
 Sprenger, A., 25 
 Steele, R., 19 
 Stein, M. A., 19 
 Steingass, F., 10 
 Stoffel, C., 19 
 
 Taylor, E. J., 6, 20 
 Tawney, C. H,, 19 
 Temple, G., 20 
 Temple, R. C., 11, 20 
 Thomas, F. W., 2 
 Tiele, C. P., 20 
 Trumpp, E., 23 
 
 Uhlenbeck, C. C., 21 
 
 Vambery, H., 17 
 Venis, A., 21 
 Vivekananda Swami, 21 
 Voelcker, J. A., 23 
 
 Watson, F., 27 
 Watt, G. 25 
 Wellhausen, J., 18 
 West, Sir R., 21 
 Wildeboer, G., 21 
 Wilson, C. R., 27 
 Wilson, H. H., 15, 25, 26 
 Winckler, H., 22 
 Wright, W., 22 
 Wynkoop, J. D., 22 
 
 Yatawara, J. B., 22 
 
LUZAC'S ORIENTAL LIST, 
 
 NOTICE TO OUR READERS. 
 
 With this number we enter upon the eighth year of 
 the pubHcation of our Oriental List." Four years 
 ago in the first number of our fourth volume we 
 thanked our readers for the generous support we had 
 received from various quarters, including some flatte- 
 ring notices in our contemporaries referring to the 
 value of our List", and we now tender our thanks 
 to an extended circle of readers. Within recent years 
 the number of works on oriental subjects has incre- 
 ased enormously, and our List" was started with 
 the object of furnishing a record of such works which 
 should be published at regular intervals. Our aim has 
 therefore been to give each month a complete list of 
 oriental books published in England, on the Conti- 
 nent, in the East and in America, while under the 
 heading; Notes and News" we have endeavoured to 
 give a faithful account of the progress made during 
 the month in the various branches of oriental lear- 
 ning, literature and archaeology. The encouragement 
 we have continuously received from the beginning of 
 the undertaking emboldens us to believe that the 
 List" has really supplied a want on the part of those 
 who from taste or profession are interested in the 
 languages , literatures and antiquities of the East , 
 and we therefore venture to appeal to our readers 
 who are in the habit of consulting our List" when 
 making out their orders to send them to us direct. 
 
 London, Jan. '98. LUZAC & Co. 
 
 PRINTED BY E. J. BRILL, LEYDEN (HOLLAXD). 
 
THIS BOOK IS DUU ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
 WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
 DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 APR 16 1943 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 LD 21-100to-7,'39(402s) 
 
? 
 
 4:2ns i 
 
 1/ 
 

 .. l l ll' l !|i l!i||| l f .?Ml f t| lf